dialogl 1.99a reinstated as lppl (24jan13)

git-svn-id: svn://tug.org/texlive/trunk@28946 c570f23f-e606-0410-a88d-b1316a301751

25 files changed, 13479 insertions, 3 deletions

diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dialogl/Makefile b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dialogl/Makefile
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..713542232f7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dialogl/Makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,52 @@
+# Copyright 2013 TeX Users Group.
+# This file is part of the dialogl package, released under the LPPL;
+# see dialogl.ins for details.
+
+pkg = dialogl
+dtx = $(pkg).dtx grabhedr.dtx listout.dtx menus.dtx
+#
+srcfiles = Makefile README
+srcfiles += $(pkg).ins $(dtx)
+srcfiles += cnvunits.tex dia-driv.tex
+srcfiles += dialogl-doc.sty
+srcfiles += fontmenu.tex fontmenu.lg # doc
+srcfiles += diatest.tex
+derivedfiles =
+
+opt = --interaction=nonstopmode --file-line-error
+latex = latex $(opt)
+pdflatex = pdflatex $(opt)
+#
+%.pdf: %.tex
+	$(pdflatex) $<
+	$(pdflatex) $<
+
+default: all
+all: dist
+
+derivedfiles += default.los
+default.los: dialogl.dtx
+
+derivedfiles += codialog.pdf
+codialog.pdf: codialog.tex
+	echo P | pdflatex $<
+	echo P | pdflatex $<
+
+derivedfiles += dia-driv.pdf
+dia-driv.pdf: dialogl-doc.sty
+
+# doesn't really depend on dialog.sty for running, but we want to make
+# sure the .ins works.
+dia-driv.pdf: dialog.sty
+dialog.sty grabhedr.sty listout.tex menus.sty: $(pkg).ins $(dtx)
+	yes | head -100 | latex $<
+# \askforoverwritefalse seemingly has no effect.
+
+dist: $(pkg).zip
+$(pkg).zip: manifest.txt $(srcfiles) $(derivedfiles)
+	chmod a+rw $^
+	rm -f $@; zip $@ $^
+
+manifest.txt: $(srcfiles)
+	chmod a+rw $^
+	echo $@ $^ | tr ' ' '\n' >$@
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dialogl/README b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dialogl/README
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..92227b458a6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dialogl/README
@@ -0,0 +1,158 @@
+Copyright 1994 Michael John Downes
+Copyright 2013 TeX Users Group
+
+This file is part of the dialogl package, released under the LPPL;
+see dialogl.ins for details.
+
+This package was written by Michael Downes, who passed away in 2003.  He
+released it under a custom license, now considered nonfree.  In October
+2012, his heirs (his children Zoe, Elizabeth, and Mia Downes) have all
+agreed to re-releasing his work under any version of the LaTeX Public
+Project License.  Therefore, the package is now released under the LPPL,
+version 1 or (at your option) any later version.
+
+The only changes in this release are to the license, to remove examples
+lacking known-free licenses, and to remove the .stp files for plain TeX
+(which were apparently manually created by editing the .sty's).
+The actual code is the same as Michael's last release.
+
+
+The `dialogl' collection                     Michael Downes, 10-Nov-1994
+
+The purpose of the `dialogl' collection is to gather together in one
+place a lot of information and examples---probably more than you really
+wanted---about how to write TeX macros to carry on dialog with the user.
+The centerpiece of the package is the file `dialog.sty', which makes it
+easy to add bits of dialog to a LaTeX document; it can also be used with
+non-LaTeX macro packages, if they are plain.tex compatible. Another
+file, listout.tex, has a menu system built with the functions defined in
+menus.sty, which you may enjoy trying out. listout.tex was originally
+written to work with plain TeX; my later attempts to retrofit LaTeX
+compatibility may have some gaps, but it seems to work in the simple
+tests that I have done.
+
+The total size of the dialogl collection is approximately 580K.
+
+INSTALLATION:
+
+LATEX: The .sty files and listout.tex should go into your
+LaTeX input files area, wherever that may be on your system. The
+remaining files can go wherever you want.
+
+
+Suggested usage:
+
+(1) Try using listout.tex to print out some e-mail or program source
+files (e.g. TeX macros), eight or ten pages: Give the command
+
+  tex listout
+
+Navigate through the menu system, try to break it by giving bizarre
+answers, look for other kinds of deficiencies.  Find and try out the
+`tiny tabs' option. Find out how to make Control-L characters produce a
+`newpage' effect in the printout.
+
+(2) Print pages 1--5 of the documentation for dialog.sty (dia-driv.tex,
+~25 pages total, see below). You will need doc.sty to do this. Look at
+the user functions described in the documentation to see which ones you
+might want to use.
+
+(4) If you are interested, print out codialog.tex (29 pages): it gives
+a technical overview of TeX's capabilities for dialog, with various
+examples. Further technical discussion is found in the .dtx files, which
+can be printed out individually or using the driver file dia-driv.tex.
+
+  dialogl.dtx   11 pages
+  menus.dtx      9 pages
+  grabhedr.dtx   4 pages
+  listout.dtx   40 pages (includes a full listing of menus at the end)
+
+FUTURE ENHANCEMENTS NEEDED
+
+---Add \nmenu, \nxmenu.
+
+---Adapt further for LaTeX2e. `menus' might perhaps better be done as a
+package option of the dialog package:
+
+  \usepackage[menus]{dialog}
+
+to cut down on the number of different files required.
+
+---Add support for reading menus from disk to cut down on memory
+consumption (currently latex2e+listout.tex uses more than 65K,
+producing `TeX capacity exceeded' error for small TeXs).
+
+---Provide better documentation about what is available for use in the
+running heads/feet (\todaysdate, \nowtime, (\TeXdate \TeXtime?),
+\thisfilename, \dirprefix, etc. Also \folio should be separated into
+\columnfolio and \pagefolio or maybe \pagefolio and \sheetfolio so that
+they can be put in different places separately.
+
+---Provide better support for printing characters in the range 0-31,
+127-255 if suitable fonts are available. (Where the meaning of
+`suitable' is system-dependent and language-dependent.)
+
+---Provide support for embedding `listout' fragments in parent
+documents. Output routine complications make this difficult for
+fragments more than one page long, unless they are restricted to single
+column format. But even that much would be useful.
+
+---Add an index for listout.dtx.
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+File list:
+
+INSTALLATION
+
+  README
+  dialogl.ins (for LaTeX2e)
+  diatest.tex (test file)
+
+UTILITIES
+
+  dialog.sty
+  menus.sty
+  grabhedr.sty
+
+  listout.tex
+
+DOCUMENTATION
+
+  Main File      Subfiles
+  ---------------------------
+  dia-driv.tex   dialogl.dtx
+                 menus.dtx
+                 grabhedr.dtx
+
+  listout.dtx    default.los
+
+  codialog.tex   cnvunits.tex
+                 fontmenu.tex
+                 fontmenu.lg
+
+  dialogl-doc.sty
+
+DIA-DRIV.TEX
+
+This is the driver file for printing out the documentation of
+dialog.sty, menus.sty, and grabhedr.sty. Run it through standard
+LaTeX.
+
+CODIALOG.TEX
+
+This is a substantially revised and augmented version of the paper
+`Dialog with TeX' that appeared in the Proceedings of the 1991 TUG
+Conference at Dedham, Massachusetts (TUGboat vol 12 no 3, December
+1991, Part 2). [In other words: I was dissatisfied with the first
+published version, so I am `publishing' here a better organized
+version with some nice added examples.]
+
+The following files that are printed in the appendixes of the paper are
+included in electronic form in case any finds some use for them.
+
+---fontmenu.tex shows how the token-deletion option of TeX's
+error recovery mechanism can be used to implement a crude menu
+facility.
+
+---cnvunits.tex contains some routines that demonstrate conversion of
+point units to inch units.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dialogl/cnvunits.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dialogl/cnvunits.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..19b8be44633
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dialogl/cnvunits.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,139 @@
+% Copyright 1994 Michael John Downes
+% Copyright 2013 TeX Users Group
+% This file is part of the dialogl package, released under the LPPL;
+% see dialogl.ins for details.
+
+\newdimen\zdim \newdimen\tempdim \newdimen\tempdima
+
+% Conversion factors:
+%
+%       According    Scaled   Rational       Prime
+% Unit  to TeX       Points   Form           Factorization
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------
+% 1 sp  0.00002 pt   1        1/65536 pt     1 / 2^16
+% 1 mm  2.84526 pt   186467   7227/2540 pt   3*3*11*73 / 2*2*5*127
+% 1 cm  28.45274 pt  1864679  7227/254 pt    3*3*11*73 / 2*127
+% 1 pt  1.0 pt       65536    100/7227 in    2*2*5*5 / 3*3*11*73
+% 1 pc  12.0 pt      786432   12/1 pt
+% 1 dd  1.07 pt      70124    1238/1157 pt   2*619 / 13*89
+% 1 cc  12.8401 pt   841489   14856/1157 pt  2*2*2*3*619 / 13*89
+% 1 bp  1.00374 pt   65781    803/800 pt     11*73 / 2*2*2*2*2*5*5
+%                             [1/72 in]
+% 1 in  72.2699 pt   4736286  7227/100 pt    3*3*11*73 / 2*2*5*5
+%       [2.54 cm]             [254/100 cm]
+
+\def\points#1#2#3{\tempdim#2\relax
+  \edef#3{\csname cnvunits#1\expandafter\endcsname\the\tempdim}%
+}
+
+\def\inches#1#2#3{%
+  \tempdim=#2\relax
+  \tempdima=\ifdim\tempdim<\zdim -\fi\tempdim % absolute value
+  \roundup\tempdima{#1}{in}%
+%    In the interest of maximum accuracy we push \tempdima as near
+%    to \maxdimen as possible before dividing, using the prime
+%    factorization of the fraction 7227/100 which is the
+%    points/inches conversion factor.
+  \ifdim\tempdima<.01\maxdimen
+    \multiply\tempdima 100 \divide\tempdima 7227
+  \else
+    \ifdim\tempdima<.1\maxdimen
+      \multiply\tempdima 10 \divide\tempdima 11
+      \multiply\tempdima 10 \divide\tempdima 657
+    \else
+      \divide\tempdima 9 \multiply\tempdima 5
+      \divide\tempdima 803 \multiply\tempdima 20
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \tempdim=\ifdim\tempdim<\zdim -\fi \tempdima
+  \edef#3{%
+    \csname cnvunits#1\expandafter\endcsname\the\tempdim}%
+}
+
+%    Function \roundup for rounding upward. #1 must be a dimension
+%    register. If it holds a negative value it will be rounded
+%    `outward' away from zero rather than `upward' toward zero. #3
+%    is a TeX units string such as "pt" or "in". If #2 = 0 then
+%    this will round up to the nearest tenth; if #2 = 00, nearest
+%    hundredth; and so forth (up to 5 zeros). If #2 is empty then
+%    full accuracy up to TeX's limits will be used.
+%
+%    The rounded result will be returned in the dimension register
+%    #1.
+
+\def\roundup#1#2#3{%
+  \if .#2.\else
+    \begingroup
+      \ifdim#1>\zdim
+        \advance#1-\maxdimen \advance#1.#25#3\relax
+      \fi
+      \ifdim#1<\zdim
+    \endgroup
+        \advance#1.#25#3
+      \else
+    \endgroup
+      \fi
+  \fi
+}
+
+\begingroup
+\catcode`\P=12 \catcode`\T=12
+\lowercase{%
+\expandafter\gdef\csname cnvunits\endcsname#1PT{#1}
+\expandafter\gdef\csname cnvunits0\endcsname#1.#2PT{%
+  #1.\takeone#20\takeone}
+\expandafter\gdef\csname cnvunits00\endcsname#1.#2PT{%
+  #1.\taketwo#200\taketwo}
+\expandafter\gdef\csname cnvunits000\endcsname#1.#2PT{%
+  #1.\takethree#2000\takethree}
+\expandafter\gdef\csname cnvunits0000\endcsname#1.#2PT{%
+  #1.\takefour#20000\takefour}
+\expandafter\gdef\csname cnvunits00000\endcsname#1.#2PT{%
+  #1.\takefive#200000\takefive}
+}%
+\endgroup
+
+\def\takeone#1#2\takeone{#1}
+\def\taketwo#1#2#3\taketwo{#1#2}
+\def\takethree#1#2#3#4\takethree{#1#2#3}
+\def\takefour#1#2#3#4#5\takefour{#1#2#3#4}
+\def\takefive#1#2#3#4#5#6\takefive{#1#2#3#4#5}
+
+\def\showinches#1{\inches{00}{#1}\converted
+  \immediate\write16{%
+    #1 = (after conversion) \converted\space inches}}
+
+\showinches{0in} \showinches{1in} \showinches{2.0in}
+\showinches{2.2in} \showinches{8.5in} \showinches{1pc}
+\showinches{6pc} \showinches{1cm} \showinches{1mm}
+\showinches{1bp} \showinches{72bp} \showinches{1cc}
+\showinches{1dd} \showinches{72dd} \showinches{5000pt}
+\showinches{-5000pt} \showinches{\maxdimen}
+\showinches{-\maxdimen} \showinches{.999\maxdimen}
+\showinches{1pt} \showinches{.01pt}
+
+\endinput
+
+%    From the TeX log:
+
+0in = (after conversion) 0.00 inches
+1in = (after conversion) 1.00 inches
+2.0in = (after conversion) 2.00 inches
+2.2in = (after conversion) 2.20 inches
+8.5in = (after conversion) 8.50 inches
+1pc = (after conversion) 0.17 inches
+6pc = (after conversion) 1.00 inches
+1cm = (after conversion) 0.39 inches
+1mm = (after conversion) 0.04 inches
+1bp = (after conversion) 0.01 inches
+72bp = (after conversion) 1.00 inches
+1cc = (after conversion) 0.18 inches
+1dd = (after conversion) 0.01 inches
+72dd = (after conversion) 1.07 inches
+5000pt = (after conversion) 69.18 inches
+-5000pt = (after conversion) -69.18 inches
+\maxdimen  = (after conversion) 226.70 inches
+-\maxdimen  = (after conversion) -226.70 inches
+.999\maxdimen  = (after conversion) 226.48 inches
+1pt = (after conversion) 0.01 inches
+.01pt = (after conversion) 0.00 inches
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dialogl/codialog.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dialogl/codialog.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..b992e79cbb5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dialogl/codialog.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dialogl/default.los b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dialogl/default.los
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..21f850ebb7a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dialogl/default.los
@@ -0,0 +1,82 @@
+% Copyright 1994 Michael John Downes
+% Copyright 2013 TeX Users Group
+% This file is part of the dialogl package, released under the LPPL;
+% see dialogl.ins for details.
+
+% Option settings for listout.tex, 1994/11/4 15:45
+\def\Jan{January}\def\Feb{February}\def\Mar{March}\relax 
+\def\Apr{April}\def\May{May}\def\Jun{June}\relax 
+\def\Jul{July}\def\Aug{August}\def\Sep{September}\relax 
+\def\Oct{October}\def\Nov{November}\def\Dec{December}\relax 
+
+\let\landscape=\TRUE
+
+\pawd=794.96999pt
+\def\paperwidth{11in}
+\paht=614.295pt
+\def\paperheight{8.5in}
+\topmargin=18.06749pt
+\bottommargin=19.22751pt
+\leftmargin=21.68121pt
+\rightmargin=21.68121pt
+\normalbaselineskip=10.0pt\relax
+\def\mainfontsize{10}
+\def\mainfont{typewriter}
+\chardef\totalcols=2\relax
+\colwd=369.38373pt
+\def\columnwidth{369.38373pt}
+\let\dependentcolwd=\TRUE
+
+\let\dependentrightmargin=\TRUE
+
+\colht=577.0pt
+\def\columnheight{64 lines}
+\let\dependentcolht=\TRUE
+
+\let\dependentbottommargin=\TRUE
+
+\intercolspace=12.0pt
+\overrun=21.68121pt
+\fullwd=751.60756pt
+
+\def\newfileoption{P}
+\let\printtitles=\TRUE
+
+\def\titlefont{bold}
+\def\titlefontsize{10}
+\def\titlecase{none}
+\def\datesepchar{/}
+\def\todaysdate{\dateA}
+\def\nowtime{\timeB}
+\def\timesepchar{:}
+\def\ampmpunct{.}
+\let\keepleadingzeros=\TRUE
+
+\def\linenumberfontsize{5}
+\def\linenumberfont{roman}
+\let\linenumbers=\FALSE
+\linenumberfreq=1\relax
+\def\pagenumberfont{bold}
+\def\pagenumberfontsize{7}
+\let\runheads=\TRUE
+
+\runhead={\todaysdate \space \nowtime \space \hfil \thisfilename \space \hfil \pagenumber }
+\def\runheadfont{roman}
+\def\runheadfontsize{7}
+\runheadht=24.0pt
+\let\runfeet=\FALSE
+\runfoot={}
+\def\runfootfont{roman}
+\def\runfootfontsize{6}
+\runfootht=24.0pt
+\def\spacebreak{\penalty \z@ }
+\def\breakingchars{}
+\let\noextralinebreaks=\FALSE
+\def\controlLaction{N}
+\def\eightbitaction{B}
+\def\systemtype{DOS}
+\def\losdir{}
+\storemesj\dirprefix{}
+\chardef\spacespertab=8\relax
+\chardef\tabselect=1\relax
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dialogl/dia-driv.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dialogl/dia-driv.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..ab82b9ce85c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dialogl/dia-driv.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dialogl/dia-driv.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dialogl/dia-driv.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..c0f6b9d06ef
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dialogl/dia-driv.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,236 @@
+% Copyright 1994 Michael John Downes
+% Copyright 2013 TeX Users Group
+% This file is part of the dialogl package, released under the LPPL;
+% see dialogl.ins for details.
+%
+%    Originally published in TUGboat with ltugboat documentstyle.
+%    Switched to generic article/twocolumn afterward.
+%    Does not work with either LaTeX2e or LaTeX 2.09 compatibility mode :(.
+\documentstyle[doc,dialogl-doc]{article}
+
+\title{Interaction tools: {\tt dialog.sty} and {\tt menus.sty}}
+\author{Michael Downes}
+\date{November 3, 1994}
+
+% one latex2e command gets used.
+\def\ensuremath#1{\ifmmode #1\else $#1$\fi\relax}
+
+\hyphenation{pro-duces}
+
+\renewcommand{\thepart}{\arabic{part}}
+\renewcommand{\thesection}{\thepart.\arabic{section}}
+
+%    Some customizations of doc.sty parameters.
+\def\PrintMacroName#1{}
+%
+%\renewcommand{\PrintDescribeMacro}[1]{}
+%\renewcommand{\PrintDescribeEnv}[1]{}
+
+\setlength{\MacroIndent}{0pt}
+\def\MacroFont{\verbatimfont}% doc.sty uses \MacroFont
+
+%    No modules in the files to be processed; so don't bother checking.
+\DontCheckModules
+
+\multicoldefaultlayout
+\begin{document}
+\jobswitch % print only selected parts if \jobname so indicates; see
+           % dialog.sty
+\maketitle
+\thispagestyle{empty}
+
+\begin{multicols}{2}
+\section*{Introduction}
+
+\ifall
+This article describes
+\fn{dialog.sty} and \fn{menus.sty}, which
+provide functions for printing messages or menus on screen and reading
+users' responses. The file \fn{dialog.sty} contains basic message and
+input-reading functions; \fn{menus.sty} takes \fn{dialog.sty} for its
+base and uses some of its functions in defining more complex menu
+construction functions. These two files are set up in the form of
+\LaTeX{} documentstyle option files, but in writing them I spent some
+extra effort to try to make them usable with \plaintex/ or other
+common macro packages that include \plaintex/ in their base, such as
+\AmSTeX{} or \eplain/.
+
+The appendix describes \fn{grabhedr.sty}, required by \fn{dialog.sty},
+which provides two useful file-handling features: (1)~a command
+\cw{inputfwh} that when substituted for \cw{input} makes it possible to
+grab information such as file name, version, and date from standardized
+file headers in the style promoted by Nelson Beebe\Dash and to grab it
+in the process of first inputting the file, as opposed to inputting the
+file twice, or \cw{read}ing the information separately (unreliable due
+to system-dependent differences in the equivalence of \tex/'s \cw{input}
+search path and \cw{openin} search path). And (2)~functions
+\cw{localcatcodes} and \cw{restorecatcodes} that make it possible for
+\fn{dialog.sty} (or any file) to manage internal catcode changes
+properly regardless of the surrounding context.
+
+These files and a few others are combined in
+\else
+This package is part of
+\fi
+a suite of files that goes
+by the name of {\bf dialogl}, available on the Internet by anonymous ftp
+from CTAN (Comprehensive \tex/ Archive Network), e.g., \fn{ftp.shsu.edu}
+(USA), or \fn{ftp.uni-stuttgart.de} (Europe).
+%
+\ifall
+The file \fn{listout.tex} is a utility for verbatim printing of plain
+text files, with reasonably good handling of overlong lines, tab
+characters, other nonprinting characters, etc. It uses \fn{menus.sty} to
+present an elaborate menu system for changing options (like font size,
+line spacing, or how many spaces should be printed for a tab character).
+\else
+It includes the packages \pkg{dialog}, \pkg{menus}, and \pkg{grabhedr}
+and a utility file \fn{listout.tex} for verbatim printing of plain text
+files.
+\fi
+
+\ifmenus
+Here's an example from the menu system of \fn{listout.tex} to
+demonstrate the use of some features from \fn{dialog.sty} and
+\fn{menus.sty}. First, the menu that you would see if you wanted to
+change the font or line spacing:
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%    This funny way of calling \samepage is (I think) the most
+%    convenient way to avoid turning off page breaks for the preceding
+%    paragraph.
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\def\next{\begin{verbatim}\samepage}\next
+===============================================
+  F  Change font
+  S  Change font size
+  L  Change line spacing
+
+Current settings: typewriter 8 / 10.0pt.
+
+    Q  Quit         X  Exit        ?  Help
+===============================================
+
+Your choice?
+\end{verbatim}
+Suppose you wanted to change line spacing to 9 points, so you entered
+\qc{\l} (lowercase \qc{\L}) and then \verb'9pt', except that on your
+first attempt you accidentally mistyped \verb'9pe' instead of
+\verb'9pt'. Here's what you would see on screen:
+\begin{verbatim}
+Your choice? l
+Desired line spacing [TeX units] ? 9pe
+?---I don't understand "9pe".
+Desired line spacing [TeX units] ? 9pt
+
+* New line spacing: 9.0pt
+\end{verbatim}
+Both lowercase \verb'l' and capital \verb'L' are acceptable responses,
+and the value given for line spacing is checked to make sure it's a
+valid \tex/ dimension. Before continuing, the internalized version of
+the user's value is echoed on screen to confirm that the entered value
+was read correctly.
+
+Now here's how the above menu is programmed in \fn{listout.tex}.
+A function \cw{menuF} is constructed using \cw{fxmenu}:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\fxmenu\menuF{}{
+F  Change font
+S  Change font size
+L  Change line spacing
+}{
+Current settings: &\mainfont &\mainfontsize / %
+&\the&\normalbaselineskip.
+}
+%
+\def\moptionF{\lettermenu F}
+\end{verbatim}
+In the definition of \cw{moptionF}, \cw{lettermenu} is a high-level
+function from \fn{menus.sty} that prints \cw{menuF} on screen (given
+the argument \verb'F'), reads a line of input from the user, extracts
+the first character and forces it to uppercase, then branches to
+the next menu as determined by that character. The response of
+\verb'l' causes a branch to the function \cw{moptionFL}:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\def\moptionFL{%
+  \promptmesj{%
+    Desired line spacing [TeX units] ? }%
+  \readline{Q}\reply
+\end{verbatim}
+If \verb'Q', \verb'X', or \verb'?' was entered, the test
+\cw{xoptiontest} will return `true'; then we should skip the dimension
+checking and go directly to \cw{optionexec}, which knows what to do
+with those responses:
+\begin{verbatim}
+  \if\xoptiontest\reply
+  \else
+\end{verbatim}
+Otherwise we check the given dimension to make sure it's usable. If so,
+echo the new value as confirmation.
+\begin{verbatim}
+    \checkdimen\reply\dimen@
+    \ifdim\dimen@>\z@
+      \normalbaselineskip\dimen@\relax
+      \normalbaselines
+      \confirm{New line spacing:
+        \the\normalbaselineskip}%
+      \def\reply{Q}%
+    \fi
+\end{verbatim}
+If \cw{reply} was changed to \verb'Q' during the above step,
+\cw{optionexec} will pop back up to the previous menu level (normal
+continuation); otherwise \cw{reply} retains its prior definition\Dash
+e.g., \verb'9pe'\Dash to which \cw{optionexec} will simply say ``I
+don't understand that'' and repeat the current prompt.
+\begin{verbatim}
+  \fi
+  \optionexec\reply
+}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+For maximum portability, \fn{listout.tex} uses in its menus only
+lowest-common-denominator ordinary printable ASCII characters in the
+range 32\dash 126. Fancier menus can be obtained at a cost of forgoing
+system independence, for instance by using em\tex/'s \verb'/o' option
+to output the box-drawing characters in the standard PC DOS character
+set.
+\fi
+
+\subsection*{Notation}
+
+Double-hat notation such as \verb'^^J' is used herein for
+control characters, as in \TB{}, although occasionally the alternate
+form `{\sc control}-J' is used when the emphasis is away from the
+character's tokenized state inside \tex/. A couple of abbreviations
+from \fn{grabhedr.sty} are used frequently in the macro code: \cw{xp@}
+= \cw{expandafter}, and \cw{nx@} = \cw{noexpand}. Standard
+abbreviations from \fn{plain.tex} such as \cw{z@} or \cw{toks@} are
+used without special comment.
+
+\ifall
+\part{Basic dialog functions: \fn{dialog.sty}}
+\fi
+\ifdialog\hDocInput{dialogl.dtx}\fi
+
+\ifall
+\part{Menu functions: \fn{menus.sty}}
+\setcounter{section}{0}
+\fi
+\ifmenus\hDocInput{menus.dtx}\fi
+
+\ifall
+%    It's hard to make this part title come out right without assuming
+%    \partname is defined.
+\part*{Appendix\penalty-10000
+Miscellaneous support functions:
+\fn{grabhedr.sty}}
+\setcounter{section}{0}
+\renewcommand{\thepart}{A} % for use in \thesection
+\fi
+\ifgrabhedr\hDocInput{grabhedr.dtx}\fi
+
+\end{multicols}
+
+\ifdim\textwidth>\textheight
+\typeout{^^JWarning: remember to print using LANDSCAPE orientation^^J}
+\fi
+\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dialogl/dialogl-doc.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dialogl/dialogl-doc.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..3077de1d653
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dialogl/dialogl-doc.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,536 @@
+% Copyright 1994 Michael John Downes
+% Copyright 2013 TeX Users Group
+% This file is part of the dialogl package, released under the LPPL;
+% see dialogl.ins for details.
+% 
+% Customizations for the articles/documentation codialog.tex,
+% dia-driv.tex, lis-driv.tex.
+%
+%    Here is the main problem. I want to allow users to print out this
+%    document on US letter-size paper (8.5x11 inches) or on A4 paper
+%    (210x297 mm). And in order to fit maximum text on minimum paper
+%    (save the trees) I want to print with small margins and
+%    two-column layout (or even three-column, in the case of landscape
+%    printing, if that were feasible; but I don't want to assume that
+%    the user has Frank's multicol package). But the verbatim examples
+%    in the document consist in many cases of lines from TeX screen
+%    output, which can be up to 79 characters in length. It is
+%    difficult to give two columns wide enough to accommodate
+%    80-character lines printed in cmtt unless the size is cut down
+%    very small. Then we encounter the difficulty that the
+%    lowest-common-denominator set of TeX fonts includes cmtt10,
+%    cmtt9, cmtt8, but not cmtt7 or any smaller sizes of cmtt. Well,
+%    perhaps that's just as well since things start to get a little
+%    hard to read anyway once you get down that small.
+%
+%    But anyway there it is: How to fit two columns of text, each of
+%    minimum width approximately 80 cmtt characters, into the
+%    rectangles provided by US letter paper and A4 paper, while trying
+%    to keep a decent line length for readability in the neighborhood
+%    of two or three alphabets.
+%
+%    It seems that one part of the answer is to print the 80-character
+%    verbatim lines in a smaller point size than the main text.
+
+% 8.5in = 614.295pt.
+% 11in = 794.96999pt.
+% 210mm = 597.50787pt.
+% 297mm = 845.04684pt.
+
+% 80 characters, cmtt10: 419.99634pt.
+% 80 characters, cmtt8: 340.00488pt.
+% 76 characters, cmtt8: 323.00464pt.
+% 70 characters, cmtt8: 297.50427pt.
+
+%    Assume that minimum margins all around are 22pt, approx 8mm /
+%    0.3in. And that desired gutter margin between columns is 6pt.
+%    Then subtract 50pt from paper width and divide by 2 to get
+%    available column width: 210mm 274pt, 8.5in 282pt, 11in 372pt,
+%    297mm 397pt.
+%
+%    Standard \headheight, \headsep are 12pt, 25pt. So next we look for
+%    minimum bounding rectangle for landscape, two-column printing:
+%    textheight limited by A4 short dimension = 210mm = 598pt.
+%    Subtract 44pt for margins, then another 37pt for running head,
+%    that leaves textheight of 517pt.
+%
+%    Similarly for textwidth: Limited by the 11in long dimension of US
+%    letter size paper; subtract 50pt for margins and gutter, that
+%    leaves 745pt, or 372pt per column.
+
+\newcommand{\notthatsloppy}{\tolerance9999 \pretolerance3333
+  \hbadness\tolerance
+%    The tolerance settings will eliminate most hyphenation unless we
+%    ameliorate the hyphen penalties.
+  \hyphenpenalty-100 \exhyphenpenalty-150
+  \emergencystretch 3pc }
+
+%    But then we'd better patch \raggedright up a litt.e
+\toks@\expandafter{\raggedright \hyphenpenalty100 \exhyphenpenalty150 }
+\edef\raggedright{\the\toks@}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\pagestyle{headings}
+\let\sectionmark\@gobble
+\def\@oddhead{\hfil{\small\rhtitle}\hfil\thepage}
+\let\@evenhead\@oddhead
+\def\title#1{\gdef\@title{#1}\uppercase{\gdef\rhtitle{#1}}}
+
+%    Default layout is twocolumn, landscape, squeeze inside A4/US
+%    constraints
+\def\defaultlayout{%
+%    \hoffset and \voffset are assumed to be -1in (see below)
+%    210mm is A4 width, 11in is US-letter paper height
+  \textwidth11in \textheight210mm
+  \oddsidemargin30pt \evensidemargin\oddsidemargin
+  \advance\textwidth -2\oddsidemargin
+  \topmargin25pt
+  \advance\textheight-2\topmargin
+  \advance\textheight-\headheight \advance\textheight -\headsep
+  \let\Huge\large \let\huge\large \let\LARGE\large \let\Large\large
+%  \scaleup \normalsize
+  \@twocolumntrue
+}
+
+%    Twocolumn, portrait, squeeze inside A4/US
+%    constraints
+\def\portraitlayout{%
+%    \hoffset and \voffset are assumed to be -1in (see below)
+%    210mm is A4 width, 11in is US-letter paper height
+  \textheight11in \textwidth210mm
+  \oddsidemargin30pt \evensidemargin\oddsidemargin
+  \advance\textwidth -2\oddsidemargin
+  \topmargin25pt
+  \advance\textheight-2\topmargin
+  \advance\textheight-\headheight \advance\textheight -\headsep
+  \let\Huge\large \let\huge\large \let\LARGE\large \let\Large\large
+%  \scaleup \normalsize
+  \@twocolumntrue
+  \def\vffont{\footnotesize\tt}%
+  \def\verbatimfont{\small\tt}%
+}
+
+%    If the multicol package is loaded (via the doc package) we want to
+%    use that instead of the standard twocolumn option.
+\def\multicoldefaultlayout{\defaultlayout\@twocolumnfalse}
+\def\multicolportraitlayout{\portraitlayout\@twocolumnfalse}
+
+%    Cancel the margins normally supplied by DVI drivers:
+\hoffset-1in \voffset-1in
+
+%    Set \hfuzz higher than normal in preference to dealing with
+%    insoluble hyphenation/line-breaking problems.
+\hfuzz20pt
+
+%    Set sloppiness of paragraphs very high because of the narrow
+%    column width and the frequency of difficult to break terms, but
+%    not so carelessly high as LaTeX's \sloppy command would give.
+\notthatsloppy
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\def\scaleup{%
+  \let\tiny\scriptsize \let\scriptsize\footnotesize
+  \let\footnotesize\small \let\small\normalsize
+  \let\normalsize\large \let\large\Large
+}
+
+\def\scaledown{%
+  \let\Huge\large \let\huge\large
+  \let\LARGE\large \let\Large\normalsize
+  \let\large\normalsize \let\normalsize\small
+  \let\small\footnotesize \let\footnotesize\scriptsize
+  \let\scriptsize\tiny
+}
+%
+%    Add protection built-in for \TeX and others
+\newcommand{\ams}{{\the\textfont2 A\kern-.1667em%
+   \lower.5ex\hbox{M}\kern-.125emS\kern.05em}}
+\def\tex/{\protect\TeX\@}
+\def\amstex/{\protect\ams-\tex/}
+\def\latex/{\protect\LaTeX\@}
+\def\plaintex/{{\sc plain}\thinspace\tex/}
+\def\eplain/{{\sc Eplain}}
+\def\texbook/{{\it The \tex/book}}
+\def\tugboat/{{\it TUGboat}}
+\def\return/{{\sc return}}
+\def\mf/{{\sf METAFONT\@}}
+\def\mfbook/{{\it The \mf/book}}
+\def\ascii/{{\sc ascii}}
+
+\newcommand{\ndash}{--}
+\newcommand{\mdash}{---}
+\newcommand{\btext}{\mbox}
+
+\newcommand{\5}{\penalty500 }
+\newcommand{\underscore}{{\ntt\string _}}
+
+%    Define some ltugboat.sty commands
+\let\Dash\mdash
+\let\dash\ndash
+\def\TB{\texbook/}
+\def\TUB{{\sl TUGboat\/}}
+\def\TeXhax{{\ntt TeXhax}}
+
+\@ifundefined{selectfont}{%
+  \def\normalfont{}%
+}{%
+  \@ifundefined{default@family}{%
+    \@ifundefined{normalfont}{%
+      \def\normalfont{}% ?? don't think this case can ever happen.
+    }{}%
+  }{%
+    \def\normalfont{\fontfamily\default@family
+      \fontseries\default@series \fontshape\default@shape \selectfont}%
+  }%
+}
+
+%    Maybe I should now change instances of \normalshape to \upshape.
+%    But this is what was used before.
+\@ifundefined{normalshape}{%
+  \@ifundefined{upshape}{%
+    \newcommand{\normalshape}{\rm}%
+  }{%
+    \newcommand{\normalshape}{\upshape}%
+  }%
+}{}
+
+\def\ntt{\protect\normalfont\protect\tt}
+
+%    Function called at the beginning of \cw etc. to allow line
+%    breaks if several such objects occur contiguously.
+\newcommand{\prebreak}{\leavevmode\ifmmode\hbox\else
+  \ifdim\lastskip=\z@\penalty9999 \fi\fi}
+
+%    The \ifhmode test here is primarily to guard against math mode,
+%    where an attempt to set \spacefactor would cause a TeX error.
+\newcommand{\postx}{\ifhmode\@\fi}
+
+%    Control word
+\newcommand{\cw}[1]{\protect\prebreak{\ntt\bslash#1\protect\postx}}
+%    Control symbol
+\newcommand{\cs}[1]{\protect\prebreak{\ntt\string#1}\protect\postx}
+\chardef\bslash=`\\
+
+%    Quoted character
+\newcommand{\qc}[1]{%
+  \protect\prebreak{\ntt\escapechar-1 \string#1}\protect\postx}
+%    Control character
+\newcommand{\ctrl}[1]{%
+  \protect\prebreak{\ntt\string ^\string ^#1}\protect\postx}
+%    Argument marker. Apply \string to #1 just in case it might be #
+%    instead of a number 1--9.
+\renewcommand{\arg}[1]{%
+  \protect\prebreak{\ntt\string ##\string#1}\protect\postx}
+\let\qarg\arg
+%    File name.
+\newcommand{\fn}[1]{\leavevmode{\ntt#1}\protect\postx}
+\let\pkg\fn
+%    Verbatim version of \ldots.
+\newcommand\verbdots{\leavevmode{\ntt...}\protect\postx}
+
+\newcommand{\units}[1]{\thinspace#1}
+
+% For `meta' angle bracket notation.
+\newcommand\m[1]{{\protect\the\textfont2 h{\it#1}i}}
+% For definitions of terminology.
+\newcommand{\term}[1]{\leavevmode{\it#1}}
+
+\def\eg.{e.g.\@}
+\def\ie.{i.e.\@}
+
+%\def\mjd#1{\errhelp{#1}\errmessage{\the\errhelp}}
+\def\mjd#1{}
+
+%    ^^V at the beginning of a line serves as a substitute for
+%    \begin{verbatim} ... \end{verbatim} in this documentation. Partly
+%    done as an exercise to see if it was feasible; originally
+%    motivated by the way I had converted comments in non-doc form to
+%    doc form.
+\catcode`\^^V\active % for verbatim
+\def ^^V{\Vbtm}
+
+\def\activedef#1{\catcode`#1\active
+  \begingroup\lccode`\~=`#1\lowercase{\endgroup \def ~}}
+
+\def\Vbtmsetup{\let\do\@makeother
+%    Abandon \dospecials since it's too hard to make sure that it
+%    includes things like @, |, +.
+  \do\`\do\~\do\!\do\@\do\#\do\$\do\%\do\^\do\&\do\*\do\(\do\)\do\-%
+  \do\_\do\=\do +\do\\\do\|\do\[\do\{\do\]\do\}\do\;\do\:\do\'\do\"%
+  \do\,\do\<\do\.\do\>\do\/\do\?\do\ \do\^^M\do\^^I\do\^^J\do\^^L%
+  \activedef\ {\kern.5em}%
+  \activedef\'{\char`\'\kern\z@}%
+  \Vbtmfont \frenchspacing
+}
+%
+\def\Vbtm{\par
+  \begingroup \Vbtmsetup
+  \activedef\^^M{\catcode`\%9 \catcode`\^7
+    \futurelet\next\moreVbtm}%
+  \def\VbtmVbtm{\Vbtm}% for comparison with active ^^V.
+  \def\moreVbtm{%
+    \ifx\next \VbtmVbtm
+      \def\next{\egroup\penalty9999 }%
+    \else
+      \def\next{\egroup\endgroup \futurelet\next\endVbtm}%
+    \fi \next}%
+%    Locally change \Vbtm to omit the above setup and just process a
+%    single line.
+  \def\Vbtm{\hbox\bgroup}%
+  \Vbtmspace \Vbtmextra \Vbtm}
+%
+\def\endVbtm{%
+  \begingroup
+%    If the next token is a \par token, gobble it with \let.
+  \ifx\next\par \aftergroup\let \aftergroup\next \fi
+  \Vbtmspace \everypar{}\parskip0pt \noindent\endgroup
+}%
+
+\def\Vbtmfont{\verbatimfont}
+%
+\def\Vbtmspace{\medskip}
+\def\Vbtmextra{}
+%
+%    Define a `usage' environment to draw a box around its contents,
+%    for examples illustrating the usage of salient functions.
+\def\usage{\par \begingroup \Vbtmsetup \normalsize\tt
+%    Requires definition of \meta from doc.sty:
+  \activedef\<##1>{\meta{##1}}%
+  \activedef\^^M{\catcode`\%9\catcode`\\\z@ \catcode`\{11 \catcode`\}11
+    \futurelet\next\moreusage}%
+  \if@inlabel\leavevmode\fi \ifhmode\unskip \par\fi
+  \addvspace\medskipamount
+  \global\setbox\@ne\vbox\bgroup \everypar{}%
+    \bgroup}
+%
+\expandafter\def\expandafter\moreusage\expandafter{%
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname end{usage}\endcsname\next
+    \egroup\egroup
+    \fboxsep1.7pt \noindent\fbox{\box\@ne}%
+    \endgroup
+  \else
+    \egroup
+    \hbox\bgroup\expandafter\string
+  \fi}%
+%
+\expandafter\def\csname end{usage}\endcsname{\end{usage}}
+\def\endusage{\par\nobreak\vskip\medskipamount
+%    Since \endusage is called via \end, which adds an \endgroup, we
+%    need to throw these two items beyond the \endgroup in order for
+%    their local assignments not to be lost (\if@afterindent,
+%    \everypar):
+  \aftergroup\@afterindentfalse
+  \aftergroup\@afterheading}
+
+\def\verbatimfont{\tt}
+\def\vffont{\small\tt}
+
+%    Change verbatim environment to use \verbatimfont.
+
+\def\@verbatim{\trivlist \item[]\if@minipage\else\vskip\parskip\fi
+  \leftskip\@totalleftmargin\rightskip\z@
+  \parindent\z@\parfillskip\z@ plus\columnwidth minus\columnwidth
+  \parskip\z@skip
+  \@@par
+  \@tempswafalse \def\par{\if@tempswa\hbox{}\fi\@tempswatrue\@@par
+  \penalty\interlinepenalty}%
+  \obeylines
+  \linepenalty\@M
+  \verbatimfont \normalbaselineskip1.1em\relax \normalbaselines
+  \catcode``=13 \@noligs \let\do\@makeother \dospecials}
+
+%    Define a verbatim input command for printing example files.
+\def\verbatiminput#1{\begingroup
+  \@verbatim \frenchspacing\@vobeyspaces
+  \exhyphenpenalty\@M \hyphenpenalty\@M
+%    Turn \hfuzz up high; if some lines in the file are a little long,
+%    we don't want to hear about it.
+  \hfuzz 5em\relax \vffont
+  \input{#1}%
+  \endverbatim
+ \endgroup}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%    Misc.
+\setcounter{secnumdepth}{2}
+\newcommand{\secref}[1]{\S\ref{#1}}
+\renewcommand{\thetable}{\Alph{table}}
+
+%    Change \l@section so we can allow wider room for `Appendix A' in
+%    the appendix section of the table of contents.
+\renewcommand{\l@section}[2]{%
+  \ifnum\c@tocdepth>\z@
+    \addpenalty{\@secpenalty}\addvspace{1.0emplus\p@}%
+    \setlength\@tempdima{\tocsecwd}\begingroup \parindent\z@
+    \rightskip\@pnumwidth \parfillskip-\@pnumwidth \leavevmode \bf
+    \advance\leftskip\@tempdima \hskip-\leftskip #1\nobreak \hfil\nobreak
+    \hbox to\@pnumwidth{\hss#2}\par \endgroup
+  \fi}
+\def\tocsecwd{1.5em}
+
+\toks@\expandafter{\appendix
+  \addtocontents{toc}{\protect\changesecwd{6.5em}}}
+\edef\appendix{\the\toks@}
+\def\changesecwd{\gdef\tocsecwd}
+
+\def\resetleftmargin#1{\dimen@\@totalleftmargin
+  \linewidth\columnwidth \advance\linewidth-\@totalleftmargin
+  \edef\@tempa{\parshape2 \the\dimen@\space \the\linewidth\space}%
+  \@totalleftmargin#1\relax
+  \linewidth\columnwidth \advance\linewidth-\@totalleftmargin
+  \@tempa \@totalleftmargin\linewidth \relax}
+
+%    For raggedright parbox in tabular.
+\newcommand{\rp}{\let\PBS\\\raggedright\let\\\PBS}
+
+%    \readnumber reads a number into #1, default #2.
+\def\readnumber#1#2{\begingroup
+  \def\do##1##2{\catcode\fam=##2 \ifnum\fam<##1 \advance\fam 1
+    \expandafter\do \else\expandafter\@gobbletwo\fi{##1}{##2}}%
+  \fam=0 \do{255}{9}\fam=`\0\relax \do{`\9}{12}%
+  \global\read-1 to#1\endgroup
+  \ifx#1\@empty\gdef#1{#2}\fi
+}
+
+\def\thebibliography#1{%
+  \section*{References}%
+  \small
+  \list{\@biblabel{\arabic{enumiv}}}{%
+    \settowidth\labelwidth{\@biblabel{#1}}
+    \leftmargin2em
+    \usecounter{enumiv}\let\p@enumiv\@empty
+    \renewcommand\theenumiv{\arabic{enumiv}}}%
+  \sloppy
+  \clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty4000\sfcode`\.=\@m} 
+
+%    \writepage{Example} or \writepage{Table}
+\newcommand{\writepage}[1]{%
+  \edef\temp{\write16{#1 \@currentlabel: Page \noexpand\thepage}}%
+  \temp
+}
+
+%    \reqspace{2in} means start a new page if the current page does not
+%    have at least 2in of space available
+\newcommand{\reqspace}[1]{\vskip#1plus.2\textheight
+  \penalty0\vskip-#1plus-.2\textheight\penalty0 }
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Use {example}'s instead of {figure}'s.
+\let\example\figure
+\let\endexample\endfigure
+\expandafter\let\csname example*\expandafter\endcsname
+                \csname figure*\endcsname
+\expandafter\let\csname endexample*\expandafter\endcsname
+                \csname endfigure*\endcsname
+\@namedef{fnum@figure}{Example \thefigure}
+
+\def\theexample{\thefigure}
+
+\newenvironment{examplebox}%
+{% Can't use LaTeX \framebox because of embedded verbatim; can't
+%% embed this inside definition of \example without too much work.
+  \vbox\bgroup\hrule
+    \hbox to\hsize\bgroup\vrule \hfil
+      \vbox\bgroup\advance\hsize-2em
+}{%
+  \endgraf
+  \kern3pt\egroup\hfil\vrule\egroup\hrule\egroup % finish off the frame
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%    Ordinary \DocInput doesn't handle standardized file headers
+%    unless you enclose them in \iffalse ... \fi which I don't care to
+%    do. So instead here's an alternate version of \DocInput, called
+%    \hDocInput.
+
+\def\hDocInput#1{\MakePercentIgnore
+  \begingroup \begingroup \lccode`\~=`\@
+  \lowercase{\endgroup\long\def ~}##1##{%
+    \catcode`\==12 \skipfileheader{##1}}%
+  \catcode`\@=\active \catcode`\==14 % comment
+  \@@input#1 \MakePercentComment}
+
+\def\skipfileheader#1#2 {\endgroup
+  \begingroup\catcode`\==9 \catcode`\ =9 \futurelet\0\endgroup
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%    Loosen up the float placement restrictions.
+\def\textfraction{0.02}
+\def\bottomfraction{0.98}
+\def\topfraction{0.98}
+\let\dbltopfraction=\topfraction
+\def\floatpagefraction{0.8}
+\let\dblfloatpagefraction=\floatpagefraction
+\setcounter{bottomnumber}{3}
+\setcounter{topnumber}{3}
+\setcounter{dbltopnumber}{3}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\def\allowtthyphens{%
+  {\small\tt\hyphenchar\font=45 \normalsize\tt\hyphenchar\font=45
+  \footnotesize\tt\hyphenchar\font=45 }}
+
+%%\renewcommand{\cw}[1]{\protect\prebreak{\ntt\bslash#1}\protect\postx
+%%  \sh{#1}}
+%%%    Control symbol
+%%\renewcommand{\cs}[1]{\protect\prebreak{\ntt\string#1}\protect\postx
+%%  \sh{#1}}
+%%\renewcommand{\fn}[1]{\leavevmode{\ntt#1}\protect\postx\sh{#1}}
+%%\def\sh{\protect\showhyphens}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%    Fix up catcodes of the upper 128 characters just in case someone
+%    has an early release of LaTeX2e. (pre June 1994 patch-level 2)
+\def\do{\catcode\count@\@tempa \advance\count@\@ne
+  \ifnum\count@>\@cclv \expandafter\@gobble\fi \do}
+
+\count@=128 \chardef\@tempa=12 \do
+
+\def\mstrip#1->{}
+\def\jobswitch{%
+  \def\@tempa{dia-driv}%
+  \edef\@tempa{\expandafter\mstrip\meaning\@tempa}%
+  \edef\@tempb{\jobname}%
+  \ifx\@tempa\@tempb
+    \dialogtrue \menustrue \grabhedrtrue
+    \alltrue
+  \else
+    \csname\jobname true\endcsname
+    \title{The {\tt\jobname} package}%
+  \fi
+}
+
+\newif\ifdialog \newif\ifall \newif\ifmenus \newif\ifgrabhedr
+
+\endinput
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%    Some old stuff from codialog.tex
+\typeout{%
+This document offers three printing options:^^J%
+(1) A4 (297 x 210 mm), two columns, landscape orientation,^^J%
+(2) US letter (11 x 8.5 inches), two columns, landscape orientation.^^J%
+(3) US letter (8.5 x 11 inches), one column, portrait orientation.^^J%
+}
+
+%    \readnumber is defined in dialogm.sty
+\message{Enter the number for your choice (default 2): }
+\readnumber{\answer}{2}
+
+%    \adjustlayout is defined in dialogm.sty
+\ifcase \answer\relax
+    \typeout{Defaulting to US letter, landscape ...}% 0
+    \adjustlayout{11in}{8.5in}%
+  \or \typeout{OK, using A4 layout ...}%              1
+    \adjustlayout{297mm}{210mm}%
+  \or \typeout{OK, using 11x8.5 layout ...}%          2
+    \adjustlayout{11in}{8.5in}%
+  \or \typeout{OK, using 8.5x11 layout ...}%          3
+    \adjustlayout{8.5in}{11in}%
+  \else %                                             4,5,...
+    \typeout{Defaulting to US letter, landscape ...}%
+    \adjustlayout{11in}{8.5in}%
+\fi
+
+%    Maybe better to offer the choices USL, USP, A4L, A4P?
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dialogl/diatest.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dialogl/diatest.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..a6eb0c2801d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dialogl/diatest.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,167 @@
+% Copyright 1994 Michael John Downes
+% Copyright 2013 TeX Users Group
+% This file is part of the dialogl package, released under the LPPL;
+% see dialogl.ins for details.
+
+%  Test of the `menus' package. You can run this file with (at least)
+%  plain TeX, LaTeX (2e), and old LaTeX (2.09).
+%
+%  Some chicanery to make this file work in several different contexts.
+\ifx\undefined\documentclass
+  \def\NeedsTeXFormat#1{}\def\RequirePackage#1{\input #1.sty \relax}
+  \def\ProvidesPackage#1[#2]{}
+  \ifx\undefined\documentstyle
+    \def\startup{\input menus.sty \relax}
+  \else
+    \def\startup{\documentstyle[menus]{article}}
+  \fi
+\else
+  \def\startup{%
+    \documentclass{article}%
+    \usepackage{menus}%
+  }
+\fi
+
+\startup
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\mesj{
+The following series of tests is designed to cover most of the
+features that are provided by dialog.sty. If you compare what you
+see on screen with the contents of the file diatest.tex you will
+see how they correspond.
+
+Press the Return or Enter key to continue:}
+\readline{}\xyz
+
+\promptmesj{
+
+Testing \mesj:
+Press return to continue: }
+\readline{}\xyz\mesj{}
+\mesj{Give ~  me %^^L an &|
+   \newif #}
+
+\promptmesj{
+Testing \xmesj:
+Press return to continue: }
+\readline{}\xyz\mesj{}
+\xmesj{Do we have \{\}\\ characters?
+And \iftrue\.true\else\.false\fi.
+Not to mention ampersand \&,    since \string\iftrue.}
+
+\promptmesj{
+Testing \xmesj inside of a \def:
+Press return to continue: }
+\readline{}\xyz\mesj{}
+\def\next{\xmesj{Abc space:\ , control-M: \^^M, and percent:\%\
+and another line break.}}
+\next
+
+\promptmesj{
+Testing \promptmesj:
+Press return to continue: }
+\readline{}\xyz\mesj{}
+\promptmesj{Enter this or that: }
+\readline{}\xyz
+
+\promptmesj{
+Testing \storemesj:
+Press return to continue: }
+\readline{}\xyz\mesj{}
+\storemesj\foo{This is a fine old message, isn't it?:
+\mesj{Give ~  me %^^L an &|
+   \newif }}
+\xmesj{\foo}
+
+\promptmesj{
+Testing \storexmesj now with an arg:
+Press return to continue: }
+\readline{}\xyz\mesj{}
+\storexmesj\foo#1{This is a fine old message, isn't it?:
+\\mesj{Give ~  me \%^^L an \&|#1
+   \\newif \#}}
+\xmesj{\foo{KABLOO}}
+
+\promptmesj{
+Testing \fmesj:
+Press return to continue: }
+\readline{}\xyz\mesj{}
+\fmesj\foo{This is a fine old message, isn't it?:
+\mesj{Give ~  me %^^L an &|
+   \newif}}
+\foo
+
+\promptmesj{
+Testing \fxmesj now with an arg:
+Press return to continue: }
+\readline{}\xyz\mesj{}
+\fxmesj\foo#1{This is a fine old message, isn't it?:
+\\mesj{Give ~  me \%^^L an \&|#1
+   \\newif \#}}
+\foo{KABLOO}
+
+\promptmesj{
+Would you like to try out \readline? [yes or no]: }
+\readline{}\answer
+\xmesj{Well, if I understood you correctly, you answered `\answer'}
+
+\promptmesj{
+OK, now try give me an executable answer, such as
+"\iftrue yes\else no\fi": }
+\xreadline{}\answer
+\xmesj{Well, and now if I try to execute that: "\answer"}
+
+\promptmesj{
+OK, now let's try \readchar. Give me an arbitrary answer of
+one or more characters: }
+\readchar{}\answer
+\xmesj{Taking the first character from your answer, I get: "\answer"}
+
+\promptmesj{
+OK, now let's try \readChar. Give me an arbitrary answer of
+one or more letters: }
+\readChar{}\answer
+\xmesj{Taking the first character from your answer, and
+uppercasing it, I get: "\answer"}
+
+\promptmesj{
+OK, give me a number then, so that I can
+check it with \checkinteger: }
+\readline{}\answer
+\checkinteger\answer\fam
+\xmesj{\ifnum\fam=-\maxdimen%
+Gee, I don't think that was\else\.Got\fi%
+ a valid number: "\answer"}
+
+\def\dimtest#1{\promptxmesj{#1}%
+  \readline{}\answer
+  \ifx\empty\answer
+  \else
+    \checkdimen\answer\vfuzz
+    \ifdim\vfuzz=-\maxdimen%
+      \xmesj{Sorry, that doesn't look like a TeX dimen to me: "\answer"}%
+    \else
+      \xmesj{Looks like a valid TeX dimen: "\answer" = \the\vfuzz}%
+    \fi
+    \expandafter\dimtestb
+  \fi
+}
+
+\def\dimtesta{\dimtest{\
+OK, give me a dimen then, so that I can\
+check it with \\checkdimen:\
+}}
+
+\def\dimtestb{\dimtest{\
+How about another dimen: }}
+
+\def\empty{}
+
+%    Iterate once with one prompt, then several times with a shorter
+%    prompt.
+\dimtesta
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\csname stop\endcsname
+\end
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dialogl/fontmenu.lg b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dialogl/fontmenu.lg
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..c15a6f3fb29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dialogl/fontmenu.lg
@@ -0,0 +1,31 @@
+This is emTeX, Version 3.0 [3a] (preloaded format=plain 93.9.20)
+  30 OCT 1993 23:41
+**&plain fontmenu
+(fontmenu.tex
+
+ .......................................
+ .......................................
+
+  Select the font base you wish to use:
+
+  [1] Computer Modern        [4] Malibu
+  [2] Garamond               [5] Times
+  [3] Helvetica
+
+  (Default: Times)
+
+ ........................................
+ ........................................
+
+l.56
+      % Enter a number (1...5) and press Return TWICE
+? 4
+l.60 \Malibu
+            % Press Return to continue
+?
+> \fontbase=macro:
+->Malibu.
+l.66 \show\fontbase
+
+? x
+No pages of output.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dialogl/fontmenu.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dialogl/fontmenu.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..8812fab1fa1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dialogl/fontmenu.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,72 @@
+% Copyright 1994 Michael John Downes
+% Copyright 2013 TeX Users Group
+% This file is part of the dialogl package, released under the LPPL;
+% see dialogl.ins for details.
+
+\def\ComputerModern{\gdef\fontbase{Times}\gobble}
+\def\Garamond{\gdef\fontbase{Computer Modern}\gobble}
+\def\Helvetica{\gdef\fontbase{Garamond}\gobble}
+\def\Malibu{\gdef\fontbase{Helvetica}\gobble}
+\def\Times{\gdef\fontbase{Malibu}\gobble}
+
+\def\gobble#1\endgobble{}
+
+%    Make sure we have a reasonable \newlinechar
+\newlinechar=`\^^J \catcode\newlinechar=12
+
+\begingroup
+\catcode`\<=1 \catcode`\ =2\relax
+\gdef\menustart{\errmessage<%
+....................................... }%
+\endlinechar\newlinechar\catcode`\ =12\relax
+\gdef\menutext{
+ .......................................
+ .......................................
+
+  Select the font base you wish to use:
+
+  [1] Computer Modern        [4] Malibu
+  [2] Garamond               [5] Times
+  [3] Helvetica
+
+  (Default: Times)}%
+\endgroup% percent here to avoid extra \newlinechar
+
+\begingroup
+\immediate\write16{\menutext}
+%    If the user accidentally types 33 instead of 3 they will get past
+%    all the legitimate menu choices. So to keep that from causing
+%    trouble, we throw in a bunch of ~ characters below to perform
+%    error recovery. The standard maximum number of tokens that TeX
+%    will delete at one time is 99.
+\catcode`\~=\active % just to make sure
+\def~{\newlinechar`\^^J% restore normal value
+  \message{%
+Whoops! Well, you got Times as your font base, I think}%
+  \gobble}
+%    Minimize unwanted error context (note: setting
+%    this to -1 doesn't suppress any more information)
+\errorcontextlines 0
+\newlinechar=`\! % to hide the automatic ! from \errmessage
+\gdef\fontbase{Times}
+%    Inside the next group we make the space character
+%    active so that we can  use it to call \menustart,
+%    and then we use \expandafter so that the first
+%    space on the next line gets that catcode before
+%    the \endgroup makes it revert to normal. All this
+%    so that the user does not see `\menustart' on
+%    screen, only a space.
+\begingroup
+\catcode`\ =\active\let =\menustart\expandafter\endgroup%
+ % Enter a number (1...5) and press Return TWICE
+\ComputerModern% Press Return to continue
+\Garamond% Press Return to continue
+\Helvetica% Press Return to continue
+\Malibu% Press Return to continue
+\Times% Press Return to continue
+\gobble%
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~%
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~%
+\endgobble\endgroup%
+\show\fontbase
+\end
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dialogl/manifest.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dialogl/manifest.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..f6ab4df8bf2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dialogl/manifest.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+manifest.txt
+Makefile
+README
+dialogl.ins
+dialogl.dtx
+grabhedr.dtx
+listout.dtx
+menus.dtx
+cnvunits.tex
+dia-driv.tex
+dialogl-doc.sty
+fontmenu.tex
+fontmenu.lg
+diatest.tex
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/dialogl/dialogl.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/dialogl/dialogl.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..105a2494dd4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/dialogl/dialogl.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,1429 @@
+%%% ====================================================================
+%%%  @LaTeX-style-file{
+%%%     filename        = "dialogl.dtx",
+%%%     version         = "1.99a",
+%%%     date            = "2013/01/24",
+%%%     author          = "Michael Downes",
+%%%     copyright       = "This file is part of the dialogl package, released
+%%%                        under the LPPL; see dialogl.ins for details."
+%%%     keywords        = "TeX, dialog",
+%%%     supported       = "no",
+%%%     abstract        = "This file provides macros for writing
+%%%       messages and menus on screen, and reading user responses. It
+%%%       can be used with LaTeX as a documentstyle option, or in
+%%%       other forms of TeX by a standard \input statement.",
+%%%  }
+%%% ====================================================================
+%
+% \iffalse
+%<*driver>
+\input{dia-driv.tex}
+%</driver>
+% \fi
+%
+% \section{History}
+%    This file, \fn{dialog.sty}, was born out of a utility called
+%    \fn{listout.tex} that I wrote for my personal use. The purpose of
+%    \fn{listout.tex} was to facilitate printing out plain text
+%    files\Dash electronic mail, program source files in various
+%    programming languages, and, foremost, \tex/ macro files and log
+%    files. An important part of my \tex/ programming practice is to
+%    print out a macro file on paper and read it through, marking
+%    corrections along the way, then use the marked copy as a script
+%    for editing the file. (For one thing, this allows me to analyze
+%    and mark corrections while riding the bus to work, or
+%    sitting out in the back yard to supervise the kids.) The output I
+%    normally desired was two `pages' per sheet of U.S. letter-size
+%    paper printed landscape, in order to conserve paper.
+%
+%    Once created, \fn{listout.tex} quickly became my favorite means
+%    of printing out plain text files, not to mention an indispensable
+%    tool in my debugging toolbox: I turn on \cw{tracingmacros} and
+%    \cw{tracingcommands}, then print out the resulting log file so
+%    that I can see several hundred lines of the log at once (by
+%    spreading out two or three pages on my desk with 100+ lines per
+%    page); then I trace through, cross things out, label other
+%    things, draw arrows, and so forth.
+%
+%    I soon added a filename prompting loop to make it convenient to
+%    print multiple files in a single run. In the process of
+%    perfecting this simple prompting routine\Dash over two or three
+%    years\Dash and adding the ability to optionally specify things like
+%    number of columns at run time, eventually I wrote so much
+%    dialog-related macro code that it became clear this code should
+%    be moved out of \fn{listout.tex} into its own module. The result
+%    was \fn{dialog.sty}.
+%
+%    Before getting into the macro definitions and technical
+%    commentary, here are descriptions from the user's
+%    perspective of the functions defined in this file.
+%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \section{Message-sending functions}
+%
+%\begin{usage}
+%\mesj{<text>}
+%\end{usage}
+%    Sends the message verbatim: category 12 for all special
+%    characters except braces, tab characters, and carriage returns:
+%
+%^^V { } ^^I ^^M
+%
+%    Naturally, the catcode changes are effective only if \cw{mesj} is
+%    used directly, not inside a macro argument or definition
+%    replacement text.
+%
+%    Multiple spaces in the argument of \cw{mesj} print as multiple
+%    spaces on screen. A tab character produces always eight spaces;
+%    `smart' handling of tabs is more complicated than I would care to
+%    attempt.
+%
+%    Line breaks in the argument of \cw{mesj} will produce line breaks
+%    on screen. That is, you don't need to enter a special sequence
+%    such as \ctrl{J}\qc{\%} to get line breaks. See the technical
+%    commentary for \cw{mesjsetup} for details. Even though curly
+%    braces are left with their normal catcodes, they can be printed
+%    in a message without any problem, if they occur in balanced
+%    pairs. If not, the message should be sent using \cw{xmesj}
+%    instead of \cw{mesj}.
+%
+%    Because of its careful handling of the message text, \cw{mesj} is
+%    extremely easy to use. The only thing you have to worry about is
+%    having properly matched braces. Beyond that, you simply type
+%    everything exactly as you want it to appear on screen.
+%
+%\begin{usage}
+%\xmesj{<text>}
+%\end{usage}
+%    This is like \cw{mesj} but expands embedded control sequences
+%    instead of printing them verbatim. All special characters have
+%    category 12 except backslash, percent, braces, tab, return, and
+%    ampersand:
+%
+%^^V \ % { } ^^I ^^M &
+%
+%    The first four have normal \tex/ catcodes to make it possible to
+%    use most normal \tex/ commands, and comments, in the message
+%    text. \ctrl{I} and \ctrl{M} are catcode 13 and behave as
+%    described for \cw{mesj}. The \qc{\&} is a special convenience, an
+%    abbreviation for \cw{noexpand}, to use for controlling expansion
+%    inside the message text.
+%
+%    Doubled backslash \cs{\\} in the argument will produce a single
+%    category 12 backslash character\Dash thus, \verb'\\xxx' can be used
+%    instead of \cw{string}\cw{xxx} or \cw{noexpand}\cw{xxx} (notice
+%    that this works even for outer things like \cw{bye} or
+%    \cw{newif}). Similarly \cs{\%}, \cs{\{}, \cs{\}} and \cs{\&}
+%    produce the corresponding single characters.
+%
+%    Category 12 space means that you cannot write something like
+%
+%^^V \ifvmode h\else v\fi rule
+%
+%    in the argument of \cw{xmesj} without getting a space after the
+%    \cw{ifvmode}, \cw{else}, and \cw{fi}.%^^A
+%^^A
+%\footnote{Well, actually, you could replace each space by
+%\qc{\%}\meta{newline} to get rid of it. But that makes the message
+%text harder to read for the programmer.}
+%^^A
+%    Since occasionally this may be troublesome, \cs{\.} is defined
+%    inside the argument of \cw{xmesj} to be a `control word
+%    terminator': If the expansion of \cw{foo} is \verb'abc', then
+%    \verb'\foo\.xyz' produces \verb'abcxyz' on screen (as opposed to
+%    \verb'\foo xyz' which would produce \verb'abc xyz'). Thus the
+%    above conditional could be written as
+%
+%^^V \ifvmode\.h\else\.v\fi\.rule
+%
+%    Even though the catcode changes done by \cw{xmesj} setup have no
+%    effect if \cw{xmesj} is used inside an argument or definition
+%    replacement text, I find it convenient occasionally to use
+%    \cw{xmesj} in those contexts, in order to get other aspects of the
+%    \cw{xmesj} setup. For instance, if you need to embed a message
+%    that contains a percent sign inside a definition, you can write
+%
+%^^V \def\foo{...
+%^^V   \xmesj{... this is a percent
+%^^V     sign: \% (sans backslash) ...}
+%^^V ...}
+%
+%    To further support such uses of \cw{xmesj}, the following changes
+%    are also done by \cw{xmesj} setup: the backslash-space control
+%    symbol {\tt\bslash\char32} is made equivalent to \cw{space};
+%    \cs{\^^J} and \cs{\^^M} are defined to produce a \cw{newlinechar};
+%    and active tilde \qc{\~} will produce a category-12 tilde.
+%
+%    Among other things, this setup makes it easier to obtain
+%    newlines and multiple spaces in an embedded message. For example,
+%    in the following definition the message will have a line break on
+%    screen for each backslash at the end of a line, and the third
+%    line will be indented four spaces.
+%
+%^^V \def\bar{...
+%^^V   \xmesj{First line\
+%^^V     Second line\
+%^^V     \ \ \ \ Indented line\
+%^^V     Last line}%
+%^^V ...}
+%
+%    The alternative of defining a separate message function
+%    \cw{barfoo} with \cw{f[x]mesj} and calling \cw{barfoo} inside of
+%    \cw{bar} would allow more natural entry of the newlines and the
+%    multiple spaces, but would be slightly more expensive in string
+%    pool and hash table usage.
+%
+%\begin{usage}
+%\promptmesj{<text>}
+%\promptxmesj{<text>}
+%\end{usage}
+%    These are like \cw{mesj}, \cw{xmesj} but use \cw{message} rather
+%    than \cw{immediate}\cw{write}\verb'16' internally, thus if the
+%    following operation is a \cw{read}, the user will see the cursor
+%    on screen at the end of the last line, as may be desired when
+%    prompting for a short reply, rather than at the beginning of the
+%    next line. The character \qc{\!} is preempted internally for
+%    newlinechar, for these two functions only,
+%    which means that it cannot be actually printed in
+%    the message text. Use of a visible character such as \qc{\!},
+%    rather than the normal \cw{newlinechar} \ctrl{J}, is necessary
+%    for robustness because of the fact that the \cw{message}
+%    primitive was unable to use an `invisible' character (outside the
+%    range 32--126) for newlines up until \tex/ version 3.1415, which
+%    some users do not yet have (at the time of this writing\Dash July
+%    1994).
+%
+%\begin{usage}
+%\storemesj\foo{<text>}
+%\storexmesj\foo{<text>}
+%\end{usage}
+%    These functions are similar to \cw{mesj}, \cw{xmesj} but store the
+%    given text in the control sequence \cw{foo} instead of immediately
+%    sending the message. Standard \tex/ parameter syntax can be used
+%    to make \cw{foo} a function with arguments, e.g. after
+%
+%^^V \storemesj\foo#1{...#1...}
+%
+%    then you can later write
+%
+%^^V \message{\foo{\the\hsize}}
+%
+%    and get the current value of \cw{hsize} into the middle of the
+%    message text. Consequently also in the x-version \cw{storexmesj} a
+%    category-12 \qc{\#} character can be obtained with \cs{\#}.
+%
+%\begin{usage}
+%\fmesj\foobar#1#2...{...#1...#2...}
+%\end{usage}
+%    Defines \cw{foobar} as a function that will take the given
+%    arguments, sow them into the message text \verb"{...}", and send
+%    the message. In the message text all special characters are
+%    category 12 except for braces, \qc{\#}, tab, and carriage return.
+%
+%    If an unmatched brace or a \qc{\#} must be printed in the message
+%    text \cw{fxmesj} must be used instead. (\arg{#} could be used to
+%    insert a single category-6 \qc{\#} token into the message text, and
+%    \tex/ would print it without an error, but both \cw{message} and
+%    \cw{write} would print it as two \arg{#} characters, even though
+%    it's only a single token internally.)
+%
+%\begin{usage}
+%\fxmesj\foobar#1#2...{...#1...#2...}
+%\end{usage}
+%    Combination of \cw{xmesj} and \cw{fmesj}. Defines \cw{foobar} like
+%    \cw{fmesj}, but with full expansion of the replacement text and
+%    with normal category codes for backslash, percent, braces, and hash
+%    \qc{\#}. The control symbols \cs{\\} \cs{\%} \cs{\{} \cs{\}}
+%    \cs{\&} and \cs{\.} can be used as in \cw{xmesj}, with also \cs{\#}
+%    for printing a \qc{\#} character of category 12.
+%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \section{Reading functions}
+%
+%\begin{usage}
+%\readline{<default>}\answer
+%\end{usage}
+%    This reads a line of input from the user into the macro
+%    \cw{answer}. (The macro name can be anything chosen by the
+%    programmer, not just \cw{answer}.) Before reading, all special
+%    characters are deactivated, so that the primitive \cw{read} will
+%    not choke if the user happens to enter something like \cw{newif}
+%    or {\sc control-l} or \qc{\}}. Depending on the operating
+%    system, certain characters\Dash e.g., {\sc control-c}, {\sc
+%    control-z}, {\sc control-d}, {\sc control-h}\Dash might have
+%    special effects instead of being entered into the replacement
+%    text of \cw{answer}, regardless of the catcode changes. To
+%    take the most obvious example, under most
+%    operating systems, typing {\sc control-h} (the Rubout or
+%    Backward-Delete key) will delete the previous character from the
+%    user's response, instead of entering an \ascii/ character 8
+%    into \cw{answer}.
+%
+%    There is one significant exception from the catcode changes that
+%    are done for \cw{readline}: spaces and tabs retain their normal
+%    catcode of 10, so that multiple spaces in an answer will be
+%    reduced to a single space, and macros with normal space-delimited
+%    arguments will work when applied to the answer. (I can't think of
+%    any likely scenario where category 12 for spaces would be
+%    useful.) Also, the catcode of \ctrl{M} is set to 9 (ignore) so
+%    that an empty line\Dash meaning that the user just pressed the
+%    carriage return/enter key\Dash will result in an empty \cw{answer}.
+%    If the answer is empty, the given default string will be
+%    substituted. The default string can be empty.
+%
+%\begin{usage}
+%\xreadline{<default>}\answer
+%\end{usage}
+%    Like \cw{readline} but the answer is read as executable tokens;
+%    the usual catcodes of the \tex/ special characters remain in
+%    effect while reading the answer. A few common outer things
+%    (\cw{bye}, \cs{\+}, \cw{newif}, \ctrl{L}, among others) are
+%    neutralized before the \cw{read} is done, but the user can still
+%    cause problems by entering some other outer control sequence or
+%    unbalanced braces. I doubt there's any bulletproof solution, if
+%    the tokens are to remain executable, short of the usual last
+%    resort: reading the answer using \cw{readline}, writing it to a
+%    file, then inputting the file.
+%
+%\begin{usage}
+%\readchar{<default>}\answer
+%\end{usage}
+%    This is like \cw{readline} but it reduces the answer to its first
+%    character. \meta{default} is either a single character or empty.
+%
+%\begin{usage}
+%\readChar{<default>}\answer
+%\end{usage}
+%    This is like \cw{readchar} and also uppercases the answer.
+%
+%\begin{usage}
+%\changecase\uppercase\answer
+%\end{usage}
+%    The function \cw{changecase} redefines its second argument, which
+%    must be a macro, to contain the same text as before, but
+%    uppercased or lowercased according to the first argument. Thus
+%    \cw{readChar}\verb'{Q}'\cw{answer} is equivalent to
+%
+%^^V \readchar{q}\answer
+%^^V \changecase\uppercase\answer
+%
+%    It might sometimes be desirable to force lower case before using
+%    a file name given by the user, for example.
+%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \section{Checking functions}
+%
+%\begin{usage}
+%\checkinteger\reply\tempcount
+%\end{usage}
+%    To read in and check an answer that is supposed to be an integer,
+%    use \cw{readline}{}\cw{reply} and then apply \cw{checkinteger} to
+%    the \cw{reply}, supplying a count register, not necessarily named
+%    \cw{tempcount}, wherein \cw{checkinteger} will leave the validated
+%    integer. If \cw{reply} does not contain a valid integer the
+%    returned value will be \verb'-'\cw{maxdimen}.
+%
+%    At the present time only decimal digits are handled;
+%    some valid \tex/ numbers such as \verb'"AB', \verb'`\@',
+%    \cw{number}\cw{prevgraf}, or a count register name, will not be
+%    recognized by \cw{checkinteger}. There seems to be no bulletproof
+%    way to allow these possibilities.
+%
+%    Tests that hide \cw{checkinteger} under the hood, such as a
+%    \cw{nonnegativeinteger} test, are not provided because as often as
+%    not the number being prompted for will have to be tested to see if
+%    it falls inside a more specific range, such as 0\dash 255 for an
+%    8-bit number or 1\dash 31 for a date, and it seems common sense to
+%    omit overhead if it would usually be redundant. It's easy enough to
+%    define such a test for yourself, if you want one.
+%
+%\begin{usage}
+%\checkdimen\reply\tempdim
+%\end{usage}
+%    Analog of \cw{checkinteger} for dimension values. If \cw{reply}
+%    does not contain a valid dimension the value returned in
+%    \cw{tempdim} will be \verb'-'\cw{maxdimen}.
+%
+%    Only explicit dimensions with decimal digits, optional decimal
+%    point and more decimal digits, followed by explicit units
+%    \verb'pt' \verb'cm' \verb'in' or whatever are checked for; some
+%    valid \tex/ dimensions such as \cw{parindent},
+%    \verb'.3'\cw{baselineskip}, or \cw{fontdimen}\verb'5'\cw{font}
+%    will not be recognized by \cw{checkdimen}.
+%
+% \subsection*{What good is all this?}
+%    What good is all this stuff, practically speaking?\Dash you may
+%    ask. Well, a typical application might be something like: At the
+%    beginning of a document, prompt interactively to find out if the
+%    user wants to print on A4 or US letter-size paper, or change the
+%    top or left margin. Such a query could be done like this:
+%
+%^^V \promptxmesj{
+%^^V Do you want to print on A4 or US letter paper?
+%^^V Enter u or U for US letter, anything else for A4: }
+%^^V \readChar{A}\reply % default = A4
+%^^V \if U\reply \textheight=11in \textwidth=8.5in
+%^^V \else \textheight=297mm \textwidth=210mm \fi
+%^^V %    Subtract space for 1-inch margins
+%^^V \addtolength{\textheight}{-2in}
+%^^V \addtolength{\textwidth}{-2in}
+%^^V
+%^^V \promptxmesj{
+%^^V Left margin setting? [Return = keep current value,
+%^^V \the\oddsidemargin]: }
+%^^V \readline{\the\oddsidemargin}\reply
+%^^V \checkdimen\reply{\dimen0}
+%^^V \ifdim\dimen0>-\maxdimen
+%^^V   \setlength\oddsidemargin{\dimen0}%
+%^^V   \xmesj{OK, using new left margin of %
+%^^V \the\oddsidemargin.}
+%^^V \else
+%^^V   \xmesj{Sorry, I don't understand %
+%^^V that reply: `\reply'.\
+%^^V Using default value: \the\oddsidemargin.}
+%^^V \fi
+%
+%    Although \latex/'s \cw{typeout} and \cw{typein} functions can
+%    be used for this same task, they are rather more awkward, and
+%    checking the margin value for validity would be quite difficult.
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+%
+% \section{Implementation}
+%    Standard package identification:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2e>
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+\ProvidesPackage{dialog}[1994/11/08 v0.9y]
+%</2e>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \section{Preliminaries}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2e>
+\RequirePackage{grabhedr}
+%</2e>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    If \fn{grabhedr.sty} is not already loaded, load it now. The
+%    \cw{trap.input} function is explained in \fn{grabhedr.doc}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*209>
+\csname trap.input\endcsname
+\input grabhedr.sty \relax
+\fileversiondate{dialog.sty}{0.9y}{1994/11/08}%
+%</209>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    The functions \cw{localcatcodes} and \cw{restore\-catcodes} are
+%    defined in \fn{grabhedr.sty}. We use them to save and restore
+%    catcodes of any special characters needed in this file whose
+%    current catcodes might not be what we want them to be. Saving and
+%    restoring catcode of at-sign \qc{\@} makes this file work equally
+%    well as a \latex/ documentstyle option or as a simple input file in
+%    other contexts. The double quote character \qc{\"} might be active
+%    for German and other languages. Saving and restoring tilde \qc{\~},
+%    hash \qc{\#}, caret \qc{\^}, and left quote \qc{\`} catcodes is
+%    normally redundant but reduces the number of assumptions we must
+%    rely on. (The following catcodes are assumed: \qc{\\} 0, \qc{\{} 1,
+%    \qc{\}} 2, \qc{\%} 14, {\tt a}\dash {\tt z} {\tt A}\dash {\tt Z}
+%    11, {\tt 0}\dash {\tt 9} \qc{\.} \qc{\-} 12. Also note that
+%    \cw{endlinechar} is assumed to have a non-null value.)
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%% The line break is significant here:
+\localcatcodes{\@{11}\ {10}\
+{5}\~{13}\"{12}\#{6}\^{7}\`{12}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \section{Definitions}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\otherchars}
+%
+%    For deactivating characters with special catcodes during
+%    \cw{readline} we use, instead of \cw{dospecials}, a more
+%    bulletproof (albeit slower) combination of \cw{otherchars},
+%    \cw{controlchars}, and \cw{highchars} that covers all characters in
+%    the range 0\dash 255 except letters and digits. Handling the
+%    characters above 127 triples the overhead done for each read
+%    operation or message definition but seems mandatory for maximum
+%    robustness.^^A
+%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \footnote{If you are using \fn{dialog.sty} functions on a slow
+% computer, you might want to try setting \cw{highchars} = empty to
+% see if that helps the speed.}
+%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%
+%    \cw{otherchars} includes the thirty-three nonalphanumeric visible
+%    characters (counting space as visible). It is intended as an
+%    executable list like \cw{dospecials} but, as an exercise in
+%    memory conservation, it is constructed without the \cw{do}s. For
+%    the usual application of changing catcodes, the list can still be
+%    executed nicely as shown below. Also, if we arrange to
+%    make sure that each character token gets category 12, it's not
+%    necessary to use control symbols such as \cs{\%} in place of
+%    those few special characters that would otherwise be difficult to
+%    place inside of a definition. This avoids a problem that would
+%    otherwise arise if we included \cs{\+} in the list and tried to
+%    process the list with a typical definition of \cs{do}: \cs{\+} is
+%    `outer' in plain \tex/ and would cause an error message when
+%    \cw{do} attempted to read it as an argument. (As a matter of fact
+%    the catcode changes below show a different way around that
+%    problem, but a list of category-12 character tokens is a fun
+%    thing to have around anyway.)
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\begingroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    First we start a group to localize \cw{catcode} changes. Then we
+%    change all relevant catcodes to 12 except for backslash, open
+%    brace, and close brace, which can be handled by judicious
+%    application of \cw{escapechar}, \cw{string}, \cw{edef}, and
+%    \cw{xdef}. By defining \cw{do} in a slightly backward way, so that
+%    it doesn't take an argument, we don't need to worry about the
+%    presence of \cs{\+} in the list of control symbols. Notice the
+%    absence of \cs{\`} from the list of control symbols; it was already
+%    catcoded to 12 in the \cw{localcatcodes} declaration at the
+%    beginning of this file\Dash otherwise it would be troublesome to
+%    make the definition of \cw{do} bulletproof (consider the
+%    possibilities that \qc{\`} might have catcode 0, 5, 9, or 14).
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\do{12 \catcode`}
+\catcode`\~\do\!\do\@\do\#\do\$\do\^\do\&
+\do\*\do\(\do\)\do\-\do\_\do\=\do\[\do\]
+\do\;\do\:\do\'\do\"\do\<\do\>\do\,\do\.
+\do\/\do\?\do\|12\relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    To handle backslash and braces, we define \cs{\\},
+%    \cs{\{}, and \cs{\}} to produce the corresponding category-12
+%    character tokens. Setting \cw{escapechar} to $-1$ means that
+%    \cw{string} will omit the leading backslash that it would
+%    otherwise produce when applied to a control sequence.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\escapechar -1
+\edef\\{\string\\}
+\edef\{{\string\{}\edef\}{\string\}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Space and percent are done last. Then, with almost all the
+%    special characters now category 12, it's rather easy to define
+%    \cw{otherchars}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\catcode`\ =12\catcode`\%=12
+\xdef\otherchars
+{ !"#$%&'()*+,-./:;<=>?[\\]^_`\{|\}~}
+\endgroup %              ^     ^  ^
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\controlchars}
+%
+%    \cw{controlchars} is another list for the control characters
+%    \ascii/ 0\dash 31 and 127. The construction of this list is similar
+%    to the construction of \cw{otherchars}. We need to turn off
+%    \cw{endlinechar} because the catcode of \ctrl{M} is going to be
+%    changed. The \ctrl{L} inside the \cw{gdef} is not a problem (as it
+%    might have been, due to the usual outerness of \ctrl{L}) because
+%    the catcode is changed from 13 to 12 before that point.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\begingroup
+\endlinechar = -1
+\def\do{12 \catcode`}
+\catcode`\^^@\do\^^A\do\^^B\do\^^C
+\do\^^D\do\^^E\do\^^F\do\^^G\do\^^H\do\^^I
+\do\^^J\do\^^K\do\^^L\do\^^M\do\^^N\do\^^O
+\do\^^P\do\^^Q\do\^^R\do\^^S\do\^^T\do\^^U
+\do\^^V\do\^^W\do\^^X\do\^^Y\do\^^Z\do\^^[
+\do\^^\\do\^^]\do\^^^\do\^^_\do\^^? 12\relax
+%
+\gdef\controlchars{^^@^^A^^B^^C^^D^^E^^F^^G
+  ^^H^^I^^J^^K^^L^^M^^N^^O^^P^^Q^^R^^S^^T
+  ^^U^^V^^W^^X^^Y^^Z^^[^^\^^]^^^^^_^^?}
+\endgroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\highchars}
+%    And finally, the list \cw{highchars} contains characters
+%    128\dash 255, the ones that have the eighth bit set.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\begingroup
+\def\do{12 \catcode`}
+\catcode`\^^80\do\^^81\do\^^82\do\^^83\do\^^84
+\do\^^85\do\^^86\do\^^87\do\^^88\do\^^89\do\^^8a
+\do\^^8b\do\^^8c\do\^^8d\do\^^8e\do\^^8f
+\do\^^90\do\^^91\do\^^92\do\^^93\do\^^94\do\^^95
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\verbdots\iffalse
+\do\^^96\do\^^97\do\^^98\do\^^99\do\^^9a\do\^^9b
+\do\^^9c\do\^^9d\do\^^9e\do\^^9f
+\do\^^a0\do\^^a1\do\^^a2\do\^^a3\do\^^a4\do\^^a5
+\do\^^a6\do\^^a7\do\^^a8\do\^^a9\do\^^aa\do\^^ab
+\do\^^ac\do\^^ad\do\^^ae\do\^^af
+\do\^^b0\do\^^b1\do\^^b2\do\^^b3\do\^^b4\do\^^b5
+\do\^^b6\do\^^b7\do\^^b8\do\^^b9\do\^^ba\do\^^bb
+\do\^^bc\do\^^bd\do\^^be\do\^^bf
+\do\^^c0\do\^^c1\do\^^c2\do\^^c3\do\^^c4\do\^^c5
+\do\^^c6\do\^^c7\do\^^c8\do\^^c9\do\^^ca\do\^^cb
+\do\^^cc\do\^^cd\do\^^ce\do\^^cf
+\do\^^d0\do\^^d1\do\^^d2\do\^^d3\do\^^d4\do\^^d5
+\do\^^d6\do\^^d7\do\^^d8\do\^^d9\do\^^da\do\^^db
+\do\^^dc\do\^^dd\do\^^de\do\^^df
+\do\^^e0\do\^^e1\do\^^e2\do\^^e3\do\^^e4\do\^^e5
+\do\^^e6\do\^^e7\do\^^e8\do\^^e9\do\^^ea\do\^^eb
+\do\^^ec\do\^^ed\do\^^ee\do\^^ef
+\do\^^f0\do\^^f1\do\^^f2\do\^^f3\do\^^f4\do\^^f5
+\do\^^f6\do\^^f7\do\^^f8\do\^^f9\do\^^fa\do\^^fb
+%\fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\do\^^fc\do\^^fd\do\^^fe\do\^^ff 12\relax
+%
+\gdef\highchars{%
+^^80^^81^^82^^83^^84^^85^^86^^87^^88%
+^^89^^8a^^8b^^8c^^8d^^8e^^8f%
+^^90^^91^^92^^93^^94^^95^^96^^97^^98%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\verbdots\iffalse
+^^99^^9a^^9b^^9c^^9d^^9e^^9f%
+^^a0^^a1^^a2^^a3^^a4^^a5^^a6^^a7^^a8%
+^^a9^^aa^^ab^^ac^^ad^^ae^^af%
+^^b0^^b1^^b2^^b3^^b4^^b5^^b6^^b7^^b8%
+^^b9^^ba^^bb^^bc^^bd^^be^^bf%
+^^c0^^c1^^c2^^c3^^c4^^c5^^c6^^c7^^c8%
+^^c9^^ca^^cb^^cc^^cd^^ce^^cf%
+^^d0^^d1^^d2^^d3^^d4^^d5^^d6^^d7^^d8%
+^^d9^^da^^db^^dc^^dd^^de^^df%
+^^e0^^e1^^e2^^e3^^e4^^e5^^e6^^e7^^e8%
+^^e9^^ea^^eb^^ec^^ed^^ee^^ef%
+^^f0^^f1^^f2^^f3^^f4^^f5^^f6^^f7^^f8%
+%\fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+^^f9^^fa^^fb^^fc^^fd^^fe^^ff}
+\endgroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\actively}
+%
+%    The function \cw{actively} makes a given character active and
+%    carries out the assignment given as the first argument. The
+%    assignment can be embedded in the replacement text of a macro
+%    definition without requiring any special setup to produce an active
+%    character in the replacement text. The argument should be a control
+%    symbol, e.g. \cw{@} or \cs{\#} or \cs{\^^M}, rather than a single
+%    character. (Except that \qc{\+} is safer than \cs{\+} in
+%    \plaintex/.) If the assignment is a definition (\cw{def},
+%    \cw{edef}, \cw{gdef}, \cw{xdef}) it is allowed to take arguments in
+%    the normal \tex/ way. Prefixes such as \cw{global}, \cw{long}, or
+%    \cw{outer} must go inside the first argument rather than before
+%    \cw{actively}.
+%
+%    Usage:
+%\begin{usage}
+%\actively\def\?{<replacement text>}
+%\actively\def\%#1#2{<replacement text>}
+%\actively{\global\let}\^^@=\space
+%\end{usage}
+%    One place where this function can be put to good use is in
+%    making \ctrl{M} active in order to get special action at the end
+%    of each line of input. The usual way of going about this would be
+%    to write
+%
+%^^V \def\par{something}\obeylines
+%
+%    \noindent which is a puzzling construction to the \tex/ novice
+%    who doesn't know what \cw{obeylines} does with \cw{par}. The same
+%    effect could be gotten a little more transparently with
+%
+%^^V \actively\def\^^M{something}
+%
+%    In the definition of \cw{actively} we use the unique properties
+%    of \cw{lowercase} to create an active character with the right
+%    character code, overlapping with a \cw{begingroup} \cw{endgroup}
+%    structure that localizes the necessary lc-code change.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\actively#1#2{\catcode`#2\active
+  \begingroup \lccode`\~=`#2\relax
+  \lowercase{\endgroup#1~}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\mesjsetup}
+%
+%    The \cw{mesjsetup} function starts a group to localize catcode
+%    changes. The group will be closed eventually by a separate
+%    function that does the actual sending or stores the message text
+%    for later retrieval.
+%
+%    We want to change the catcode of each character in the three
+%    lists \cw{otherchars}, \cw{controlchars}, and \cw{highchars} to
+%    12. After giving \cw{do} a recursive definition, we apply it to
+%    each of the three lists, adding a suitable element at the end of
+%    the list to make the recursion stop there. This allows
+%    leaving out the \cw{do} tokens from the character lists, without
+%    incurring the cost of an if test at each recursion step.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\mesjsetup{\begingroup \count@=12
+  \def\do##1{\catcode`##1\count@ \do}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    The abbreviation \cw{xp@} = \cw{expandafter} is from
+%    \fn{grabhedr.sty}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \xp@\do\otherchars{a11 \@gobbletwo}%
+  \xp@\do\controlchars{a11 \@gobbletwo}%
+  \xp@\do\highchars{a11 \@gobbletwo}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Make the tab character produce eight spaces:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \actively\edef\^^I{ \space\space\space
+    \space\space\space\space}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    The convenient treatment of newlines in the argument of \cw{mesj}
+%    (every line break produces a line break on screen) is achieved by
+%    making the \ctrl{M} character active and defining it to produce a
+%    category-12 \ctrl{J} character. Although for \cw{mesj} it would
+%    have sufficed to make \ctrl{M} category 12 and locally set
+%    \cw{newlinechar} = \ctrl{M} while sending the message, it turns out
+%    to be useful for other functions to have the \ctrl{M} character
+%    active, so that it can be remapped to an arbitrary function for
+%    handling new lines (e.g., perhaps adding extra spaces at the
+%    beginning of each line). And if \cw{mesj} treats \ctrl{M} the same,
+%    we can arrange for it to share the setup routines needed for the
+%    other functions.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \endlinechar=`\^^M\actively\let\^^M=\relax
+  \catcode`\{=1 \catcode`\}=2 }
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\sendmesj}
+%
+%    In \cw{sendmesj} we go to a little extra trouble to make sure
+%    \ctrl{M} produces a newline character, no matter what the value of
+%    \cw{newlinechar} might be in the surrounding environment. The
+%    impending \cw{endgroup} will restore \cw{newlinechar} to its
+%    previous value. One reason for using \ctrl{J} (instead of, say,
+%    \ctrl{M} directly) is to allow e.g. \cw{mesj}\verb'{xxx^^Jxxxx}' to
+%    be written inside a definition, as is sometimes convenient. This
+%    would be difficult with \ctrl{M} instead of \ctrl{J} because of
+%    catcodes.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\sendmesj{\newlinechar`\^^J%
+  \actively\def\^^M{^^J}%
+  \immediate\write\sixt@@n{\mesjtext}\endgroup}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\mesj}
+%
+%    Given the support functions defined above, the definition of
+%    \cw{mesj} is easy: Use \cw{mesjsetup} to clear all special
+%    catcodes, then set up \cw{sendmesj} to be triggered by the next
+%    assignment, then read the following balanced-braces group into
+%    \cw{mesjtext}. As soon as the definition is completed, \tex/ will
+%    execute \cw{sendmesj}, which will send the text and close the
+%    group that was started in \cw{mesjsetup} to localize the catcode
+%    changes.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\mesj{\mesjsetup \afterassignment\sendmesj
+  \def\mesjtext}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\sendprompt}
+%
+%    The \cw{sendprompt} function is just like \cw{sendmesj} except
+%    that it uses \cw{message} instead of \cw{write}, as might be
+%    desired when prompting for user input, so that the on-screen
+%    cursor stays on the same line as the prompt instead of hopping
+%    down to the beginning of the next line. In order for newlines to
+%    work with \cw{message} we must use a visible character instead of
+%    \ctrl{J}. When everyone has \tex/ version 3.1415 or later this
+%    will no longer be true. The choice of \qc{\!} might be construed
+%    (if you wish) as editorial comment that \qc{\!} should not be
+%    shouted at the user in a prompt.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\sendprompt{%
+  \newlinechar`\!\relax \actively\def\^^M{!}%
+  \message{\mesjtext}\endgroup}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\promptmesj}
+%
+%    This function is like \cw{mesj} but uses \cw{sendprompt} instead of
+%    \cw{sendmesj}.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\promptmesj{\mesjsetup
+  \afterassignment\sendprompt \def\mesjtext}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\storemesj}
+%
+%    Arg \arg{1} of \cw{storemesj} is the control sequence under which
+%    the message text is to be stored.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\storemesj#1{\mesjsetup
+  \catcode`\#=6 % to allow arguments if needed
+  \afterassignment\endgroup
+  \long\gdef#1}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\fmesj}
+%
+%    While \cw{storemesj}\cw{foo}\verb"{...}" is more or less the
+%    same as \cw{def}\cw{foo}\verb"{...}" with special catcode
+%    changes, \cw{fmesj}\cw{foo}\verb"{...}" corresponds to
+%    \cw{def}\cw{foo}\qc{\{}\cw{mesj}\verb"{...}}", that is, after
+%    \cw{fmesj}\cw{foo} the function \cw{foo} can be executed directly
+%    to send the message. Thus \cw{storemesj} is typically used for
+%    storing pieces of messages, while \cw{fmesj} is used for storing
+%    entire messages.
+%
+%    To read the parameter text \arg{2}, we use the peculiar
+%    \verb'#{' feature of \tex/ to read everything up to the opening
+%    brace.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\fmesj#1#2#{\mesjsetup
+  \catcode`\#=6 % restore to normal
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    The parameter text \arg{2} must be stored in a token register
+%    rather than a macro to avoid problems with \qc{\#} characters.
+%    The \cw{long} prefix is just to admit the (unlikely) possibility
+%    of using \cw{fmesj} to define something such as an error message
+%    saying `You can't use \arg{1} here' where one of the
+%    possibilities for \arg{1} is \cw{string}\cw{par}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \toks@{\long\gdef#1#2}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Define \cw{@tempa} to put together the first two arguments and
+%    [pseudo]argument \arg{3} and make the definition of \arg{1}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \def\@tempa{%
+    \edef\@tempa{%
+      \the\toks@{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    The abbreviation \cw{nx@} = \cw{noexpand} is from
+%    \fn{grabhedr.sty}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+      \begingroup\def\nx@\mesjtext{\the\toks2 }%
+        \nx@\sendmesj}%
+    }%
+    \@tempa
+    \endgroup % Turn off the \mesjsetup catcodes
+  }%
+  \afterassignment\@tempa
+  \toks2=}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\xmesjsetup}
+%
+%    \cw{xmesjsetup} is like \cw{mesjsetup} except it prepares to allow
+%    control sequence tokens and normal comments in the message text.
+%    For \tex/nicians' convenience certain other features are
+%    thrown in.
+%
+%    Here, unlike the setup for \cw{xreadline}, I don't bother to
+%    remove the outerness of \cw{bye}, \cw{newif}, etc., because I
+%    presume the arguments of \cw{xmesj}, \cw{fxmesj},
+%    \cw{storexmesj}, \cw{fxmenu}, etc.\ are more likely to be written
+%    by a \tex/nician than by an average end user, whereas
+%    \cw{xreadline} is designed to handle arbitrary input from
+%    arbitrary users.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\xmesjsetup{\mesjsetup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Throw in pseudo braces just in case we are inside an \cw{halign}
+%    with \cs{\\} let equal to \cw{cr} at the time when \cw{xmesjsetup}
+%    is called. (As might happen in \amstex/.)
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \iffalse{\fi
+  \catcode`\\=0 \catcode`\%=14
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Define {\def~{\spacefactor1500 \space}%
+%    \cs{\%}~\cs{\\}~\cs{\{}~\cs{\}}~\cs{\&}} to produce the
+%    corresponding single characters, category 12. The \cw{lowercase}
+%    trick here allows these definitions to be nonglobal.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \begingroup \lccode`\0=`\\\lccode`\1=`\{%
+  \lccode`\2=`\}\lccode`\3=`\%%
+  \lowercase{\endgroup \def\\{0}\def\{{1}%
+    \def\}{2}\def\%{3}}%
+  \iffalse}\fi
+  \edef\&{\string &}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Let \qc{\&} \qc{\=} \cw{noexpand} for expansion control inside the
+%    argument text; let active \ctrl{M} \qc{\=} \cw{relax} so that
+%    newlines will remain inert during the expansion.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \actively\let\&=\noexpand
+  \actively\let\^^M=\relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Define \cs{\.} to be a noop, for terminating a control word when
+%    it is followed by letters and no space is wanted.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \def\.{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Support for use of \cw{xmesj} inside a definition replacement
+%    text or macro argument: control-space
+%    \verb*"\ " = \cw{space}, tilde \qc{\~} prints as itself,
+%    \cs{\^^M} (i.e., a lone backslash at the end of a line) will
+%    produce a newline, also \cs{\^^J}, while finally \cw{par} \qc{\=}
+%    blank line translates to two newlines.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \def\ { }\edef~{\string ~}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Define \cs{\^^M} to produce an active \ctrl{M} character, which (we
+%    hope) will be suitably defined to produce a newline or whatever.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \begingroup \lccode`\~=`\^^M%
+    \lowercase{\endgroup \def\^^M{~}}%
+  \let\^^J\^^M \def\par{\^^M\^^M}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\xmesj}
+%
+%    \cw{xmesj} uses \cw{xmesjsetup} and \cw{edef}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\xmesj{\xmesjsetup \afterassignment\sendmesj
+  \edef\mesjtext}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\promptxmesj}
+%
+%    \cw{promptxmesj} is analogous to \cw{promptmesj}, but with
+%    expansion.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\promptxmesj{\xmesjsetup
+  \afterassignment\sendprompt \edef\mesjtext}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\storexmesj}
+%
+%    And \cw{storexmesj} is like \cw{storemesj}, with expansion. Since
+%    we allow arguments for the function being defined, we also must
+%    define \cs{\#} to produce a single category-12 \qc{\#} character so
+%    that there will be a way to print \qc{\#} in the message text.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\storexmesj#1#2#{\xmesjsetup
+  \catcode`\#=6 % to allow arguments if needed
+  \edef\#{\string##}%
+  \afterassignment\endgroup
+  \long\xdef#1#2}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\fxmesj}
+%
+%    And \cw{fxmesj} is the expansive analog of \cw{fmesj}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\fxmesj#1#2#{\xmesjsetup
+  \catcode`\#=6 % restore to normal
+  \edef\#{\string##}%
+  \toks@{\long\xdef#1#2}%
+  \def\@tempa{%
+    \edef\@tempa{%
+      \the\toks@{\begingroup
+      \def\nx@\nx@\nx@\mesjtext{\the\toks\tw@}%
+      \nx@\nx@\nx@\sendmesj}}%
+    \@tempa % execute the constructed xdef
+    \endgroup % restore normal catcodes
+  }%
+  \afterassignment\@tempa
+  \toks\tw@=}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \section{Reading functions}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\readline}
+%    The \cw{readline} function gets one line of input from the user.
+%    Arguments are: \arg{1} default to be used if the user response is
+%    empty (i.e., if the user just pressed the return/enter key),
+%    \arg{2} macro to receive the input.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\readline#1#2{%
+  \begingroup \count@ 12 %
+  \def\do##1{\catcode`##1\count@ \do}%
+  \xp@\do\otherchars{a11 \@gobbletwo}%
+  \xp@\do\controlchars{a11 \@gobbletwo}%
+  \xp@\do\highchars{a11 \@gobbletwo}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Make spaces and tabs normal instead of category 12.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \catcode`\ =10 \catcode`\^^I=10 %
+  \catcode`\^^M=9 % ignore
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Reset end-of-line char to normal, just in case.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \endlinechar`\^^M
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    We go to a little trouble to avoid \cw{gdef}-ing \arg{2}, in order
+%    to prevent save stack buildup if the user of \cw{readline} carries
+%    on unaware doing local redefinitions of \arg{2} after the initial
+%    read.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \read\m@ne to#2%
+  \edef#2{\def\nx@#2{#2}}%
+  \xp@\endgroup #2%
+  \ifx\@empty#2\def#2{#1}\fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\xreadline}
+%
+%    \cw{xreadline} is like \cw{readline} except that it leaves almost
+%    all catcodes unchanged so that the return value is executable
+%    tokens instead of strictly character tokens of category 11 or 12.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\xreadline#1#2{%
+  \begingroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Render some outer control sequences innocuous.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \xp@\let\csname bye\endcsname\relax
+    \xp@\let\csname newif\endcsname\relax
+    \xp@\let\csname newcount\endcsname\relax
+    \xp@\let\csname newdimen\endcsname\relax
+    \xp@\let\csname newskip\endcsname\relax
+    \xp@\let\csname newmuskip\endcsname\relax
+    \xp@\let\csname newtoks\endcsname\relax
+    \xp@\let\csname newbox\endcsname\relax
+    \xp@\let\csname newinsert\endcsname\relax
+    \xp@\let\csname +\endcsname\relax
+    \actively\let\^^L\relax
+  \catcode`\^^M=9 % ignore
+  \endlinechar`\^^M% reset to normal
+  \read\m@ne to#2%
+  \toks@\xp@{#2}%
+  \edef\@tempa{\def\nx@#2{\the\toks@}}%
+  \xp@\endgroup \@tempa
+  \ifx\@empty#2\def#2{#1}\fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\readchar}
+%
+%    \cw{readchar} reduces the user response to a single character.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\readchar#1#2{%
+  \readline{#1}#2%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    If the user's response and the default response are both empty,
+%    we need something after \arg{1} to keep \cw{@car} from running
+%    away, so we add an empty pair of braces.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \edef#2{\xp@\@car#2#1{}\@nil}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\readChar}
+%
+%    \cw{readChar} reduces the user response to a single uppercase
+%    character. (This is useful to simplify testing the response
+%    later with \cw{if}.)
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\readChar#1#2{%
+  \readline{#1}#2%
+  \changecase\uppercase#2%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Reduce \arg{2} to its first character, or the first character of
+%    \arg{1}, if \arg{2} is empty. The extra braces \verb'{}' are to
+%    prevent a runaway argument error from \cw{@car} if \arg{2} and
+%    \arg{1} are both empty.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \edef#2{\xp@\@car #2#1{}\@nil}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\changecase}
+%    The function \cw{changecase} uppercases or lowercases the
+%    replacement text of its second argument, which
+%    must be a macro. The first argument should be \cw{uppercase} or
+%    \cw{lowercase}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\changecase#1#2{\@casetoks\xp@{#2}%
+  \edef#2{#1{\def\nx@#2{\the\@casetoks}}}#2}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@casetoks}
+%    We allocate a token register just for the use of \cw{changecase}
+%    because it might be used at a low level internally where we don't
+%    want to interfere with other uses of the scratch token registers
+%    0\dash 9.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newtoks\@casetoks
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%    A common task in reading user input is to verify, when an answer
+%    of a certain kind was requested, that the response has indeed the
+%    desired form\Dash for example, if a nonnegative integer is required
+%    for subsequent processing, it behooves us to verify that we have
+%    a nonnegative integer in hand before doing anything that might
+%    lead to inconvenient error messages. However, it's not easy to
+%    decide how best to handle such verification. One possibility
+%    might be to have a function
+%
+%^^V \readnonnegativeinteger\foo
+%
+%    to do all the work of going out and fetching a number from the
+%    user and leaving it in the macro \cw{foo}. Another possibility
+%    would be to read the response using \cw{readline} and then apply
+%    a separate function that can be used in combination with \cw{if},
+%    for example
+%
+%^^V   \readline{}\reply
+%^^V   \if\validnumber\reply ... \else ... \fi
+%
+%    For maximum flexibility, a slightly lower-level approach is
+%    chosen here. The target syntax is
+%
+%^^V   \readline{}\reply
+%^^V   \checkinteger\reply\tempcount
+%
+%    where \cw{tempcount} will be set to \verb'-'\cw{maxdimen} if
+%    \cw{reply} does {\em not\/} contain a valid integer. (Negative
+%    integers are allowed, as long as they are greater than
+%    \verb'-'\cw{maxdimen}.)  Then the function that calls
+%    \cw{checkinteger} is free to make additional checks on the range
+%    of the reply and give error messages tailored to the
+%    circumstances. And the handling of an empty \cw{reply} can be
+%    arbitrarily customized, something that would tend to be
+%    inconvenient for the first method mentioned.
+%
+%    The first and second approaches can be built on top of the third
+%    if desired, e.g.\ (for the second approach)
+%
+%^^V \def\validnumber#1{TT\fi
+%^^V   \checkinteger#1\tempcount%
+%^^V   \ifnum\tempcount>-\maxdimen }
+%
+%    The curious \verb'TT\fi'\verbdots\cw{ifnum} construction is from
+%    \TeXhax{} 1989, no.~20 and no.~38 (a suggestion of D. E. Knuth in
+%    reply to a query by S. von Bechtolsheim).
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\checkinteger}
+%
+%    The arguments of \cw{checkinteger}'s are: \arg{2}, a count register
+%    to hold the result; \arg{1}, a macro holding zero or more arbitrary
+%    characters of category 11 or 12.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\checkinteger#1#2{\let\scansign@\@empty
+  \def\scanresult@{#2}%
+  \xp@\scanint#1x\endscan}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\scanint}
+%
+%    To validate a number, the function \cw{scanint} must first scan
+%    away leading \qc{\+} or \qc{\-} signs (keeping track in
+%    \cw{scansign@}), then look at the first token after that: if it's
+%    a digit, fine, scan that digit and any succeeding digits into the
+%    given count register (\cw{scanresult@}), ending with \cw{endscan}
+%    to get rid of any following garbage tokens that might just
+%    possibly show up.
+%
+%    Typical usage of \cw{scanint} includes initializing \cw{scansign@}
+%    to empty, as in the definition of \cw{checkinteger}.
+%\begin{usage}
+%\let\scansign@\@empty
+%\def\scanresult@{\tempcount}%
+%\xp@\scanint\reply x\endscan
+%\end{usage}
+%    Assumption: \cw{reply} is either empty or contains only category
+%    11 or 12 characters (which it will if you used \cw{readline}!). If
+%    a separate check is done earlier to trap the case where \cw{reply}
+%    is empty\Dash for example, by using a nonempty default for
+%    \cw{readline}\Dash then the \verb'x' before \cw{endscan} is
+%    superfluous.
+%
+%    Arg \arg{1} = next character from the string being tested.
+%    The test whether \arg{1} is a decimal digit is similar in spirit
+%    to the test \verb'\if!#1!' to see if an argument is empty
+%    (\TB, Appendix~D, p.~376).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\scanint#1{%
+  \ifodd 0#11 %
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Is \arg{1} a decimal digit? If so read all digits into
+%    \cw{scanresult@} with the sign prefix.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \def\@tempa{\afterassignment\endscan
+      \scanresult@=\scansign@#1}%
+  \else
+    \if -#1\relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Here we flipflop the sign; watch closely.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+      \edef\scansign@{%
+        \ifx\@empty\scansign@ -\fi}%
+      \def\@tempa{\scanint}%
+    \else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    A plus sign can just be ignored.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+      \if +#1\relax
+        \def\@tempa{\scanint}%
+      \else % not a valid number
+        \def\@tempa{%
+          \scanresult@=-\maxdimen\endscan}%
+  \fi\fi\fi
+  \@tempa
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\endscan}
+%    The \cw{endscan} function just gobbles any remaining garbage. It
+%    uses its own name as the argument delimiter.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\endscan#1\endscan{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\dimenfirstpart}
+% \begin{macro}{\dimentoks}
+%    \cw{dimenfirstpart}, a count register, receives the digits, if
+%    any, preceding the decimal point. \cw{dimentoks}, a token
+%    register, receives any digits after the decimal point.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcount\dimenfirstpart
+\newtoks\dimentoks
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\scandimen}
+%
+%    \cw{scandimen} is similar to \cw{scanint} but has to call some
+%    auxiliary functions to scan the various subcomponents of a
+%    dimension (leading digits, decimal point, fractional part, and
+%    units, with optional {\tt true}, in addition to the sign). The
+%    minimum requirements of \tex/'s syntax for dimensions are a digit
+%    or decimal point \qc{\+} the units; all the other components are
+%    optional (\TB, Exercise~10.3, p.~58).
+%
+%    When scanning for the digits of a fractional part, we can't throw
+%    away leading zeros; therefore we don't read the fractional part
+%    into a count register as we did for the digits before the decimal
+%    point; instead we read the digits one by one and store them in
+%    \cw{dimentoks}.
+%
+%    The function that calls \cw{scandimen} should initialize
+%    \cw{scansign@} to \cw{@empty}, \cw{dimenfirstpart} to \cw{z@},
+%    \cw{dimentoks} to empty \verb'{}', and \cw{dimentrue@} to
+%    \cw{@empty}.
+%
+%    Test values: {\tt 0pt}, {\tt 1.1in}, {\tt -2cm}, {\tt .3mm}, {\tt
+%    0.4dd}, {\tt 5.cc}, {\tt.10000000009pc}, \cw{hsize}, {\tt em}.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\scandimen#1{%
+  \ifodd 0#11
+    \def\@tempa{\def\@tempa{\scandimenb}%
+      \afterassignment\@tempa
+      \dimenfirstpart#1}%
+  \else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    The following test resolves to true if \arg{1} is either a period
+%    or a comma (both recognized by \tex/ as decimal point
+%    characters).
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \if \if,#1.\else#1\fi.%
+      \def\@tempa{\scandimenc}%
+    \else
+      \if -#1% then flipflop the sign
+        \edef\scansign@{%
+          \ifx\@empty\scansign@ -\fi}%
+        \def\@tempa{\scandimen}%
+      \else
+        \if +#1% then ignore it
+          \def\@tempa{\scandimen}%
+        \else % not a valid dimen
+          \def\@tempa{%
+            \scanresult@=-\maxdimen\endscan}%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi
+  \@tempa
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\scandimenb}
+%
+%    Scan for an optional decimal point.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\scandimenb#1{%
+  \if \if,#1.\else#1\fi.%
+    \def\@tempa{\scandimenc}%
+  \else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    If the decimal point is absent, we need to put back \arg{2} and
+%    rescan it to see if it is the first letter of the units.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \def\@tempa{\scanunitsa#1}%
+  \fi
+  \@tempa
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\scandimenc}
+%
+%    Scan for the fractional part: digits after the decimal point.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\scandimenc#1{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    If \arg{1} is a digit, add it to \cw{dimentoks}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \ifodd 0#11 \dimentoks\xp@{%
+      \the\dimentoks#1}%
+    \def\@tempa{\scandimenc}%
+  \else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Otherwise rescan \arg{1}, presumably the first letter of the
+%    units.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \def\@tempa{\scanunitsa#1}%
+  \fi
+  \@tempa
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\scanunitsa}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\scanunitsa#1\endscan{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Check for \verb'true' qualifier.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \def\@tempa##1true##2##3\@tempa{##2}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    The peculiar nature of \cw{lowercase} is evident here as we are
+%    able to apply it to only the test part of the conditional without
+%    running into brace-matching problems. (Compare the braces in this
+%    example to something like \cw{message}\qc{\{}\cw{iffalse}
+%    \verb"A}"\cw{else} \verb"B}"\cw{fi}.)
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \lowercase{%
+    \xp@\ifx\xp@\end
+    \@tempa#1true\end\@tempa
+  }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    No \verb'true' was found:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \let\dimentrue@\@empty
+    \def\@tempa{\scanunitsb#1\endscan}%
+  \else
+    \def\dimentrue@{true}%
+    \def\@tempa##1true##2\@tempa{%
+      \def\@tempa{##1}%
+      \ifx\@tempa\@empty
+        \def\@tempa{\scanunitsb##2\endscan}%
+      \else
+        \def\@tempa{\scanunitsb xx\endscan}%
+      \fi}%
+    \@tempa#1\@tempa
+  \fi
+  \@tempa
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\scanunitsb}
+%
+%    Scan for the name of the units and complete the assignment of the
+%    scanned value to \cw{scanresult@}. Notice that, because of the way
+%    \cw{scanunitsb} picks up \arg{1} and \arg{2} as macro arguments,
+%    \verb"p t" is allowed as a variation of \verb"pt". Eliminating
+%    this permissiveness doesn't seem worth the speed penalty
+%    that would be incurred in \cw{scanunitsb}.
+%
+%    The method for detecting a valid units string is to define the
+%    scratch function \cw{@tempa} to apply \tex/'s parameter-matching
+%    abilities to a special string that will yield a boolean value
+%    of true if and only if the given string is a valid \tex/ unit.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\scanunitsb#1#2{%
+  \def\@tempa##1#1#2##2##3\@nil{##2}%
+  \def\@tempb##1{T\@tempa
+    pcTptTcmTccTemTexTinTmmTddTspT##1F\@nil}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Force lowercase just in case the units were entered with
+%    uppercase letters (accepted by \tex/, so we had better accept
+%    uppercase also).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \lowercase{%
+  \if\@tempb{#1#2}%
+  }%
+   \scanresult@=\scansign@
+     \number\dimenfirstpart.\the\dimentoks
+     \dimentrue@#1#2\relax
+  \else
+    \scanresult@=-\maxdimen
+  \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Call \cw{endscan} to gobble garbage tokens, if any.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \endscan
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\checkdimen}
+%
+%    Argument \arg{2} must be a dimen register; \arg{1} is expected to
+%    be a macro holding zero or more arbitrary characters of category 11
+%    or 12.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\checkdimen#1#2{%
+  \let\scansign@\@empty \def\scanresult@{#2}%
+  \let\dimentrue@\@empty
+  \dimenfirstpart\z@ \dimentoks{}%
+  \xp@\scandimen#1xx\endscan
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%    Finish up.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\restorecatcodes
+\endinput
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \CheckSum{858}
+% \Finale
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/dialogl/dialogl.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/dialogl/dialogl.ins
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..91fe3beaf7e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/dialogl/dialogl.ins
@@ -0,0 +1,92 @@
+% Copyright 1994 Michael John Downes
+% Copyright 2013 TeX Users Group
+% This file is part of the dialogl package, released under the LPPL.
+%
+%% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1
+%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+%% The latest version of this license is in
+%%   http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%%
+%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "unmaintained".
+%% 
+%% The list of all files belonging to the distribution is
+%% given in the file `manifest.txt'. 
+%%
+%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution 
+%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with 
+%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}%
+\def\batchfile{dialogl.ins}
+\input docstrip.tex
+
+\keepsilent
+\askforoverwritefalse
+
+\preamble
+This is a generated file.
+
+Copyright 1994 Michael John Downes
+Copyright 2013 TeX Users Group.
+
+It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1
+of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+The latest version of this license is in
+   http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+version 2003/12/01 or later.
+
+This file has the LPPL maintenance status "unmaintained".
+
+The list of all files belonging to the distribution is given in the file
+`manifest.txt'.
+
+The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution 
+and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with 
+extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+\endpreamble
+
+%    Fix up catcodes of the upper 128 characters just in case someone
+%    has an early release of LaTeX2e. (pre June 1994 patch-level 2)
+{\makeatletter
+\def\do{\global\catcode\count@\@tempa \advance\count@\@ne
+  \ifnum\count@>\@cclv \expandafter\@gobble\fi \do}%
+\count@=128 \chardef\@tempa=12 \do}
+
+\csname newtoks\endcsname\filesmsg
+\def\dofile#1#2#3{\generateFile{#1}{t}{\from{#2}{#3}}%
+  \filesmsg\expandafter{\the\filesmsg \Msg{* \space\space#1}}}
+
+\dofile{dialog.sty}{dialogl.dtx}{2e}
+\dofile{menus.sty}{menus.dtx}{2e}
+\dofile{grabhedr.sty}{grabhedr.dtx}{2e}
+%    listout.tex incorporates copies of grabhedr.sty, dialog.sty,
+%    menus.sty with certain inconvenient lines removed, so that a single
+%    version of listout.tex will run equally well under plain TeX, LaTeX
+%    209, or LaTeX2e. (And it runs slightly faster as it doesn't need to
+%    find those files at run-time).
+\generateFile{listout.tex}{t}{%
+  \from{grabhedr.dtx}{}%
+  \from{dialogl.dtx}{}%
+  \from{menus.dtx}{}%
+  \from{listout.dtx}{}%
+}%
+\filesmsg\expandafter{\the\filesmsg \Msg{* \space\space listout.tex}}
+
+\ifToplevel{
+\Msg{******************************************************************}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* To finish the installation you need to move the following files}
+\Msg{* to a LaTeX input files area (the name of this area will vary}
+\Msg{* depending on your system):}
+\Msg{*}
+\the\filesmsg
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{******************************************************************}
+}
+
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/dialogl/grabhedr.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/dialogl/grabhedr.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..8feaf337342
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/dialogl/grabhedr.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,513 @@
+%%% ====================================================================
+%%%  @LaTeX-style-file{
+%%%     filename        = "grabhedr.dtx",
+%%%     version         = "1.99a",
+%%%     date            = "2013/01/24",
+%%%     author          = "Michael Downes",
+%%%     copyright       = "This file is part of the dialogl package, released
+%%%                        under the LPPL; see dialogl.ins for details."
+%%%     keywords        = "TeX, file header,
+%%%     supported       = "no",
+%%%     abstract        = "This file defines a macro \inputfwh
+%%%       to be used instead of \input, to allow TeX to grab
+%%%       information from standardized file headers in the form
+%%%       proposed by Nelson Beebe during his term as president of the
+%%%       TeX Users Group. Of which all this here is an example.",
+%%%  }
+%%% ====================================================================
+%
+% \iffalse
+%<*driver>
+\input{dia-driv.tex}
+%</driver>
+% \fi
+%
+% \section{Introduction}
+%    This file defines a function \cw{inputfwh} to be used instead of
+%    \cw{input}, to allow \tex/ to grab information from standardized
+%    file headers in the form proposed by Nelson Beebe during his term
+%    as president of the \tex/ Users Group. Usage:
+%\begin{usage}
+%\inputfwh{file.nam}
+%\end{usage}
+%    Functions \cw{localcatcodes} and \cw{restorecatcodes} for
+%    managing catcode changes are also defined herein, as well as a
+%    handful of utility functions, many of them borrowed from
+%    \fn{latex.tex}: \cw{@empty}, \cw{@gobble}, \cw{@gobbletwo},
+%    \cw{@car}, \cw{@@input}, \cw{toks@}, \cw{afterfi},
+%    \cw{fileversiondate}, \cw{trap.input}.
+%
+%    The use of \cw{inputfwh}, \cw{fileversiondate}, and
+%    \cw{trap.input} as illustrated in \fn{dialog.sty} is cumbersome
+%    klugery that in fact would better be handled by appropriate
+%    functionality built into the format file. But none of the major
+%    formats have anything along these lines yet. (It would also help
+%    if \tex/ made the current input file name accessible, like
+%    \cw{inputlineno}.)
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+%
+% \section{Implementation}
+%    Standard package identification:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2e>
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+\ProvidesPackage{grabhedr}[1994/11/08 v0.9j]
+%</2e>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    By enclosing this entire file in a group, saving and restoring
+%    catcodes `by hand' is rendered unnecessary. This is perhaps the
+%    best way to locally change catcodes, better than the
+%    \cw{localcatcodes} function defined below. But it tends to be
+%    inconvenient for the \tex/ programmer: every time you add
+%    something you have to remember to make it global; if you're like
+%    me, you end up making every change twice, with an abortive test
+%    run of \tex/ in between, in which you discover that a certain
+%    control sequence is undefined because you didn't assign it
+%    globally. (Using \cw{globaldefs} = 1 is dangerous in my experience;
+%    you have to take care not to accidentally change any variables that
+%    you don't want to be changed globally.)
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\begingroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Inside this group, enforce normal catcodes. All definitions must
+%    be global in order to persist beyond the \cw{endgroup}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\catcode96 12 % left quote
+\catcode`\= 12
+\catcode`\{=1 \catcode`\}=2 \catcode`\#=6
+\catcode`\$=3 \catcode`\~=13 \catcode`\^=7
+\catcode`\_=8 \catcode`\^^M=5 \catcode`\"=12
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Make \qc{\@} a letter for use in `private' control sequences.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\catcode`\@=11
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{Preliminaries}
+%    For \cw{@empty}, \cw{@gobble}, \ldots{} we use the \latex/ names so
+%    that if \fn{grabhedr.sty} is used with \latex/ we won't waste hash
+%    table and string pool space.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@empty}
+%    Empty macro, for \cw{ifx} tests or initialization of variables.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\@empty{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@gobble}
+% \begin{macro}{\@gobbletwo}
+% \begin{macro}{\@gobblethree}
+%    Functions for gobbling unwanted tokens.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\long\gdef\@gobble#1{}
+\long\gdef\@gobbletwo#1#2{}
+\long\gdef\@gobblethree#1#2#3{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@car}
+%    The function \cw{@car}, though not really needed by
+%    \fn{grabhedr.sty}, is needed by the principal customers of
+%    \fn{grabhedr.sty} (e.g., \fn{dialog.sty}).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\long\gdef\@car#1#2\@nil{#1}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@input}
+%    To define \cw{@@input} as in \latex/ we want to let it equal to
+%    the primitive \cw{input}. But if a \latex/ format is being used
+%    we don't want to execute that assignment because by now
+%    \cw{input} has changed its meaning. And if some other format is
+%    being used it behooves us to check, before defining \cw{@@input},
+%    whether \cw{input} still has its primitive meaning. Otherwise
+%    there's a good chance \cw{inputfwh} will fail to work properly.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\ifx\UndEFiNed\@@input % LaTeX not loaded.
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    This code shows a fairly easy way to check whether the meaning of a
+%    primitive control sequence is still the original meaning.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \edef\0{\meaning\input}\edef\1{\string\input}%
+  \ifx\0\1%
+    \global\let\@@input\input
+  \else
+    \errhelp{%
+Grabhedr.sty needs to know the name of the
+\input primitive in order to define \inputfwh
+properly. Consult a TeXnician for help.}
+    \errmessage{%
+      Non-primitive \noexpand\input detected}%
+  \fi
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\toks@}
+%    Scratch token register.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\global\toksdef\toks@=0
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\afterfi}
+%    Sonja Maus's function for throwing code over the \cw{fi} (``An
+%    Expansion Power Lemma'', \TUB{} vol 12 no 2 June 1991). (Except
+%    that she called this function \cw{beforefi}.)
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\long\gdef\afterfi#1\fi{\fi#1}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\nx@}
+%    We will be using \cw{noexpand} a lot; this abbreviation improves
+%    the readability of the code.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\global\let\nx@\noexpand
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\xp@}
+%    Another convenient abbreviation.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\global\let\xp@\expandafter
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Reading standard file headers}
+%    The function \cw{inputfwh} (`input file with header') inputs
+%    the given file, checking first to see if it starts with a
+%    standardized file header; if so, the filename, version and date
+%    are scanned for and stored in a control sequence.
+%
+%    For maximum robustness, we strive to rely on the fewest possible
+%    assumptions about what the file that is about to be input might
+%    contain.
+%
+%    Assumption 1: Percent character \qc{\%} has category 14. I.e., if
+%    the first line of the file to be input starts with \qc{\%}, it is
+%    OK to throw away that line.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@percentchar}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\begingroup \lccode`\.=`\%%
+\lowercase{\gdef\@percentchar{.}}%
+\endgroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\fileversiondate}
+%    The function \cw{fileversiondate} is not only a useful support
+%    function for \cw{inputfwh}, it can also be used by itself at the
+%    beginning of a file to set file name, version, and date correctly
+%    even if the file is input by some means other than
+%    \cw{inputfwh}\Dash assuming that the arguments of the
+%    \cw{fileversiondate} command are kept properly up to date.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\fileversiondate#1#2#3{%
+  \xp@\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{#2 (#3)}%
+  \def\filename{#1}\def\fileversion{#2}%
+  \def\filedate{#3}%
+  \message{#1 \csname#1\endcsname}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    And now apply \cw{fileversiondate} to this file.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*209>
+\fileversiondate{grabhedr.sty}{0.9j}{1994/11/08}
+%</209>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@filehdrstart}
+%    \fn{filehdr.el} by default adds a string of equal signs (with an
+%    initial comment prefix) at the very top of a file header. This
+%    string must be scanned away first before we can start looking for
+%    the real information of the file header.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\xdef\@filehdrstart{%
+  \@percentchar\@percentchar\@percentchar\space
+  ==================================%
+  ==================================}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@scanfileheader}
+%    The purpose of this function is just to scan up to the opening
+%    brace that marks the beginning of the file header body.
+%    Everything before that is ignored, not needed for our present
+%    purposes.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\@scanfileheader#1@#2#{\@xscanfileheader}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@xscanfileheader}
+%    Throw in some dummy values of version and date at the end so that
+%    all we require from a file header is that the filename field must
+%    be present.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\long\gdef\@xscanfileheader#1{%
+  \@yscanfileheader#1{} version = "??",
+  date = "??",\@yscanfileheader}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@yscanfileheader}
+%    This function assumes that filename, version, and date of a file
+%    are listed in that order (but not necessarily adjacent). It's
+%    possible for the version and date to be missing, or out of order,
+%    but the corresponding \tex/ variables \cw{fileversion} and
+%    \cw{filedate} will not get set properly unless the order is:
+%    filename, [\ldots,] version, [\ldots,] date. Trying to handle
+%    different orderings would be desirable but I haven't yet been
+%    struck by a suitable flash of insight on how to do it without
+%    grubby, time-consuming picking apart of the entire file header.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\long\gdef\@yscanfileheader
+  #1 filename = "#2",#3 version = "#4",%
+  #5 date = "#6",#7\@yscanfileheader{%
+  \endgroup
+  \csname fileversiondate\endcsname{#2}{#4}{#6}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@readfirstheaderline}
+%    This function has to look at the first line of the file to see if
+%    it has the expected form for the first line of a file header.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\begingroup
+\lccode`\$=`\^^M
+\lowercase{\gdef\@readfirstheaderline#1$}{%
+  \toks@{#1}%
+  \edef\@tempa{\@percentchar\the\toks@}%
+  \ifx\@tempa\@filehdrstart
+    \endgroup \begingroup
+    \catcode`\%=9 \catcode`\^^M=5 \catcode`\@=11
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Double quote and equals sign need to be category 12 in order for
+%    the parameter matching of \cw{@xscanfileheader} to work, and
+%    space needs its normal catcode of 10.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \catcode`\ =10 \catcode`\==12 \catcode`\"=12
+  \xp@\@scanfileheader
+  \else
+    \message{(* Missing file header? *)}%
+    \afterfi\endgroup
+  \fi}
+\endgroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@xinputfwh}
+%    An auxiliary function.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\@xinputfwh{%
+  \ifx\next\@readfirstheaderline
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Sanitize a few characters. Otherwise an unmatched brace or other
+%    special character might cause a problem in the process of reading
+%    the first line as a macro argument.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \catcode`\%=12 \catcode`\{=12 \catcode`\}=12
+    \catcode`\\=12 \catcode`\^^L=12
+    \catcode`\^=12
+%    Unique terminator token for the first line.
+    \catcode`\^^M=3\relax
+  \else \endgroup\fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@inputfwh}
+%    Auxiliary function, carries out the necessary \cw{futurelet}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\@inputfwh{\futurelet\next\@xinputfwh}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\inputfwh}
+%    Strategy for (almost) bulletproof reading of the first line of
+%    the input file is like this: Give the percent sign a special
+%    catcode, then use \cw{futurelet} to freeze the catcode of the
+%    first token in the input file. If the first token is {\em not\/}
+%    a percent character, then fine, just close the group wherein the
+%    percent character had its special catcode, and proceed with
+%    normal input; the first token will have its proper catcode
+%    because we did not change anything except the percent  character.
+%    Otherwise, we still proceed with `normal' input execution, but by
+%    making \qc{\%} active and defining it suitably, we can carry out
+%    further tests to see if the first file line has the expected form
+%    (three percent signs plus lots of equal signs).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\inputfwh#1{%
+  \begingroup\catcode`\%=\active
+  \endlinechar`\^^M\relax
+  \lccode`\~=`\%\relax
+  \lowercase{\let~}\@readfirstheaderline
+  \xp@\@inputfwh\@@input #1\relax
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Managing catcode changes}
+%
+%    A survey of other methods for saving and restoring catcodes would
+%    be more work than I have time for at the moment. The method
+%    given here is the best one I know (other methods use up one extra
+%    control sequence name per file, or don't robustly
+%    handle multiple levels of file nesting).
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\localcatcodes}
+%    The \cw{localcatcodes} function changes catcodes according to the
+%    character/catcode pairs given in its argument, saving the
+%    previous catcode values of those characters on a stack so that
+%    they can be retrieved later with \cw{restorecatcodes}. Example:
+%\begin{usage}
+%\localcatcodes{\@{11}\"\active}
+%\end{usage}
+%    to change the catcode of \cs{\@} to 11 (letter) and the catcode
+%    of \qc{\"} to 13 (active). In \plaintex/ you'd better be careful
+%    to use \qc{\+} instead of \cs{\+} in the argument of
+%    \cw{localcatcodes} because of the outerness of \cs{\+}.
+%
+%    This function works by using token registers 0 and 4
+%    to accumulate catcode assignment statements: in \cw{toks0} we put
+%    the statements necessary to restore catcodes to their previous
+%    values, while in \cw{toks 4} we put the statements necessary to
+%    set catcodes to their new values.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\localcatcodes#1{%
+  \ifx\@empty\@catcodestack
+    \gdef\@catcodestack{{}}%
+  \fi
+  \def\do##1##2{%
+    \ifnum##2>\z@
+      \catcode\number`##1 \space
+      \number\catcode`##1\relax
+    \expandafter\do\fi}%
+  \xdef\@catcodestack{{\do#1\relax\m@ne}%
+    \@catcodestack}%
+  \def\do##1##2{\catcode`##1 ##2\relax\do}%
+  \do#1\ {\catcode32\let\do}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@catcodestack}
+%    Init the stack with an empty element; otherwise popping the
+%    next-to-last element would wrongly remove braces from the last
+%    element. But as a matter of fact we could just as well initialize
+%    \cw{@catcodestack} to empty because \cw{localcatcodes} is careful
+%    to add an empty final element if necessary.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\@catcodestack{{}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\restorecatcodes}
+%    The function \cw{restorecatcodes} has to pop the stack and
+%    execute the popped code.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\restorecatcodes{%
+  \begingroup
+  \ifx\@empty\@catcodestack
+    \errmessage{Can't pop catcodes;
+      \nx@\@catcodestack = empty}%
+    \endgroup
+  \else
+    \def\do##1##2\do{%
+      \gdef\@catcodestack{##2}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Notice the placement of \arg{1} after the \cw{endgroup}, so that
+%    the catcode assignments are local assignments.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+      \endgroup##1}%
+    \xp@\do\@catcodestack\do
+  \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Trapping redundant input statements}
+%    The utility \fn{listout.tex} calls \fn{menus.sty}, which calls
+%    \fn{dialog.sty}, and all three of these files start by loading
+%    \fn{grabhedr.sty} in order to take advantage of its functions
+%    \cw{fileversiondate}, \cw{localcatcodes}, and \cw{inputfwh}. But
+%    consequently, when \fn{listout.tex} is used there will be two
+%    redundant attempts to load \fn{grabhedr.sty}. The straightforward
+%    way to avoid the redundant input attempts would be to surround
+%    them with an \cw{ifx} test:
+%
+%^^V \ifx\undefined\fileversiondate
+%^^V   \input grabhedr.sty \relax
+%^^V   \fileversiondate{foo.bar}{0.9e}{10-Jun-1993}
+%^^V \fi
+%
+%    This method has a few drawbacks, however: (1)~the conditional
+%    remains open throughout the processing of everything in
+%    \fn{grabhedr.sty} and the \cw{fileversiondate} statement, which
+%    makes any \cw{else} or \cw{fi} mismatch problems harder to debug;
+%    (2)~if \cw{undefined} becomes accidentally defined the \cw{ifx}
+%    test will fail; (3)~choosing the right control sequence to test
+%    against \cw{undefined} requires a little care.
+%
+%    In a situation where we know that the file to be input has had
+%    \cw{fileversiondate} applied to it, if it was already input, then
+%    we have a failsafe control sequence that we can test to find out
+%    whether the file has already been input\Dash the name
+%    of the file. Assuming a standard form for the input statement
+%    (one that will work with either plain \tex/ or \latex/, and makes
+%    as few assumptions as possible), we can write a function that
+%    will trap input statements and execute them only if the given
+%    file has not yet been loaded:
+%
+%^^V \csname trap.input\endcsname
+%^^V \input grabhedr.sty \relax
+%^^V \fileversiondate{foo.bar}{1.2}{1993-Jun-07}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\trap.input}
+%    The function \cw{trap.input} scans for an input statement in
+%    canonical form and executes it if and only if the file has not yet
+%    been input (more precisely, if the control sequence consisting of
+%    the file name is undefined, which means that it has not had
+%    \cw{fileversiondate} applied to it). The canonical form
+%    that I consider to be the best is \cw{input} \meta{full file
+%    name}{\tt\char32 }\cw{relax}. Having the \cw{relax} means that the
+%    input statement will not try to expand beyond the end of the line
+%    if \cw{endlinechar} is catcoded to 9 (ignore), as is done rather
+%    frequently now by progressive \tex/ programmers. The \cw{relax}
+%    would ordinarily render the space after the file name unnecessary,
+%    but I prefer leaving the space in to avoid interfering with
+%    redefinitions of \cw{input} to take a space-delimited argument
+%    that are occasionally done to achieve other special effects (see,
+%    for example, ``Organizing a large collection of stylefiles'', by
+%    Angelika Binding, {\sl Cahiers GUTenberg}, num\'ero 10--11,
+%    septembre 1991, p.~175.) \latex/'s argument form
+%    \cw{input}\verb"{...}" cannot, unfortunately, be the
+%    canonical form if \plaintex/ compatibility is required.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\expandafter\gdef\csname trap.input\endcsname
+  \input#1 \relax{%
+    \expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax
+      \afterfi\inputfwh{#1}\relax
+    \fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%    End the group that encloses this entire file, and then call
+%    \cw{endinput}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\endgroup
+\endinput
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \CheckSum{294}
+% \Finale
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/dialogl/listout.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/dialogl/listout.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..fe31daa54e3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/dialogl/listout.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,5061 @@
+%%% ====================================================================
+%%%  @TeX-file{
+%%%     filename        = "listout.dtx",
+%%%     version         = "1.99a",
+%%%     date            = "2013/01/24",
+%%%     author          = "Michael Downes",
+%%%     copyright       = "This file is part of the dialogl package, released
+%%%                        under the LPPL; see dialogl.ins for details."
+%%%     keywords        = "tex, verbatim",
+%%%     abstract        = "The purpose of this macro file is to print
+%%%       verbatim listings of arbitrary text files, fitting as much
+%%%       text per sheet of paper as possible. The default settings
+%%%       are for US letter size paper 8.5 x 11 inches, two `pages'
+%%%       per sheet, landscape mode, but extensive customization
+%%%       facilities are provided. To conserve even more paper, you
+%%%       should take advantage of any two-sided capabilities your
+%%%       printer may happen to have.",
+%%%  }
+%%% ====================================================================
+%
+% \iffalse
+%<*driver>
+\documentstyle[doc,dialogl-doc]{article}
+\title{Verbatim file printing: {\tt listout.tex}}
+\author{Michael Downes}
+\def\PrintMacroName#1{}
+\setlength{\MacroTopsep}{\MacrocodeTopsep}
+\setlength{\MacroIndent}{0pt}
+\def\MacroFont{\Vbtmfont}% doc.sty uses \MacroFont
+\DontCheckModules
+\multicoldefaultlayout
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+\begin{multicols}{2}
+\hDocInput{listout.dtx}
+\end{multicols}
+\ifdim\textwidth>\textheight
+\typeout{^^JWarning: remember to print using LANDSCAPE orientation^^J}
+\fi
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+%\fi
+%
+%^^A Actual code lines are broken up to be 50 characters or less in
+%^^A order to fit within narrow column widths in two-column style.
+%
+% \section*{Introduction}
+%
+%    The tool \fn{listout.tex} has two purposes:
+%
+%    (1)~Verbatim printing of text files such as
+%    e-\unpenalty mail, \tex/ log files, \tex/ macro files, or other
+%    programming source code or, in general, any \ascii/ text, with
+%    certain nice features that most printers and printer drivers
+%    lack: reasonably good, and somewhat customizable, handling of tab
+%    characters or other nonprinting characters; highly customizable
+%    handling of overlong lines; absolute control over margins, number
+%    of columns, intercolumn space, and line spacing; optional line
+%    numbering; customizable running heads and running feet; not to
+%    mention a few other things.
+%
+%    (2)~To serve as a proving ground for ideas and functions from
+%    \fn{dialog.sty} and \fn{menus.sty}. \fn{Listout.tex} uses
+%    \fn{menus.sty} to present an elaborate menu system for changing
+%    options (like font size, line spacing, or how many spaces should
+%    be printed for a tab character).
+%
+%    \fn{Listout} was originally written for \plaintex/. It seems to
+%    work with \latex/ as well in the limited tests that I have done.
+%
+%^^A Use of \latex/ would require among other
+%^^A things the following adjustments: Use \cs{c@page} instead of
+%^^A \cs{pageno}; (nfss2) load math fonts and do other
+%^^A \begin{document} processing.
+%
+%    \fn{Listout} is a part of a package that goes by the name of
+%    {\bf dialogl}, which also includes the aforementioned
+%    \fn{dialog.sty} and \fn{menus.sty}. The {\bf dialogl} package is
+%    available on the Internet by anonymous ftp from {\sc ctan}
+%    (Comprehensive \tex/ Archive Network), \eg., \fn{ftp.shsu.edu}
+%    (USA), or \fn{ftp.dante.de} (Europe).
+%
+%    For maximum portability, \fn{listout} uses in its menus only
+%    lowest-common-denominator ordinary printable \ascii/ characters
+%    in the range 32\ndash 126.
+%
+%    Normal usage:
+%
+%^^V tex listout
+%
+%    You will be prompted for the names of the files to be printed. But
+%    first, you will be offered a chance to enter the \fn{listout} menu
+%    system, which allows you to change options interactively at
+%    run-time. (If you want to save a set of option settings for later
+%    re-use, see selection \qc{\E} in the main menu.)
+%
+%    \subsection*{Notation}
+%
+%    Double-hat notation such as \verb'^^J' is used in this article
+%    for control characters, as in \texbook/. A couple of
+%    abbreviations from \fn{grabhedr.sty} are used frequently in the
+%    macro code: \cw{xp@} = \cw{expandafter}, and \cw{nx@} =
+%    \cw{noexpand}. Standard abbreviations from \fn{plain.tex} such as
+%    \cw{z@} or \cw{toks@} are used without special comment.
+%
+%    In the beginning \fn{listout.tex} was written without any private
+%    control sequences. Eventually avoiding the use of private control
+%    sequences became too inconvenient so I abandoned that restriction.
+%    If it were redone from scratch I would privatize many of the
+%    control sequences defined here to better support the future
+%    possibility of using \fn{listout.tex} within arbitrary documents
+%    where name conflicts might arise.
+%
+% \section{Preliminaries}
+%    We begin by loading \fn{menus.sty}. As a matter of fact we won't
+%    really input the file: The following few lines are for information
+%    only, they will replaced by the contents of \fn{menus.sty} (and the
+%    subordinate files \fn{dialog.sty} and \fn{grabhedr.sty} during the
+%    generation of the executable file by docstrip. The reason is mainly
+%    to make it possible to have a single version of \fn{listout.tex}
+%    that runs under plain \tex/, \latex/ 2.09, and \latex/2e, but also
+%    (a little bit) to avoid the speed cost of searching for input files
+%    at run-time.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*ignore>
+\inputfwh{menus.sty}
+\fileversiondate{listout.tex}{1.4r}{1994/12/02}
+\ProvidesFile{listout.tex}[1994/11/10 v1.4r]
+%</ignore>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \mjd{Check if more catcodes must be added here:}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\localcatcodes{\@{11}\~{13}\"{12}\:{12}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{Miscellaneous utility functions}
+%
+%    The file \fn{dialog.sty} (called by \fn{menus.sty}) defines
+%    \cw{actively}, \cw{afterfi}, \cw{controlchars}, and
+%    \cw{otherchars}.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\xmeaning}
+%    \cw{xmeaning} is a useful tool to convert the contents of a macro
+%    to all category 12 characters. This is applied to filenames when
+%    printing them to prevent problems from special characters such as
+%    \qc{\$} or \qc{\_} that might occur in a file name.
+%
+%    The argument \qarg{1} should be a macro.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\xmeaning#1{\xp@\xmeaningtrim\meaning#1}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\xmeaningtrim}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\xmeaningtrim#1->{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\TRUE}
+% \begin{macro}{\FALSE}
+%    \cw{TRUE} and \cw{FALSE} are Boolean constants. After
+%    \cw{let}\cw{sometest}\qc{\=}\cw{TRUE}, the variable \cw{sometest}
+%    can be used with \cw{if}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\TRUE{TT}
+\def\FALSE{TF}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@empty}
+% \begin{macro}{\@iden}
+%    Borrow a couple of things from \latex/.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@empty{}
+\def\@iden#1{#1}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \section{Date and time}
+%
+%    Some macros to help construct various date options.
+% \begin{macro}{\datesepchar}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\datesepchar{ }
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\keepleadingzeros}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\keepleadingzeros\FALSE
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\twodigits}
+%    \cw{twodigits} adds a leading zero to a number if the number is
+%    less than 10. The \cw{expandafter} and \cw{ident} are to stop the
+%    scanning of \cw{number} so that something like
+%    \cw{twodigits}\verb'{35}' will not gobble a following space. (When
+%    the argument of \cw{twodigits} is a count register or similar
+%    complete integer according to \tex/'s scanning rules, this
+%    precaution is superfluous.)
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\twodigits#1{\ifnum#1<10 0\fi
+  \xp@\@iden\xp@{\number#1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\themonth}
+% \begin{macro}{\theday}
+%    \cw{themonth}, \cw{theday}, and similar macros must be
+%    reinitialized after the \fn{default.los} file is read, in case
+%    the value of \cw{keepleadingzeros} changes.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\edef\themonth{\number\month}
+\edef\theday{\number\day}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\theyear}
+% \begin{macro}{\yearmodC}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\edef\theyear{\number\year}
+\edef\yearmodC{\xp@\@gobbletwo\number\year}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\Jan}\begin{macro}{\Feb}\begin{macro}{\Mar}
+% \begin{macro}{\Apr}\begin{macro}{\May}\begin{macro}{\Jun}
+% \begin{macro}{\Jul}\begin{macro}{\Aug}\begin{macro}{\Sep}
+% \begin{macro}{\Oct}\begin{macro}{\Nov}\begin{macro}{\Dec}
+%    Month names. The default names are in English because that's this
+%    author's native language. Month names for other languages are not
+%    currently provided, perhaps in some future version. However
+%    alternate names can be gotten by hand editing the \fn{.los} file
+%    (`listout option settings') to change the definitions of
+%    \cw{Jan}, \cw{Feb}, etc. \begin{macrocode}
+\def\Jan{January}   \def\Feb{February}
+\def\Mar{March}     \def\Apr{April}
+\def\May{May}       \def\Jun{June}
+\def\Jul{July}      \def\Aug{August}
+\def\Sep{September} \def\Oct{October}
+\def\Nov{November}  \def\Dec{December}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\datesetup}
+%    Define \cw{monthname}, \cw{themon}, \cw{theMON} using the
+%    value of \cw{month}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\datesetup{%
+  \edef\themonthname{%
+    \ifcase\month ?% case 0---THIS CAN'T HAPPEN
+    \or\Jan\or\Feb\or\Mar\or\Apr\or\May\or\Jun
+    \or\Jul\or\Aug\or\Sep\or\Oct\or\Nov\or\Dec
+    \else ?\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Construct three-letter abbreviations.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \def\do##1##2##3##4\od{##1##2##3}%
+  \edef\themon{\xp@\do\themonthname\od}%
+  \let\theMON\themon \changecase\uppercase\theMON
+  \if\keepleadingzeros
+    \edef\themonth{\twodigits\month}%
+    \edef\theday{\twodigits\day}%
+  \else
+    \edef\themonth{\number\month}%
+    \edef\theday{\number\day}%
+  \fi
+}
+\datesetup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\dateA}
+%    Date form A: 1992-09-09. The hyphen can be changed to some other
+%    character by modifying \cw{datesepchar}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\dateA{%
+  \theyear\datesepchar\themonth\datesepchar\theday}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\dateB}
+%    Date form B: 92-09-09
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\dateB{%
+  \yearmodC\datesepchar\themonth\datesepchar\theday}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\dateC}
+%    Date form C: 09-09-92. This one is ambiguous. Since the author is
+%    United-Statesian, let's go with the U.S. convention of month
+%    first.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\dateC{%
+  \themonth\datesepchar\theday\datesepchar\yearmodC}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\dateD}
+%    Date form D: 09-09-1992
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\dateD{%
+  \themonth\datesepchar\theday\datesepchar\theyear}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\dateE}
+%    Date form E: 09-Sep-92
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\dateE{%
+  \theday\datesepchar\themon\datesepchar\yearmodC}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\dateF}
+%    Date form F: 09-Sep-1992
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\dateF{%
+  \theday\datesepchar\themon\datesepchar\theyear}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\dateG}
+%    Date form G: 09-SEP-92
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\dateG{%
+  \theday\datesepchar\theMON\datesepchar\yearmodC}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\dateH}
+%    Date form H: 09-SEP-1992
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\dateH{%
+  \theday\datesepchar\theMON\datesepchar\theyear}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\dateI}
+%    Date form I: September 9, 1992 (\cw{datesepchar} not used)
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\dateI{%
+  \themonthname\space\number\day, \theyear}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\dateJ}
+%    Date form J: 9 September 1992 (assuming \cw{datesepchar} set to
+%    space).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\dateJ{%
+  \theday\datesepchar\themonthname\datesepchar\theyear}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\todaysdate}
+%    \cw{todaysdate} is assigned with \cw{def} rather than \cw{let} to
+%    facilitate writing out the information to an \fn{.los} file.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\todaysdate{\dateJ}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\thehour}
+%    Create \cw{thehour} holding two-digit number 00\ndash 23, number of
+%    hours from \cw{time}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\count@=\time \divide\count@ 60
+\edef\thehour{\twodigits\count@}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\theminute}
+%    Create \cw{theminute} holding two-digit number 00\ndash 59, number
+%    of minutes from \cw{time} after subtracting $60*\cw{thehour}$.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\multiply\count@ -60 \advance\count@\time
+\edef\theminute{\twodigits\count@}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ampmpunct}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ampmpunct{.}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ampm}
+% \begin{macro}{\thehourmodtwelve}
+%    Define \cw{ampm} to be \verb"a" or \verb"p" (or
+%    \verb"noon"\meta{gobble} or \verb"midnight"\meta{gobble}), and
+%    define \cw{thehourmodtwelve} suitably. Notice that, unlike
+%    \cw{thehour}, \cw{thehourmodtwelve} omits a leading zero.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\count@=\thehour\relax
+\ifnum\count@>11 \def\ampm{p}%
+  \ifnum\count@>12
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Convert hours in the range 13\ndash 23 to the range 1\ndash 11.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \begingroup \advance\count@ -12
+      \aftergroup\edef\aftergroup\thehourmodtwelve
+      \aftergroup{\xp@
+    \endgroup \number\count@}%
+  \else
+    \edef\thehourmodtwelve{12}%
+  \fi
+\else
+  \def\ampm{a}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Hour 0 needs to be translated to 12:?? a.m.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \ifnum\count@=0 \count@=12 \fi
+  \edef\thehourmodtwelve{\number\count@}%
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\AMPM}
+%    Note that \cw{AMPM} should not be written to the \fn{.los} file:
+%    it needs to be recomputed at run-time using the current value of
+%    \cw{time}. The function \cw{changecase} is from \fn{dialog.sty}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\AMPM\ampm \changecase\uppercase\AMPM
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\midnoon}
+%    If the current time is midnight or noon, \cw{midnoon} prints the
+%    appropriate word and gobbles the `a.m.' or `p.m.' string.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\midnoon#1{\ifnum\time=0 midnight\else
+  \ifnum\time=720 noon\else#1\fi\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\timesepchar}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\timesepchar{:}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\timeA}
+%    Time form A: 1947
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\timeA{\thehour\theminute}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\timeB}
+%    Time form B: 19:47
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\timeB{\thehour\timesepchar\theminute}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\timeC}
+%    Time form C: 7:47 pm
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\timeC{\thehourmodtwelve\timesepchar\theminute
+  \space\midnoon{\ampm m}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\timeD}
+%    Time form D: 7:47 p.m.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\timeD{\thehourmodtwelve\timesepchar\theminute
+  \space\midnoon{\ampm\ampmpunct m\ampmpunct}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\timeE}
+%    Time form E: 7:47 PM
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\timeE{\thehourmodtwelve\timesepchar\theminute
+  \space\midnoon{\AMPM M}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\timeF}
+%    Time form F: 7:47 P.M.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\timeF{\thehourmodtwelve\timesepchar\theminute
+  \space\midnoon{\AMPM\ampmpunct M\ampmpunct}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\nowtime}
+%    \cw{nowtime} is assigned with \cw{def} for the same reason as
+%    \cw{todaysdate}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\nowtime{\timeB}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \section{Output routine}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\curcol}
+% \begin{macro}{\totalcols}
+%    \cw{curcol} is a counter to keep track of the current column
+%    number; \cw{totalcols} is a variable that indicates how many
+%    columns are desired.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\chardef\curcol=1
+\chardef\totalcols=2
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\firstpageno}
+% \begin{macro}{\lastpageno}
+%    For multi-column output, a `page' number is associated to each
+%    column. At the time when a running head is attached to a column,
+%    the current `page' number is always \cw{lastpageno}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\countdef\firstpageno=1
+\countdef\lastpageno=2
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\prevcolsbox}
+%    When the number of columns $n$ is greater than 1, columns $1$,
+%    $\ldots$, $n-1$ are accumulated in \cw{prevcolsbox} before being
+%    shipped out.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newbox\prevcolsbox
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\paht}
+% \begin{macro}{\pawd}
+%    Paper height and width.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newdimen\paht \newdimen\pawd
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\fullwd}
+%    The `full width' is the width of all the $n$ columns plus $(n-1)
+%    * \btext{intercolumn}\linebreak[0]\btext{space}$. Normally it is
+%    computed at run time from paper size, number of columns and
+%    intercolumn space.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newdimen\fullwd
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\colwd}
+%    Column width is computed from number of columns, paper size,
+%    margins, and intercolumn space, unless it is explicitly set to a
+%    given width by the user, in which case \cw{fullwd} is computed from
+%    number of columns, column width, and intercolumn space, and a
+%    warning is given if \cw{fullwd} plus the margins exceeds paper
+%    width. In other words, in the system of equations
+% \xdef\restorearraycolsep{\arraycolsep \the\arraycolsep\relax}%
+% \arraycolsep1pt\relax
+% \begin{eqnarray}
+%    \cw{rightmargin} &=& \cw{leftmargin}\label{rl}\\
+%    \cw{fullwd} &=& \cw{paperwd} - \cw{leftmargin}\nonumber\\
+%                     &&{} - \cw{rightmargin}\\
+%    \cw{colwd} &=& \frac{\cw{fullwd}
+%                     + \cw{intercolspace}}{\cw{totalcols}}\nonumber\\
+%                    &&{} - \cw{intercolspace}
+% \end{eqnarray}
+% \restorearraycolsep
+%    the variables on the left-hand side in each equation are the
+%    dependent variables. If the user sets the right margin
+%    explicitly, we delete equation (\ref{rl}) from the system; or if
+%    the user sets column width explicitly, we change the status of
+%    the \cw{colwd} variable from dependent to independent, which may
+%    be thought of as switching to the equations
+% \xdef\restorearraycolsep{\arraycolsep \the\arraycolsep\relax}%
+% \arraycolsep0pt\relax
+% \begin{eqnarray}
+%    \cw{fullwd} &=& ((\cw{colwd} +\cw{intercolspace})\nonumber\\
+%                 && {}\times \cw{totalcols})\nonumber\\
+%                 && {}- \cw{intercolspace}\\
+%    \cw{rightmargin} &=& \cw{paperwd} - \cw{leftmargin}\nonumber\\
+%                      && {}- \cw{fullwd}
+% \end{eqnarray}
+% \restorearraycolsep
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newdimen\colwd
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\dependentcolwd}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\dependentcolwd\TRUE
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\leftmargin}
+% \begin{macro}{\rightmargin}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newdimen\leftmargin
+\newdimen\rightmargin
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\dependentrightmargin}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\dependentrightmargin\TRUE
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\computerfc}
+% \mjd{Maybe change this and related names to computeRFC (caps)?}
+%    Function to find \cw{rightmargin}, \cw{fullwd}, and \cw{colwidth}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\computerfc{\relax \rightmargin=\leftmargin
+  \computefc }
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\computefc}
+%
+%    Find \cw{fullwd} and \cw{colwd} but leave \cw{rightmargin} as is.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\computefc{\fullwd=\pawd
+  \advance\fullwd-\leftmargin
+  \advance\fullwd-\rightmargin
+  \colwd\fullwd
+  \advance\colwd \intercolspace
+  \divide\colwd \totalcols
+  \advance\colwd -\intercolspace
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \cw{columnwidth} is the version of \cw{colwd} reported to the user.
+%    If it is set explicitly, the original form is retained, otherwise a
+%    width value given by the user as `5cm' would be reported as
+%    `142.26378pt'. But here we are computing the column width, so
+%    we do not try to make the raw points value more presentable.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \edef\columnwidth{\the\colwd}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\computefr}
+%
+%    Find \cw{fullwd} and \cw{rightmargin} from a specified column
+%    width.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\computefr{\fullwd\colwd
+  \advance\fullwd \intercolspace
+  \multiply\fullwd \totalcols
+  \advance\fullwd -\intercolspace
+  \rightmargin\pawd
+  \advance\rightmargin-\leftmargin
+  \advance\rightmargin-\fullwd
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\colht}
+%    Unless explicitly set to a given value by the user, bottom margin
+%    and column height are computed from paper size and top margin,
+%    starting with bottom margin = top margin and then rounding the
+%    column height to an integral number of lines (with the usual
+%    adjustment for \cw{topskip}).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newdimen\colht
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\intercolspace}
+% \begin{macro}{\overrun}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newdimen\intercolspace \newdimen\overrun
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\runheadht}
+% \begin{macro}{\runfootht}
+%    \cw{runheadht} is the height of the running head, including space
+%    below it. \cw{runfootht} is similar.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newdimen\runheadht \newdimen\runfootht
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bottommargin}
+% \begin{macro}{\topmargin}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newdimen\bottommargin \newdimen\topmargin
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\computebc}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\computebc{\bottommargin=\topmargin \computec}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\computec}
+% \mjd{Maybe this should be named computeHB (height/bottom)}
+%    This function is called if the user sets a new top or bottom
+%    margin, because in that case we need to recompute \cw{colht} to
+%    compensate.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\computec{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Find $\cw{colht} = \cw{paperht} - \cw{topmargin} -
+%    \cw{bottommargin}$, rounded off to nearest multiple of the line
+%    spacing.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \colht\paht \advance\colht -\topmargin
+  \advance\colht -\bottommargin
+  \advance\colht -\runheadht
+  \advance\colht -\runfootht
+  \roundcolht
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Adjust \cw{bottommargin} to fit with the new \cw{colht}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \bottommargin\paht
+  \advance\bottommargin -\topmargin
+  \advance\bottommargin -\colht
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\roundcolht}
+%    \cw{roundcolht} rounds \cw{colht} to the nearest integer multiple
+%    of the line spacing.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\roundcolht{%
+  \advance\colht .5\baselineskip
+  \divide\colht\baselineskip
+  \edef\columnheight{\number\colht\space lines}%
+  \multiply\colht\baselineskip
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Compensate for \cw{topskip}:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \advance\colht\topskip
+  \advance\colht -\baselineskip
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\dependentcolht}
+% \begin{macro}{\dependentbottommargin}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\dependentcolht\TRUE
+\let\dependentbottommargin\TRUE
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\computeb}
+%    The function \cw{computeb} is called to recompute \cw{colht} and
+%    \cw{bottommargin} if the user gives an explicit value for
+%    \cw{colht}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\computeb{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Round \cw{colht} off to nearest multiple of the line spacing.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \roundcolht
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Adjust \cw{bottommargin} to fit with the new \cw{colht}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \bottommargin\paht
+  \advance\bottommargin -\topmargin
+  \advance\bottommargin -\colht
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\pageno}
+%    If \latex/ is being used, \cw{pageno} will be undefined; we then
+%    provide a suitable definition.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\ifx\UndEFiNed\pageno \countdef\pageno=0 \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\pagenumber}
+%    We retain \cw{pageno} as the number of shipouts (\ie., sheets
+%    of paper, if printing normally). The logical `page' number within
+%    the file being printed, at the time \cw{pagenumber} is called, is
+%    always \cw{lastpageno}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\pagenumber{[\number\pageno]\thinspace{%
+  \csname\pagenumberfont
+    \pagenumberfontsize\endcsname
+  \number\lastpageno}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\landscape}
+%    Switch for portrait versus landscape.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\landscape=\TRUE
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\pagenumbermessage}
+%    A message to show at run-time how the pages are being put
+%    together. In the simplest case, when there is only one text
+%    column per sheet of paper, this message would be silly, so we
+%    wrap it in a condition.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\pagenumbermessage{%
+  \ifnum\totalcols>\@ne
+    \message{%
+Printing `pages' \the\firstpageno--\the\lastpageno
+\space on \if\landscape landscape \fi sheet
+\the\pageno}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Here I wanted to add the following line, but nay, let it be
+%    omitted to support the unlikely, but not totally unreasonable,
+%    possibility that different files in the same run might have
+%    different number of columns per page.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%  \else \gdef\pagenumbermessage{}%
+  \fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\Ncols}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\Ncols{\relax
+  \ifnum\curcol=\totalcols
+    \pagenumbermessage
+    \shipout\hbox to\fullwd{%
+      \unhbox\prevcolsbox\curcolbox}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \cw{pageno} is the number of the actual sheet of paper on which
+%    we are currently printing.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \global\advance\pageno\@ne
+    \global\chardef\curcol \z@
+    \ifnum\totalcols>\@ne
+      \global\advance\lastpageno \@ne
+      \global\firstpageno\lastpageno
+    \fi
+  \else
+    \global\setbox\prevcolsbox\hbox{%
+      \unhbox\prevcolsbox\curcolbox
+      \hskip\intercolspace plus1fil\relax}%
+    \ifnum\totalcols>\@ne
+      \global\advance\lastpageno \@ne
+    \fi
+  \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Maximum number of columns = 20. The preliminary \cw{edef}
+%    step is necessary because \cw{mathchardef} makes \cw{curcol} =
+%    \cw{relax} before scanning the number on the right-hand side of
+%    the assignment, so that it would choke the \cw{ifcase}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \edef\next{\global\mathchardef\curcol=
+    \ifcase\curcol
+      1\or 2\or 3\or 4\or 5\or 6\or 7\or 8\or 9\or
+      10\or 11\or 12\or 13\or 14\or 15\or 16\or
+      17\or 18\or 19\or 20%
+    \else "7FFF\fi\relax
+  }%
+  \next
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\runhead}
+% \begin{macro}{\runfoot}
+%    We use \cw{runhead} and \cw{runfoot} instead of \cw{headline} and
+%    \cw{footline}, to reduce the possibility of conflict if this
+%    utility is used in conjunction with some other output routine.
+%    (Future possibility, not yet implemented: allow calling of this
+%    utility from within \latex/ or another macro package with its own
+%    output routine.[mjd,20-Sep-1993])
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newtoks\runhead \newtoks\runfoot
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\loheadline}
+%    The test at the beginning here is to avoid problems when the
+%    headline is wider than the column width; in that case only print
+%    one headline over all the columns instead of a headline for each
+%    column. If \qarg{1} = \cw{colwd}, it means that the headline fits
+%    within \cw{colwd}: print a headline for each column; otherwise
+%    print a headline only if \cw{curcol} = 1, and let it overlap over
+%    all the columns.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\loheadline#1{\relax
+  \if\ifdim#1=\colwd T\else
+     \ifnum\curcol=\@ne T\else F\fi\fi T%
+    \vbox to\runheadht{\rlap{\hbox to#1{%
+      \csname\runheadfont\runheadfontsize\endcsname
+      \the\runhead}}\vss}%
+    \nointerlineskip
+  \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\lofootline}
+%    As for the headline, we print a single footline across all
+%    columns if the footline width is greater than \cw{colwd}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\lofootline#1{\relax
+  \if \ifdim#1=\colwd T\else
+      \ifnum\curcol=1 T\else F\fi\fi T%
+    \nointerlineskip
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    The \cw{vfil} pushes the footline to the bottom of the vbox; the
+%    \cw{vfilneg}\cw{vss} at the end is just a compact way of writing
+%    \cw{vskip} {\tt 0pt minus1fil}, meaning let the footline hang out
+%    the bottom of the box if necessary, without giving an overfull
+%    vbox message.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \vbox to\runfootht{\vfil\rlap{\hbox to#1{%
+      \csname\runheadfont\runheadfontsize\endcsname
+      \the\runfoot}}\kern-\prevdepth
+      \vfilneg\vss}%
+  \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\setupheadlineandfootline}
+%    Define how headline and footline are applied. If the running head
+%    or running foot is too wide to fit within \cw{colwd}, then
+%    \cw{hfwd} (headline/footline width) is defined to be \cw{fullwd}.
+%    Cf.\ the comments for \cw{loheadline}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\setupheadlineandfootline{%
+  \gdef\hfwd{\colwd}%
+  \if\runheads
+    \setbox\z@\hbox{%
+      \csname\runheadfont\runheadfontsize\endcsname
+      \the\runhead}%
+    \ifdim\wd\z@>\colwd \gdef\hfwd{\fullwd}\fi
+  \fi
+  \if\runfeet
+    \setbox\z@\hbox{%
+      \csname\runfootfont\runfootfontsize\endcsname
+      \the\runfoot}%
+    \ifdim\wd\z@>\colwd \gdef\hfwd{\fullwd}\fi
+  \fi
+  \if\runheads
+    \if\runfeet
+      \gdef\curcolbox{\vtop{\loheadline\hfwd
+        \vbox to\vsize{\unvbox255 \vss}%
+        \lofootline\hfwd}}%
+    \else
+      \gdef\curcolbox{%
+        \vtop{\loheadline\hfwd \vtop{\unvbox255 }}}%
+    \fi
+  \else
+    \if\runfeet
+      \gdef\curcolbox{\vtop{\null\nointerlineskip
+        \vbox to\vsize{\unvbox255 \vss}%
+        \lofootline\hfwd}}%
+    \else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Print \cw{null} box for the headline rather than nothing, so that
+%    the \cw{vtop} in \cw{curcolbox} will work.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+      \gdef\curcolbox{%
+        \vtop{\null\unvbox255 }}%
+    \fi
+  \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \section{Tab handling}
+%
+%    Well, at first I was only going to make tabs expand to a fixed
+%    number of spaces regardless of where they happened to fall in the
+%    line. This would work fine for tabs that fall at the beginning of a
+%    line. But there are certain other reasonable possibilities in
+%    program source code, e.g. assembly-language style comments that
+%    start in column 40 or so, or tables of information.
+%    The alignment in such cases can be preserved by setting a
+%    box at the beginning of each line and then, when a tab comes
+%    along, measuring the width of the line so far to figure out how
+%    many characters it contains. Of course this is impossible unless
+%    the font being used is monospace. But given that, and
+%    given a specified width in characters of each tab, it's possible to
+%    find the distance remaining to the next tab stop.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\tableaderbox}
+%    Box used with \cw{leaders} to represent tab characters.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newbox\tableaderbox
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\spacespertab}
+%    The most common convention for printing tabs is eight spaces.
+%    Some people may prefer printing fewer.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\chardef\spacespertab=8
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\tabwidth}
+%    \cw{tabwidth} is the width to be used for tab characters. Usually
+%    a multiple of (monospaced-font) character width and
+%    \cw{spacespertab}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newdimen\tabwidth
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\printtaba}
+%    The function \cw{printtaba} is called when we are in the middle
+%    of typesetting an \cw{hbox} to \cw{hsize} (cf
+%    \cw{newunnumberedline}).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\printtaba{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Finish the hbox. The \cw{hfil} is just to prevent an underfull
+%    hbox message, it will be removed next. Using \cw{hfil} to supress
+%    the message seems to be better than using \cw{hbadness}, because
+%    the current box is being set to \cw{hsize} instead of natural
+%    size so it will have to be reboxed anyway (therefore the
+%    \cw{unskip} step costs little); and if \cw{hbadness} were set to
+%    10000 then overfull messages would also be suppressed, which is
+%    unnecessary and even slightly undesirable.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+	  \hfil\egroup
+  \setbox\z@\hbox{\unhbox\z@ \unskip}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Compute \cw{dimen@}, the distance remaining to the next tab stop
+%    (the next integer multiple of \cw{tabwidth} that is greater than
+%    the width of box 0).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \dimen@\wd\z@ \divide\dimen@\tabwidth
+  \multiply\dimen@\tabwidth
+  \advance\dimen@\tabwidth
+  \advance\dimen@ -\wd\z@
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Restart the line, adding leaders to the appropriate width.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \setbox\z@\hbox to \hsize\bgroup \unhbox\z@
+    \spacebreak\hbox to\dimen@{%
+      \leaders\copy\tableaderbox\hfil}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\newfileprinttab}
+%    Print a message when a tab is encountered in the current file.
+%    But after the first tab, don't send any more messages, until a
+%    new file is started.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\newfileprinttab{\printtaba
+  \message{%
+Say, this file contains a tab character}%
+  \global\let\printtab\printtaba}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\printtab}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\printtab=\newfileprinttab
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\charwidth}
+%    Variable to hold the width of one character in the current font.
+%    (Monospace font assumed.)
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newdimen\charwidth
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\inittabs}
+%    \cw{inittabs} assumes that the proper font has already been
+%    selected.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\inittabs{%
+  \setbox\z@\hbox{m}\charwidth\wd\z@
+  \tabwidth\spacespertab\charwidth
+  \ifcase\tabselect % case 0: blank tabs option.
+    \setbox\tableaderbox\hbox to\charwidth{}%
+  \or % case 1: dots option.
+    \setbox\tableaderbox\hbox to.2em{%
+        \hskip\z@ plus2\p@ minus3\p@
+        \mathhexbox 201% \cdot character
+        \kern.1em }%
+  \or % case 2: dashed option.
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    The plus and minus for the first hskip are to avoid underfull
+%    hbox messages from rounding errors in summing the em dimensions.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \setbox\tableaderbox\hbox to.3em{%
+        \hskip-.1em plus2sp minus2sp%
+        \vrule width.25em height.25em\kern.15em }%
+  \or % case 3: hrule option.
+    \setbox\tableaderbox\hbox{%
+      \vrule width\charwidth height2\p@ depth-1.5\p@}%
+  \else % case 4: tiny TAB option.
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    The font used for the small letters is always 5pt roman\mdash no
+%    user choice here.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \setbox\tableaderbox\hbox to.5em{\hss
+        \vbox to6\p@{%
+          \offinterlineskip\csname roman5\endcsname
+          \hbox to7\p@{T\hss}\vss
+            \hbox to7\p@{\hss\kern-.1em A\hss}\vss
+          \hbox to7\p@{\hss B}\kern-2\p@}%
+        \hss}%
+  \fi
+  \let\printtab\newfileprinttab
+ }
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\tabstyle}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\tabstyle{\ifcase\tabselect blank space\or
+  dots\or dashed lines\or horizontal rules\else
+  tiny TABs\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \section{Printing non-printable characters}
+%    The `invisible' control characters \ascii/ 0\ndash 31 and 127 need
+%    special handling if they occur in the text being printed. For
+%    \ascii/ 9 and 13, tab and carriage return, there is a generally
+%    accepted way to print them, but for the others there are no
+%    standards. So the chosen method here is to print a boxed letter:
+%    boxed A for \ctrl{A}, boxed B for \ctrl{B}, and so forth. One
+%    other exception seems to be convenient: \ctrl{L} (form feed) is
+%    defined to act as a `newpage' command (`newcolumn' if
+%    \cw{totalcols} is greater than 1).
+%
+%    For characters 128\ndash 255 there are generally accepted ways to
+%    print them. The trouble is, there are too many different
+%    generally accepted ways: the Macintosh way, the IBM PC codepage
+%    ways (several different codepages), the DC font encoding way, the
+%    DEC multinational character set way, the KOI-8 way, and many many
+%    others. And most of these ways would require their own font, as
+%    they include characters not found in the \fn{cmtt} character set.
+%    Therefore I do not attempt here to do anything very useful with
+%    characters $>$ 127, but only set them up to print a boxed
+%    question mark and a warning about `unspecified character'.
+%    If you're interested in helping me expand the capabilities of
+%    \fn{listout} in this area, particularly regarding the font
+%    complications, let me know.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\charboxsidekern}
+% \begin{macro}{\charboxstrut}
+%    \cw{charboxstrut} is initialized in \cw{listout} after the font
+%    is set.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newdimen\charboxsidekern
+\charboxsidekern=.3pt
+\newbox\charboxstrut
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\characterbox}
+%    Function to print a box around a given character.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\characterbox#1{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    The width of the hbox is set to preserve alignment of characters
+%    across lines if we have a normal tt font with the width of all
+%    characters  = .5\units{em}. In order for the enclosed character
+%    to be slightly more readable, we allow the vertical rules to
+%    partly overlap outside the .5\units{em} space instead of lapping
+%    them entirely inward.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \hbox to.5em{\hss
+    \dimen@.22\p@ \dimen@ii -.11\p@
+    \vrule width\dimen@ \kern\dimen@ii
+    \vbox{\hrule height\dimen@
+      \kern\charboxsidekern
+      \hbox{\kern\charboxsidekern
+        #1\kern\charboxsidekern
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    A vertical strut is inserted to ensure a certain minimum height
+%    of the box even if say the enclosed character has practically no
+%    height (\eg. underscore).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \copy\charboxstrut}%
+      \dimen4 \prevdepth
+      \advance\dimen4 \charboxsidekern
+      \advance\dimen@ \dimen4
+      \hrule depth\dimen@ height -\dimen4
+    }%
+    \kern\dimen@ii\vrule width\dimen@\hss}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\controlchara}
+%    Define the control characters \ascii/ 0\ndash 31 and 127 to print a
+%    warning and a boxed letter. \ctrl{I}, \ctrl{L}, \ctrl{M} (tab,
+%    formfeed, carriage return) will receive overriding definitions
+%    later.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\controlchara#1{%
+  \message{Warning:
+Invisible control character, printing boxed letter}%
+  \characterbox{#1}%
+  \gdef\controlchar##1{%
+    \message{@}\characterbox{##1}}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\controlchar}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\controlchar{\controlchara}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\controlcharassignments}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newtoks\controlcharassignments
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%    Start a group to localize the changes to lccodes, \cw{do}, etc.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\begingroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    For \eg. \ctrl{A} we want to issue a warning message and print a
+%    boxed capital A character. To get the cap A from the control
+%    character \ctrl{A} which \cw{controlchars} provides, we turn it
+%    into a number and add 64, then use the result with \cw{lccode} to
+%    get a category-12 character inside the definition being
+%    constructed.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\do#1{\count@=`#1 \next \do}
+\def\next{\lccode`\~=\count@ \advance\count@ 64
+  \ifnum\count@>127 \advance\count@ -128 \fi
+  \lccode`\.=\count@
+  \lowercase{\let~\relax
+    \global\controlcharassignments\xp@{%
+    \the\controlcharassignments
+    \def~{\controlchar{.}}}}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\xp@\do\controlchars{a \@gobbletwo}
+\endgroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\unknownchar}
+% \begin{macro}{\unknownchara}
+%
+%    Define characters in the range \ascii/ 128\ndash 255 to print as a
+%    boxed question mark, with a warning. Those who have DC fonts or
+%    other fonts with 256 characters instead of 128 might want to change
+%    this behavior, but the default is chosen so as not to cause trouble
+%    for those who are currently handicapped with 128-character fonts
+%    (including myself \ldots). There is also the problem that in an
+%    arbitrary file being printed, the original intended interpretation
+%    of characters above \ascii/ 127 may vary widely, and more often
+%    than not, perhaps, will not correspond properly to the characters
+%    in the high 128 positions of the currently selected font. For
+%    example, it's not clear how useful it would be to print out a file
+%    coded for Russian characters in the high 128 with a font that uses
+%    the DC character set.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\unknownchara{%
+  \xmesj{Warning: Unspecified character
+    (system-dependent interpretation);\
+    printing question mark instead}%
+  \characterbox{?}%
+  \gdef\unknownchar{\message{?}\characterbox{?}}%
+}
+%
+\def\unknownchar{\unknownchara}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\eightbitaction}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\eightbitaction{B}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\highASCIIassignments}
+% \begin{macro}{\highBSCIIassignments}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newtoks\highASCIIassignments
+\newtoks\highBSCIIassignments
+%
+\highASCIIassignments{%
+  \def\do{\catcode\count@=12 \advance\count@\@ne
+    \ifnum\count@>\@cclv \expandafter\@gobble\fi\do}%
+  \count@=128 \do}
+%
+\begingroup
+\def\do{%
+  \global\catcode\count@\active
+  \lccode`\~\count@
+  \lowercase{\global\highBSCIIassignments
+    \xp@{\the\highBSCIIassignments
+      \def~{\unknownchar}}}%
+  \ifnum\count@<255\relax
+    \advance\count@ 1\relax
+    \xp@\do % tail recursion
+  \fi}
+%
+\count@=128\relax \do \endgroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \section{File name titles}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\thisfilename}
+%    Variable to hold the name of the current file being printed. To
+%    be determined at run-time.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\thisfilename{??}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\printtitles}
+%    If \cw{printtitles} is true then the name of each file is printed
+%    at the beginning of each file as a centered title, with some
+%    space above and below.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\printtitles=\TRUE
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@dogobble}
+%    Auxiliary function to help in ending a recursive \cs{do}
+%    operation.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@dogobble#1\do{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\nonttfont}
+%    If \cw{titlefont} is not a tt font, then \qc{\_} will not print
+%    properly; to get around this we print the title in math mode with
+%    \cw{textfont}1 = \cw{titlefont}, just so that we can use
+%    \cw{mathcode}"8000 to make the underscore pseudo-active. This is
+%    convenient because all characters of \cw{thisfilename} were
+%    converted to category 12 by \cw{xmeaning}, and mathcode "8000
+%    allows us to use any underscore characters already present
+%    instead of replacing them by active characters.  The alternative
+%    would be to pick apart \cw{thisfilename} looking for \qc{\_}
+%    characters and replace them by active \qc{\_} or by \cs{\_}; but
+%    that seems like more work. For certain other characters (less
+%    likely to occur in file names) there is the same problem.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\nonttfont#1{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Reset mathcodes of all nonalphanumeric visible characters, since
+%    some of them (\eg., period) have mathcodes that point to
+%    unexpected font positions. Yes, this is overkill, but it's
+%    simpler to program and more likely to be robust against unknown
+%    future changes in font layouts.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \def\do##1{\mathcode`##1`##1 \do}%
+  \xp@\do\otherchars{.`.\relax \@dogobble}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Furthermore, the characters \qc{\<} \qc{\>} \verb*" " (space)
+%    \qc{\_} \qc{\{} \qc{\|} \qc{\}} \qc{\~} do not have adequate
+%    representatives in their \ascii/ positions in normal \tex/ text
+%    fonts (other than \fn{cmtt}). So we mathcode them to pull some
+%    reasonable approximations out of \cw{textfont2} (\fn{cmsy10}),
+%    except for underscore, which we mathcode to \verb/"8000/ (active)
+%    and define to produce a horizontal rule, and space, which we
+%    leave alone.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \mathcode`\<"268 \mathcode`\>"269
+  \mathcode`\\"26E \mathcode`\_"8000
+  \mathcode`\{"266 \mathcode`\|"26A
+  \mathcode`\}"267 \mathcode`\~"218
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Finally, we make the double-quote character active so that it
+%    will produce a double-prime symbol rather than a directional
+%    close-quotes character, which would be ambiguous with two single
+%    apostrophes.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \mathcode`\""8000
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Change the definition of active \qc{\_} to produce a thicker and
+%    wider rule.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \actively\def\_{%
+    \leavevmode\kern.06em\vbox{%
+      \hrule width.4em height.06em}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Define active \qc{\"} character to produce double-prime.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \actively\def\"{^{\prime\prime}}%
+  \textfont\z@
+    \csname\titlefont\titlefontsize\endcsname
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    On general principles we initialize \cw{everymath} and
+%    \cw{mathsurround} to make sure they don't do anything abnormal.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \everymath{}\mathsurround\z@
+  $\fam\z@#1$%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%    The list of system types and associated directory separator
+%    characters is determined arbitrarily as the systems that I happen
+%    to have experience with. If you want to see your favorite system
+%    added to the list write to me at the e-mail address given above
+%    \ldots
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\DOSdirsepchar}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\escapechar=-1
+\edef\DOSdirsepchar{\string\\}
+\escapechar=`\\
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\Macintoshdirsepchar}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\Macintoshdirsepchar{:}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\Unixdirsepchar}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\Unixdirsepchar{/}
+\xp@\def\csname VAX/VMSdirsepchar\endcsname{]}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\chopname}
+%
+%    The function \cw{chopname} chops up a filename looking for the
+%    characters that separate directory components from filename
+%    components; this is in order to add an \cw{allowbreak} between
+%    directory and filename if an explicit directory is included in
+%    the given file name, so that when printing the file name in a
+%    title, it will break into two lines if there isn't enough room
+%    for the whole thing to fit on one line.
+%
+%    \cw{chopname} is intended to be called only after \cw{xmeaning} has
+%    been applied to convert all constituent characters of \qarg{1} to
+%    category 12.
+%
+%    Test cases:
+%
+%^^V \def\systemtype{Unix}
+%^^V \def\test{goo/bar/flab/rtex}
+%^^V \chopname\test \show\test
+%^^V \def\test{rtex}
+%^^V \chopname\test \show\test
+%^^V
+%^^V \def\systemtype{VAX/VMS}
+%^^V \def\test{goo:[bar.flab]rtex}
+%^^V \chopname\test\show\test
+%^^V \def\test{rtex}
+%^^V \chopname\test\show\test
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\chopname#1{%
+  \edef\dirsepchar{%
+    \csname\systemtype dirsepchar\endcsname}%
+  \edef\@tempa{%
+    \def\nx@\do####1\dirsepchar}%
+  \@tempa
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    What we get here from \cw{@tempa} is something like
+%    the following line.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% \def\do##1/%
+  ##2{%
+    \toks@\xp@{\next@}%
+    \ifx\end##2% then just add ##1 at the end
+      \edef\next@{\the\toks@##1}%
+    \else
+      \edef\next@{\the\toks@##1%
+        \dirsepchar\nx@\allowbreak}%
+      \afterfi\do##2%
+    \fi
+  }%
+  \edef\@tempa{\toks@{}\def\nx@\next@{}%
+    \nx@\do#1\dirsepchar\nx@\end}%
+  \@tempa
+  \let#1\next@
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    And finally, if \cw{dirprefix} is not empty, add it.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \ifx\@empty\dirprefix
+  \else
+    \edef#1{\xmeaning\dirprefix\allowbreak#1}%
+  \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\printtitle}
+%    Function to typeset the title of the current file.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\printtitle{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    This \cw{bigskip} will be discarded following \tex/'s normal rules
+%    if each file starts on a new page or column.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \bigskip
+  \centerline{%
+    \csname\titlefont\titlefontsize\endcsname
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Add an \cw{allowbreak} between directory and filename if an
+%    explicit directory is included in the given file name.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \chopname\thisfilename
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    If the interword stretch of \cw{titlefont} is 0, then it is
+%    [almost surely] a tt font. But otherwise, special handling is
+%    required in order to make sure that the characters
+%    \verb/_ < > \ { | } ~/ print OK.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \ifdim\fontdimen3\font=\z@
+      \csname\titlecase\endcsname
+        \xp@{\thisfilename}%
+    \else
+      \csname\titlecase\endcsname
+        \xp@{\xp@
+        \nonttfont\xp@{\thisfilename}}%
+    \fi
+  }% end \centerline
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    If new file doesn't start a new column, use a smaller space below
+%    the title than would otherwise be used.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \if S\newfileoption \smallskip
+  \else\bigskip\fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\newfileoption}
+%    Variable that selects the desired action at the beginning of a
+%    new file.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\newfileoption{P}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%    \mjd{Is \cw{eject} defined in LaTeX?}
+% \begin{macro}{\newfileS}
+%    Option S (space): Tack on the next file immediately after the
+%    previous one, without even ending the current column (unless
+%    there are only a couple of lines of space left on it). Assumes
+%    that \cw{printtitle} will add some vertical space.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\newfileS{%
+  \dimen@\pagegoal \advance\dimen@-\pagetotal
+  \ifdim\dimen@<3\baselineskip
+  \xp@\eject\fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\newfileC}
+%    Option C: Finish the current column.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\newfileC{\vfil\eject}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\newfileP}
+%    Option P: Force a new page (= sheet of paper).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\newfileP{%
+  \vfil\eject
+  \loop
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Repeat until \cs{curcol} resets to 1.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \ifnum\curcol>\@ne
+    \hbox to\colwd{%
+          \vrule width\z@ depth\vsize\hfil}%
+    \eject
+  \repeat
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\newfileR}
+%    Option R: Force right-hand column (\cw{totalcols} = 2 assumed).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\newfileR{\vfil\eject
+  \ifnum\curcol=\@ne
+    \hbox to\colwd{%
+      \vrule width\z@ depth\vsize\hfil}%
+  \xp@\eject
+  \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \section{Line numbering}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\linenumberfreq}
+% \begin{macro}{\linecount}
+% \begin{macro}{\linesubcount}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcount\linenumberfreq \linenumberfreq=1
+\newcount\linecount
+\newcount\linesubcount
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\printlinenumber}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\printlinenumber{\llap{%
+  \global\advance\linecount\@ne
+  \global\advance\linesubcount\@ne
+  \ifnum\linesubcount=\linenumberfreq
+    \lnfnt \the\linecount\space
+    \global\linesubcount\z@
+  \fi
+}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\spacebreak}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\spacebreak{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\markedbreak}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\markedbreak{\penalty\z@}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\noextralinebreaks}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\noextralinebreaks=\TRUE
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\newunnumberedline}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\newunnumberedline{\hskip\rightskip \egroup
+  \box\z@ \controlLbreak
+  \setbox\z@\hbox to\hsize\bgroup}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\newnumberedline}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\newnumberedline{%
+  \newunnumberedline\printlinenumber}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\unnumberedbreakingline}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\unnumberedbreakingline{\relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \cw{noindent} \cw{unhbox}0 \cw{endgraf} produces only \cw{parskip}
+%    if box 0 is empty, when what we really want is a full baselineskip
+%    (a blank line) because box 0 empty means two consecutive \ctrl{M}
+%    characters; so we check if box0 is empty by looking at
+%    \cw{lastpenalty} to see if it is the same as the penalty that we
+%    added at the beginning and if so throw in a \cw{null} to make sure
+%    the line won't disappear.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \ifnum\lastpenalty=\@ne \null\fi
+  \hskip\rightskip\egroup
+  \hfuzz \p@
+  \noindent\unhbox\z@ %
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Notice that the normal \tex/ action at end of paragraph will
+%    remove the \cw{hskip} that was added before the \cw{egroup} of the
+%    \cw{setbox} operation. We also employ a hangindent of 1em to give
+%    some indication of line breaks, if they occur.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  {\hangindent1em
+  \parfillskip\z@ plus1fil \endgraf}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    We need to prevent overfull rules from being added inside at the
+%    end of the \cw{hbox}, because there's no way to break off the rule
+%    from the end of the horizontal list once it gets in there.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \hfuzz\maxdimen
+  \controlLbreak
+  \setbox\z@\hbox to\hsize\bgroup \penalty\@ne
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\numberedbreakingline}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\numberedbreakingline{%
+  \unnumberedbreakingline\printlinenumber}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@sptoken}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\lowercase{\let\@sptoken= } %
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\CR}
+%    Action performed at end of line. Can vary according to whether
+%    line numbers are wanted and whether overlong lines are allowed to
+%    break.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\CR\newunnumberedline
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\CRSPsetup}
+%
+%    Setup for carriage returns and spaces. We need to prevent spaces
+%    from disappearing at the beginning of a line, and also optionally
+%    prevent line breaks.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\CRSPsetup{%
+  \setupbreakingchars
+  \if\noextralinebreaks
+    \overrun\rightmargin
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    NOTE: the space after the \qc{\=} is mandatory because of the way
+%    \cw{@sptoken} is defined:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \actively\let\ = \@sptoken\relax
+    \if\linenumbers
+      \let\CR\newnumberedline
+    \else
+      \let\CR\newunnumberedline
+    \fi
+  \else
+    \actively\edef\ {\spacebreak\space}%
+    \if\linenumbers
+      \let\CR\numberedbreakingline
+    \else
+      \let\CR\unnumberedbreakingline
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \actively\let\^^M\CR
+  \rightskip\z@ plus\hsize minus\overrun
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Parfillskip not needed, \cw{rightskip} suffices.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \parfillskip\z@skip
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \section{Main printing function}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\listout}
+%    The \cw{listout} function takes a file name argument, the name of
+%    a file to be printed verbatim.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\listout#1{\endgraf
+  \begingroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Setup that may not need to be done for each file. If
+%    \cw{interactive} is \cw{TRUE}, this is reset to no-op since it's
+%    not possible for the user to change any settings between files.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \listoutsetup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Convert \qarg{1} to all category 12 characters using \cw{meaning}.
+%    This prevents problems when we print the file name if it contains
+%    things like \qc{\$} or \qc{\_} characters.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \gdef\thisfilename{#1}%
+  \xdef\thisfilename{\xmeaning\thisfilename}%
+  \if\printtitles \printtitle \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Setup up needing to be redone for each file, or that only applies
+%    to the body of the file, not to the title.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \listoutmoresetup
+  \CRSPsetup
+  \hfuzz\maxdimen
+  \setbox\z@\hbox to\hsize\bgroup \penalty\@ne
+  \input#1 \hfil\egroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Ignore the final contents of box 0 since they are just the (null)
+%    material between the file-ending \qc{\^^M} and the above
+%    \cs{egroup}.
+%
+%    Reset \cw{hfuzz} to normal in case temporary value of
+%    \cw{maxdimen} persists somehow.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \hfuzz\p@
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Add a penalty to force \cw{pagetotal} to be updated with the
+%    height of the preceding line.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \penalty0 %
+  \csname newfile\newfileoption\endcsname
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Ensure that everything gets shipped out even if this is the last
+%    file in a noninteractive use of \fn{listout.tex} (where control may
+%    return after the \cw{endgroup} to a different output routine).
+%    This is a complicated question. The \cw{patchoutput} possibility
+%    to make this work from inside a larger macro package is commented
+%    out until such time as it can be done right.[mjd,21-Sep-1993]
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \ifvoid\prevcolsbox
+  \else
+    \savelistoutimage
+%{\tracingonline=1 \showboxbreadth=\maxdimen
+% \showboxdepth=9 \showbox\prevcolsbox}%
+%    \afterfi\patchoutput
+  \fi
+  \endgroup }
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\patchedoutputroutine}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%\let\patchedoutputroutine\FALSE
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\patchoutput}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%\def\patchoutput#1{% #1 to remove the \endgroup
+%  \endgroup
+%  \relax\if\patchedoutputroutine
+%  \else
+%    \global\let\patchedoutputroutine\TRUE
+%    \edef\next{%
+%      \output{%
+%        \box\prevcolsbox
+%        \global\holdinginserts\the\holdinginserts\relax
+%        \unvbox255 \relax
+%        \global\let\nx@\patchedoutputroutine\nx@\FALSE
+%%    Restore the previous output routine. Interestingly,
+%%    \cw{the}\cw{output} returns an extra pair of braces
+%%    (as hinted at in the \tex/book); so the extra step
+%%    with \cw{toks@} here is slightly better than simply
+%%    \cw{global}\cw{output}{\cw{the}\cw{output}}.
+%        \toks@{\the\output}%
+%        \global\nx@\xp@\output\nx@\the\toks@
+%      }%
+%%\showthe\output
+%    }%
+%    \global\holdinginserts1
+%  \fi
+%  \next}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\savelistoutimage}
+%    For \cw{listoutimage} we only need to save those parameters that
+%    are used when shipping out a page.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\savelistoutimage{%
+  \xdef\listoutimage{%
+    \let\nx@\landscape%
+      \if\landscape\nx@\TRUE
+      \else\nx@\FALSE\fi
+    \pawd\the\pawd \paht\the\paht
+    \topmargin\the\topmargin
+    \bottommargin\the\bottommargin
+    \leftmargin\the\leftmargin
+    \rightmargin\the\rightmargin
+    \normalbaselineskip\the\normalbaselineskip
+    \normalbaselines
+    \mathchardef\curcol\number\curcol\relax
+    \chardef\totalcols\number\totalcols\relax
+    \colwd\the\colwd \colht\the\colht
+    \fullwd\the\fullwd
+    \intercolspace\the\intercolspace
+    \overrun\the\overrun
+    \def\nx@\todaysdate{\todaysdate}%
+    \def\nx@\nowtime{\nowtime}%
+    \def\nx@\pagenumberfont{\pagenumberfont}%
+    \def\nx@\pagenumberfontsize{%
+      \pagenumberfontsize}
+    \pageno\the\pageno
+    \lastpageno\the\lastpageno
+    \firstpageno\the\firstpageno
+    \def\nx@\hfwd{\hfwd}%
+    \def\nx@\thisfilename{\thisfilename}%
+    \let\nx@\runheads%
+      \if\runheads\nx@\TRUE
+      \else\nx@\FALSE\fi
+    \runhead{\the\runhead}%
+    \def\nx@\runheadfont{\runheadfont}%
+    \def\nx@\runheadfontsize{%
+      \runheadfontsize}%
+    \runheadht\the\runheadht
+    \let\nx@\runfeet%
+      \if\runfeet\nx@\TRUE
+      \else\nx@\FALSE\fi
+    \runfoot{\the\runfoot}%
+    \def\nx@\runfootfont{\runfootfont}%
+    \def\nx@\runfootfontsize{%
+      \runfootfontsize}%
+    \runfootht\the\runfootht
+    \hoffset\the\hoffset \voffset\the\voffset
+    \relax
+  }%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\reportlayout}
+%    Some of the line breaks in the following code are merely to
+%    facilitate printing the documentation in narrow columns.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\fxmesj\reportlayout{
+Using paper size &\the&\pawd x &\the&\paht%
+ (&\paperwidth x &\paperheight),
+&\number&\totalcols columns, intercolumnspace%
+ = &\the&\intercolspace,
+column width = &\the&\colwd, column height%
+ = &\the&\colht,
+top margin = &\the&\topmargin, left margin%
+ = &\the&\leftmargin.
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\listoutsetup}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\listoutsetup{%
+  \output{\Ncols}%
+  \loadfonts
+  \csname\mainfont\mainfontsize\endcsname
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Preexpand line number font for faster execution, since it is
+%    repeated on every line if line numbering is turned on.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \xp@\let\xp@\lnfnt
+     \csname\linenumberfont
+       \linenumberfontsize\endcsname
+  \normalbaselines
+  \if\dependentcolht
+    \if\dependentbottommargin \computebc
+    \else \computec\fi
+  \else
+    \computeb
+  \fi
+  \vsize\colht
+  \parskip \z@\relax
+  \if\dependentcolwd
+    \if\dependentrightmargin \computerfc
+    \else \computefc \fi
+  \else
+    \computefr
+  \fi
+  \hsize\colwd
+  \parindent\z@
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Reduce the size of \cw{overfullrule} so that if a too-long line
+%    overprints, there is a better chance to read what lies underneath
+%    at the end. But we still get visual identification of overlong
+%    lines.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \ifdim\overfullrule>\z@ \overfullrule 2\p@\fi
+  \setupheadlineandfootline
+  \datesetup
+  \voffset\m@ne truein \hoffset\voffset
+  \advance\voffset\topmargin \advance\hoffset\leftmargin
+  \setbox\charboxstrut\hbox{%
+    \vrule height.5emwidth\z@}%
+  \inittabs
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    If extra line breaks are allowed, we want to avoid page breaks in
+%    the middle of something that was originally one line. Setting
+%    \cw{clubpenalty} and \cw{widowpenalty} to these values means that a
+%    line will have to break into four lines or more before a page
+%    break will be allowed, and always the first two and last two line
+%    pieces will remain together. But we don't prohibit page breaks
+%    within a broken line entirely (\cw{interlinepenalty} = 10000)
+%    because that might be undesirable in extreme cases.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \clubpenalty\@M \widowpenalty\@M
+  \count@12\relax
+  \def\do##1{\catcode`##1\count@ \do}%
+  \xp@\do\otherchars{a11 \@gobbletwo}%
+  \count@\active
+  \xp@\do\controlchars{a11 \@gobbletwo}%
+  \the\controlcharassignments
+  \global\let\controlchar\controlchara
+  \if L\controlLaction
+    \actively\let\^^L\linespaceL
+  \else
+    \if N\controlLaction
+      \actively\let\^^L\ejectL
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \the\csname high\eightbitaction SCIIassignments\endcsname
+  \global\let\unknownchar\unknownchara
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Standard disablement of \verb/?`/ and \verb/!`/ ligatures found in
+%    \fn{cmtt} fonts:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \actively\def\`{\kern\z@`}%
+  \hfuzz\p@
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\linespaceL}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\linespaceL{\message{Found a ^L character}\CR}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ejectL}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ejectL{%
+  \message{Found a ^L character}%
+  \gdef\controlLbreak{\eject}\CR\global\let\controlLbreak\relax
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\controlLbreak}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\controlLbreak\relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\controlLaction}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%    Define form-feed to do a `newcolumn' operation. Remove outerness
+%    at the same time. Possible actions for \cw{controlLaction} are B,
+%    L, N: print boxed character, print one-line space, or start new
+%    column/page.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\controlLaction{N}
+\actively\let\^^L=\ejectL
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\listoutmoresetup}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\listoutmoresetup{%
+  \global\linecount\z@ \global\linesubcount\z@
+  \ifnum\totalcols>\@ne
+    \global\firstpageno\@ne
+    \global\lastpageno\@ne
+  \fi
+  \relax
+  \frenchspacing
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Define tab to be visible.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \global\let\printtab\newfileprinttab
+  \actively\def\^^I{\printtab}%
+  \langnohyphens
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\DVImesj}
+%    \cw{DVImesj} remains null unless the test at the
+%    entry point for the menu system to see if \fn{listout} is being
+%    run interactively returns true.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\DVImesj{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\landscapereminder}
+%    Here once again a couple of extra line breaks will be observed in
+%    the printed documentation, introduced to avoid margin overrun in
+%    narrow-column printing.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\fxmesj\landscapereminder{%
+********************************************%
+***********************
+*     REMINDER: print in LANDSCAPE mode     %
+                      *
+********************************************%
+***********************}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\listoutfinish}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\listoutfinish{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    If part of the last file is pending in \cw{prevcolsbox}, we need
+%    to make sure we print it here.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \ifvoid\prevcolsbox
+  \else
+    \wlog{Clearing out previous file}%
+    \begingroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Reset parameters that were turned off by the \cw{endgroup} in
+%    \cw{listout}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \listoutimage \output{\Ncols}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Change newfile action to `new page', then run it, so that we fill
+%    out the page with blank columns if necessary.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \def\newfileoption{P}%
+    \hbox to\colwd{}%
+    \csname newfile\newfileoption\endcsname
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Message about the name of the DVI file
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \DVImesj
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    If \cw{landscape} switch is true, reminder to use the `landscape'
+%    switch of the DVI driver.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \if\landscape
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    For those drivers that can handle it (\fn{dvips}, \ldots ?), this
+%    \cw{special} command is convenient to have in every job.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%     \cw{special}{landscape}%
+      \landscapereminder
+    \fi
+    \endgroup
+  \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \section{Fonts}
+% \begin{macro}{\xfont}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\xfont#1={%
+  \xp@\font\csname#1\endcsname=}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ftypewriter}\begin{macro}{\fbold}
+% \begin{macro}{\froman}\begin{macro}{\fitalic}
+% \begin{macro}{\fsansserif}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ftypewriter{cmtt}
+\def\fbold{cmbx}
+\def\froman{cmr}
+\def\fitalic{cmti}
+\def\fsansserif{cmss}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\loadfont}
+%    Load the given font. Args \qarg{1} and \qarg{2} are the
+%    descriptive name and the type size, respectively.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\loadfont#1#2{%
+  \relax\ifnum#2>100 \loadscaledfont{#1}{#2}%
+  \else
+    \global\xfont#1#2=\csname f#1\endcsname
+    \ifnum#2=14 10 scaled\magstep2
+    \else\ifnum#2=12 10 scaled\magstep1
+    \else\ifnum#2=11 10 scaled\magstephalf
+    \else#2\fi\fi\fi
+    \relax
+  \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\loadscaledfont}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\loadscaledfont#1#2{\global\xfont#1#2=#1 scaled #2\relax}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%    Default font is cmtt8. Note that cmtt7 and cmtt6 are not
+%    standardly available to all users.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\loadfont{typewriter}{8} % for main text
+\loadfont{bold}{10} % for titles
+\loadfont{roman}{5} % for line numbers
+\loadfont{roman}{6} % for running heads
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\mainfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mainfontsize}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\mainfont{typewriter}
+\def\mainfontsize{8}
+\csname\mainfont\mainfontsize\endcsname
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\titlefont}
+% \begin{macro}{\titlefontsize}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\titlefont{bold}
+\def\titlefontsize{10}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\linenumberfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\linenumberfontsize}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\linenumberfont{typewriter}
+\def\linenumberfontsize{8}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\pagenumberfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\pagenumberfontsize}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\pagenumberfont{bold}
+\def\pagenumberfontsize{7}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\runheadfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\runheadfontsize}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\runheadfont{roman}
+\def\runheadfontsize{7}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\runfootfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\runfootfontsize}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\runfootfont{roman}
+\def\runfootfontsize{7}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\loadfonts}
+%    \cw{loadfonts} is called just before the start of typesetting, to
+%    ensure that any needed fonts will be loaded. In fact, for maximum
+%    flexibility, it is called at the beginning of each file that is
+%    printed, so that if you use this utility in non-interactive mode
+%    with a sequence of \cw{listout} commands you could conceivably
+%    change fonts between files.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\loadfonts{\relax
+  \xp@\ifx\csname\mainfont\mainfontsize\endcsname\relax
+    \loadfont\mainfont\mainfontsize
+  \fi
+  \xp@\ifx\csname\pagenumberfont
+        \pagenumberfontsize\endcsname\relax
+    \loadfont\pagenumberfont\pagenumberfontsize
+  \fi
+  \if\printtitles
+    \xp@\ifx\csname\titlefont
+          \titlefontsize\endcsname\relax
+      \loadfont\titlefont\titlefontsize
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \if\linenumbers
+    \xp@\ifx\csname\linenumberfont
+          \linenumberfontsize\endcsname\relax
+      \loadfont\linenumberfont\linenumberfontsize
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \if\runheads
+    \xp@\ifx\csname\runheadfont
+          \runheadfontsize\endcsname\relax
+      \loadfont\runheadfont\runheadfontsize
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \if\runfeet
+    \xp@\ifx\csname\runfootfont
+          \runfootfontsize\endcsname\relax
+      \loadfont\runfootfont\runfootfontsize
+    \fi
+  \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \section{Miscellaneous}
+%
+%    Trace memory statistics to see how close to typical limits we are
+%    coming.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\tracingstats=1
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    Language with no hyphenation patterns, to inhibit hyphenation.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\ifx\undefined\language
+  \def\langnohyphens{\hyphenchar\font\m@ne}
+\else
+  \xp@\ifx\csname newlanguage\endcsname\relax
+    \def\langnohyphens{\language\@cclv}
+  \else
+    \csname newlanguage\endcsname
+      \nohyphenslanguage
+    \def\langnohyphens{%
+      \language\nohyphenslanguage}%
+  \fi
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\setupbreakingchars}
+%    Function to make the characters specified by \cw{breakingchars}
+%    active. The break penalty goes after the character.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\setupbreakingchars{%
+  \ifx\breakingchars\@empty
+    \ifx\spacebreak\@empty
+      \let\noextralinebreaks\TRUE
+    \else
+      \let\noextralinebreaks\FALSE
+    \fi
+  \else
+    \let\noextralinebreaks\FALSE
+    \def\do##1{\ifx\end##1\else
+      \xp@\actively\xp@
+      \def\csname##1\endcsname{##1\markedbreak}%
+      \xp@\do\fi}%
+    \xp@\do\breakingchars\end
+    \let\spacebreak\markedbreak
+  \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    No line breaks allowed after hyphens.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \exhyphenpenalty\@M
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\iwlos}
+%    Function to write a line to the \fn{.los} file. The argument
+%    \qarg{1} may vary in order to achieve special effects.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\iwlos#1{\immediate\write#1}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\storexmesj\losfirstline{%
+\% &\losname.los &\todaysdate &\nowtime
+\% Option settings for listout.tex.}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\addmonth}
+%    An auxiliary function to add month names to \cw{toks2}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\addmonth#1{%
+  \toks4 \xp@{#1}%
+  \edef\next{\the\toks2
+    \string\def\string#1{\the\toks4 }}%
+  \toks2 \xp@{\next}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\begingroup
+\endlinechar13 \catcode\endlinechar13
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\logoptionsettings}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\logoptionsettings#1{\begingroup%
+  \newlinechar13\relax\actively\let\^^M\relax%
+  \toks2 {}%
+  \addmonth\Jan \addmonth\Feb \addmonth\Mar%
+  \toks2 \xp@{\the\toks2\relax
+  }%
+  \addmonth\Apr \addmonth\May \addmonth\Jun%
+  \toks2 \xp@{\the\toks2\relax
+  }%
+  \addmonth\Jul \addmonth\Aug \addmonth\Sep%
+  \toks2 \xp@{\the\toks2\relax
+  }%
+  \addmonth\Oct \addmonth\Nov \addmonth\Dec%
+  \iwlos{#1}{%
+    \losfirstline
+    \the\toks2\relax
+  }%
+  \iwlos{#1}{%
+    \string\let\string\landscape=%
+      \if\landscape\string\TRUE
+      \else\string\FALSE\fi
+    \string\pawd=\the\pawd
+    \string\def\string\paperwidth{\paperwidth}
+    \string\paht=\the\paht
+    \string\def\string\paperheight{\paperheight}
+    \string\topmargin=\the\topmargin
+    \string\bottommargin=\the\bottommargin
+    \string\leftmargin=\the\leftmargin
+    \string\rightmargin=\the\rightmargin
+    \string\normalbaselineskip=%
+      \the\normalbaselineskip\string\relax
+    \string\def\string\mainfontsize{\mainfontsize}
+    \string\def\string\mainfont{\mainfont}
+    \string\chardef\string\totalcols=%
+      \number\totalcols\string\relax
+    \string\colwd=\the\colwd
+    \string\def\string\columnwidth{\columnwidth}
+    \string\let\string\dependentcolwd=%
+      \if\dependentcolwd\string\TRUE
+      \else\string\FALSE\fi
+    \string\let\string\dependentrightmargin=%
+      \if\dependentrightmargin\string\TRUE
+      \else\string\FALSE\fi
+    \string\colht=\the\colht
+    \string\def\string\columnheight{\columnheight}
+    \string\let\string\dependentcolht=%
+      \if\dependentcolht\string\TRUE
+      \else\string\FALSE\fi
+    \string\let\string\dependentbottommargin=%
+      \if\dependentbottommargin\string\TRUE
+      \else\string\FALSE\fi
+    \string\intercolspace=\the\intercolspace
+    \string\overrun=\the\overrun
+    \string\fullwd=\the\fullwd
+  }%
+  \iwlos{#1}{%
+    \string\def\string\newfileoption{%
+      \newfileoption}
+    \string\let\string\printtitles=%
+      \if\printtitles\string\TRUE
+      \else\string\FALSE\fi
+    \string\def\string\titlefont{\titlefont}
+    \string\def\string\titlefontsize{%
+      \titlefontsize}
+    \string\def\string\titlecase{\titlecase}
+    \string\def\string\datesepchar{\datesepchar}
+    \string\def\string\todaysdate{%
+      \xp@\string\todaysdate}
+    \string\def\string\nowtime{%
+      \xp@\string\nowtime}
+    \string\def\string\timesepchar{\timesepchar}
+    \string\def\string\ampmpunct{\ampmpunct}
+    \string\let\string\keepleadingzeros=%
+      \if\keepleadingzeros\string\TRUE
+      \else\string\FALSE\fi
+    \string\def\string\linenumberfontsize{%
+      \linenumberfontsize}
+    \string\def\string\linenumberfont{%
+      \linenumberfont}
+    \string\let\string\linenumbers=%
+      \if\linenumbers\string\TRUE
+      \else\string\FALSE\fi
+    \string\linenumberfreq=%
+      \number\linenumberfreq\string\relax
+    \string\def\string\pagenumberfont{%
+      \pagenumberfont}
+    \string\def\string\pagenumberfontsize{%
+      \pagenumberfontsize}
+    \string\let\string\runheads=%
+      \if\runheads\string\TRUE
+      \else\string\FALSE\fi
+    \string\runhead={\the\runhead}
+    \string\def\string\runheadfont{\runheadfont}
+    \string\def\string\runheadfontsize{%
+      \runheadfontsize}
+    \string\runheadht=\the\runheadht
+    \string\let\string\runfeet=%
+      \if\runfeet\string\TRUE\else\string\FALSE\fi
+    \string\runfoot={\the\runfoot}
+    \string\def\string\runfootfont{\runfootfont}
+    \string\def\string\runfootfontsize{%
+      \runfootfontsize}
+    \string\runfootht=\the\runfootht
+    \string\def\string\spacebreak{\spacebreak}
+    \string\def\string\breakingchars{%
+      \breakingchars}
+    \string\let\string\noextralinebreaks=%
+      \if\noextralinebreaks\string\TRUE
+      \else\string\FALSE\fi
+    \string\def\string\controlLaction{\controlLaction}
+    \string\def\string\eightbitaction{\eightbitaction}
+    \string\def\string\systemtype{\systemtype}
+    \string\def\string\losdir{\losdir}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \cw{storemesj} is use here instead of \cw{def}, to prevent
+%    potential problems from, \eg.,
+%
+%^^V \def\dirprefix{c:\test\}
+%
+%    \noindent with {\sc PC DOS} directory name ending with a backslash.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \string\storemesj\string\dirprefix{\dirprefix}
+    \string\chardef\string\spacespertab=%
+      \number\spacespertab\string\relax
+    \string\chardef\string\tabselect=%
+      \number\tabselect\string\relax
+}\endgroup}%
+\endgroup% percent to avoid catcode 12 endlinechar
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \section{Default option settings}
+%    These defaults will be used only if \fn{default.los} cannot
+%    be loaded for some reason.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% Option settings for listout.tex, 1994/11/4 15:45
+\def\Jan{January}\def\Feb{February}\def\Mar{March}\relax
+\def\Apr{April}\def\May{May}\def\Jun{June}\relax
+\def\Jul{July}\def\Aug{August}\def\Sep{September}\relax
+\def\Oct{October}\def\Nov{November}\def\Dec{December}\relax
+\let\landscape=\TRUE
+\pawd=794.96999pt
+\def\paperwidth{11in}
+\paht=614.295pt
+\def\paperheight{8.5in}
+\topmargin=18.06749pt
+\bottommargin=19.22751pt
+\leftmargin=21.68121pt
+\rightmargin=21.68121pt
+\normalbaselineskip=10.0pt\relax
+\def\mainfontsize{10}
+\def\mainfont{typewriter}
+\chardef\totalcols=2\relax
+\colwd=369.38373pt
+\def\columnwidth{369.38373pt}
+\let\dependentcolwd=\TRUE
+\let\dependentrightmargin=\TRUE
+\colht=577.0pt
+\def\columnheight{64 lines}
+\let\dependentcolht=\TRUE
+\let\dependentbottommargin=\TRUE
+\intercolspace=12.0pt
+\overrun=21.68121pt
+\fullwd=751.60756pt
+\def\newfileoption{P}
+\let\printtitles=\TRUE
+\def\titlefont{bold}
+\def\titlefontsize{10}
+\def\titlecase{none}
+\def\datesepchar{/}
+\def\todaysdate{\dateA}
+\def\nowtime{\timeB}
+\def\timesepchar{:}
+\def\ampmpunct{.}
+\let\keepleadingzeros=\TRUE
+\def\linenumberfontsize{5}
+\def\linenumberfont{roman}
+\let\linenumbers=\FALSE
+\linenumberfreq=1\relax
+\def\pagenumberfont{bold}
+\def\pagenumberfontsize{7}
+\let\runheads=\TRUE
+\runhead={\todaysdate \space \nowtime \space \hfil
+  \thisfilename \space \hfil \pagenumber }
+\def\runheadfont{roman}
+\def\runheadfontsize{7}
+\runheadht=24.0pt
+\let\runfeet=\FALSE
+\runfoot={}
+\def\runfootfont{roman}
+\def\runfootfontsize{6}
+\runfootht=24.0pt
+\def\spacebreak{\penalty \z@ }
+\def\breakingchars{}
+\let\noextralinebreaks=\FALSE
+\def\controlLaction{N}
+\def\systemtype{DOS}
+\def\losdir{}
+\storemesj\dirprefix{}
+\chardef\spacespertab=8\relax
+\chardef\tabselect=1\relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    Read in the option settings file.
+%
+%    In order to make do in narrow column width, we print a doctored
+%    version of the following source code, with a few extra line
+%    breaks thrown in. The comment at the end of the \cw{input} line,
+%    seen here on two lines, is really all on one line in the source.
+%
+%^^V \immediate\write16{%
+%^^V Reading option settings from `default.los' . . .}
+%^^V \input default.los % try entering "nul" if
+%^^V                    % file not found
+%
+%    \iffalse
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\losname{default}
+\edef\losfile{\losdir\losname.los }
+\openin15=\losfile \relax
+\ifeof15 \closein15 \expandafter\@gobbletwo
+\else
+\immediate\write16{Reading option settings from `\losname.los' . . .}
+\closein15 \fi
+\input\losfile % try entering "nul" if file not found
+\datesetup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \fi
+%
+%    Now transfer \cw{normalbaselineskip} value to \cw{baselineskip}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\normalbaselines
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \section{Test for interactive mode}
+%    If interactive mode is detected, then the possibility of entering
+%    the menu system will be offered to the user. Otherwise we will
+%    skip all the loading of the menu system, to save time and main
+%    memory.
+%
+%    If \cw{interactive} is undefined {\em and\/} \cw{jobname} does
+%    not equal \verb"listout", then we set the \cw{interactive} switch
+%    to \cw{FALSE}. Otherwise we set it to \cw{TRUE}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\ifx\undefined\interactive
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    If \cw{interactive} was not predefined, then check to see if
+%    jobname = \verb"listout". In that case assume \cw{interactive}
+%    mode is wanted.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \def\next{listout}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Convert the letters inside \cw{next} to category 12, for
+%    comparison to \cw{jobname}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \edef\next{\xmeaning\next}%
+  \edef\jobname{\jobname}%
+  \ifx\next\jobname
+    \let\interactive\TRUE
+  \else
+    \let\interactive\FALSE
+  \fi
+\else
+  \let\interactive\TRUE
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    Note that the following \cw{fi} must be on the same line as the
+%    \cw{endinput}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if\interactive
+\else \restorecatcodes \endinput \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \newpage
+% \section{Final preparations}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\printfiles}
+%    If the menu system is not needed, we want to skip all the loading
+%    of it. So we define a function \cw{printfiles} which can be
+%    executed either before or after loading the menu
+%    system. If the user doesn't choose to enter the menu system, then
+%    executing \cw{printfiles} will carry the current \tex/ run to
+%    completion and the remainder of \fn{listout.tex}, comprising all
+%    the menu system, will be ignored. Otherwise \cw{printfiles} will be
+%    called later, after leaving the menu system.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\printfiles{%\reportlayout
+  \mesj{OK, let's print some files.}%
+  \begingroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Execute and clear \cw{listoutsetup} to avoid unnecessary
+%    repetition in multiple-file runs.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \listoutsetup \let\listoutsetup\relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Prompt for file names and print files until the user enters an
+%    empty file name.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \fileloop
+  \endgroup
+  \listoutfinish
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Execute \latex/ \cw{@@end} first; if it is not defined, then \tex/
+%    will proceed to execute the other \cw{end}. This enables
+%    the \fn{listout} utility to work both with \latex/ and plain \tex/.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \csname \string @\string @end\endcsname
+  \end
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\numberoffiles}
+%    Keep track of the number of files printed so that an
+%    informational message can be sent at the end of the run.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcount\numberoffiles
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\fileloop}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\fileloop{%
+  \promptmesj{!File name? (<return> to stop): }%
+  \readline{}\reply
+  \ifx\reply\@empty
+  \else
+    \global\advance\numberoffiles 1 \relax
+  \afterfi
+    \xp@\listout\xp@{\reply}%
+    \fileloop
+  \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\DVImesj}
+%    If \cw{jobname} = \fn{listout} then the final star in the middle
+%    line will line up properly.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\fxmesj\DVImesj{%
+*******************************************************************
+*     DVI file name is \jobname.dvi                                *
+*******************************************************************}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\mesj{
+:---------------------------------------------------------------------
+:  This is listout.tex: a tool for printing out `verbatim' listings of
+:  text files with reasonably robust, and customizable, handling of
+:  overlong lines, tab characters and other special characters, number
+:  of columns, font size/line spacing, et cetera.
+:---------------------------------------------------------------------
+:  For additional information (e.g., about noninteractive use), or to
+:  change option settings, enter
+:    m   or   M
+:  to enter the listout.tex menu system. Otherwise just press the
+:  <return> key to continue:
+:}
+\message{:?: }
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    Don't put up the full menu unless it's requested. Use
+%    \cw{expandafter} to throw the \cw{printfiles} command beyond the
+%    \cw{fi}, since it will end the job.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\readChar{X}\reply
+\if M\reply \else\xp@\printfiles\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\message{Starting up the listout.tex menu system . . .}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{Menu system startup}
+%    Some of the following definitions merely reiterate defaults from
+%    \fn{menus.sty}, for the record.
+% \begin{macro}{\menuprefix}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\storexmesj\menuprefix{
+======================================================================
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\menusuffix}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\storexmesj\menusuffix{
+         Q  Quit         X  Exit        ?  Help
+======================================================================
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\inmenuA}
+% \begin{macro}{\inmenuB}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\storexmesj\inmenuA{
+}
+\storexmesj\inmenuB{
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\menuhelpmesj}
+%
+%    Add more to the standard help message defined by \fn{menus.sty}.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\fxmesj\menuhelpmesj{%
+======================================================================
+--- <return> means the carriage return, or `Enter', key.
+--- When selecting items from a menu with letter labels, you can enter
+your choice in lowercase or uppercase.
+--- A prompt that asks for `TeX units' requires in response a
+measurement using the units recognized by TeX, for example
+
+      cm  mm  in  pt  pc  dd  cc
+
+--- A response of Q will usually send you back to the previous menu.
+--- A response of X will get you entirely out of the menu system.
+======================================================================
+To continue, press the <return> key . . .}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\confirm}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\confirm#1{\xmesj{\
+* #1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\mainmenu}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\fmenu\mainmenu{
+                    MAIN  MENU
+}{
+A  Action for new files            L  Line numbers
+B  Breaking lines                  M  Margins
+C  Column width/height             N  Number of columns
+D  Date/time form                  O  Orientation
+E  Expectoration                   P  Paper size
+F  Font, line spacing              R  Running heads/feet
+G  General information             S  System info
+H  Heading/title for each file     T  Tab treatment
+I  Info about current settings     V  Various other things
+}{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\moption}
+%    The command \cw{moption} without any menu-letter suffixes is the
+%    main menu presentation function.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\moption{\mainmenu \readChar{Q}\reply
+  \let\prevmenu\@empty \let\curmenu\@empty \optionexec\reply}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \write16{Page \thepage: full menu printout begins here; you might}
+% \write16{want to omit these pages when printing, to save paper.}
+%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \subsection{Option A}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\menuA}
+%    Submenu for selecting various new file actions.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\fmenu\menuA#1{
+The various actions possible at the beginning of a new file are:
+}{
+S  Space (one line of blank space, but not a new column,
+     at the beginning of each new file)
+C  New column
+P  New page
+R  New page and right-hand column
+}{
+These options are mutually exclusive. The currently selected option
+is #1. See also option H in the main menu.
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\moptionA}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\moptionA{\menuA{\newfileoption}%
+  \readChar{Q}\reply \optionexec\reply}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\moptionAS}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\moptionAS{\def\newfileoption{S}%
+  \confirm{%
+  Each file will start immediately after the preceding file, with\
+* some intervening blank space.}%
+  \popoptions\moptionQ}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\moptionAC}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\moptionAC{\def\newfileoption{C}%
+  \confirm{%
+  Each file will start at the top of the next column.}%
+  \popoptions\moptionQ}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\moptionAP}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\moptionAP{\def\newfileoption{P}%
+  \confirm{%
+  Each file will start on a new page.}%
+  \popoptions\moptionQ}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\moptionAR}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\moptionAR{\def\newfileoption{R}%
+  \confirm{%
+  Each file will start on a new page, in the right-hand column.}
+  \popoptions\moptionQ}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \subsection{Option B}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\menuBtest}
+%    Line breaking.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\menuBtest{%
+  \ifx\spacebreak\@empty
+    \ifx\breakingchars\@empty
+Long lines will not be broken.%
+    \else
+Extra line breaks will be allowed after the characters\
+\
+\ \ \ \ \ \breakingchars\
+      \ifdim\overrun=\z@
+      \else\
+(with overrun of \the\overrun\space allowed).%
+      \fi
+    \fi
+  \else
+    \ifx\breakingchars\@empty
+Extra line breaks will be allowed at spaces.%
+    \else
+Extra line breaks will be allowed at spaces and\
+after the characters\
+\
+\ \ \ \ \ \breakingchars\
+    \fi
+    \ifdim\overrun=\z@
+    \else\
+(with overrun of \the\overrun\space allowed).%
+    \fi
+  \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\menuB}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\fxmenu\menuB{
+Files being printed sometimes contain unusually long lines.
+You can choose the action that will be taken for overlong lines:
+}{
+N  No line breaking allowed
+S  Allow breaks at spaces only
+C  Allow line breaks at other characters
+O  Change the overrun amount
+}{
+Current setting: &\menuBtest
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\moptionB}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\moptionB{\lettermenu{B}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\moptionBS}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\moptionBS{%
+  \let\spacebreak\markedbreak \let\breakingchars\@empty
+  \overrun\rightmargin \let\noextralinebreaks\FALSE
+  \confirm{\menuBtest}\popoptions\moptionQ
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\moptionBN}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\moptionBN{%
+  \let\spacebreak\@empty \let\breakingchars\@empty
+  \overrun=\rightmargin
+  \confirm{\menuBtest}\popoptions\moptionQ
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\moptionBO}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\moptionBO{%
+  \promptmesj{Desired overrun value [TeX units] ? }%
+  \readline{Q}\reply
+  \if\xoptiontest\reply
+  \else
+    \checkdimen\reply\dimen@
+    \ifdim\dimen@=-\maxdimen
+    \else
+      \overrun\reply\relax
+      \confirm{New overrun value = \the\overrun.}%
+      \def\reply{Q}%
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \optionexec\reply
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\moptionBC}
+%    One reason for automatically adding the space character to the
+%    list of breaking chars is that otherwise we would have to caution
+%    the user against typing the space at the end of the line when
+%    responding to the prompt; since \tex/ removes character 32 at the
+%    end of a line, we have no way of finding out whether one was
+%    typed there or not.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\moptionBC{%
+  \xmesj{%
+Enter a list of characters. Line breaks will be allowed after any\
+character in the list.\
+Note: if this list is nonempty breaks will be allowed at spaces,\
+even if you didn't include a space in the list.}%
+  \readline{}\breakingchars
+  \ifx\@empty\breakingchars
+  \else \let\spacebreak\markedbreak\fi
+  \let\noextralinebreaks\FALSE
+  \overrun=\rightmargin
+  \confirm{\menuBtest}%
+  \popoptions\moptionQ
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \subsection{Option C}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\menuC}
+%    \cw{columnwidth} is the value as originally given, including the
+%    original units; may be a dimension variable or a character
+%    string. The corresponding internal variable is \cw{colwd}. If we
+%    did not maintain \cw{columnwidth} separately from \cw{colwd}, we
+%    could not later echo the original units on-screen to the user,
+%    since that information is lost in the act of storing the width in
+%    \cw{colwd}. Similarly for \cw{columnheight}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\fxmenu\menuC{
+Column width is normally computed automatically, from the specified
+paper width, number of columns, margins, and intercolumn space.
+However, if you provide an explicit value for column width it will
+be used and the right margin will be adjusted as necessary.
+Similarly, column height is computed automatically from the
+paper height and the top and bottom margins, unless you provide an
+explicit value.
+}{
+W  Change column width
+H  Change column height
+I  Change intercolumn space
+}{
+Current column width: &\columnwidth.
+Current column height: &\columnheight.
+Current intercolumn space: &\the&\intercolspace.
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\moptionC}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\moptionC{\lettermenu C}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\moptionCW}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\moptionCW{%
+  \xmesj{%
+For width in characters, enter just a number; otherwise enter a\
+measurement using standard TeX units. To revert to automatic computing\
+of the column width, give an empty reply (i.e., just press <return>).}%
+  \message{Column width: }%
+  \readline{}\reply
+  \ifx\reply\@empty
+    \let\dependentcolwd\TRUE
+    \if\dependentrightmargin \computerfc \else \computefc \fi
+    \def\reply{A}% report new value through \moptionCWA
+  \fi
+  \if\xoptiontest\reply
+  \else
+    \checkdimen\reply\dimen@
+    \ifdim\dimen@=-\maxdimen
+      \checkinteger\reply\count@
+      \ifnum\count@=-\maxdimen
+      \else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    A misspelled unit name, \eg. {\tt im} instead of {\tt in}, will
+%    lead to this branch; maybe we should try to check whether the
+%    answer contained letters after the digits and if so attempt an
+%    explanation about possibly misspelled unit name. On the other
+%    hand maybe that's too much work.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \colwd.5em \multiply\colwd\count@\relax
+        \edef\columnwidth{\the\count@\space characters}%
+        \let\dependentcolwd\FALSE
+        \def\reply{A}%
+      \fi
+    \else
+      \colwd\dimen@ \let\columnwidth\reply \let\dependentcolwd\FALSE
+      \def\reply{B}%
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \optionexec\reply
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\moptionCWA}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\moptionCWA{%
+  \confirm{Column width set to \columnwidth.}%
+  \popoptions\moptionQ}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\moptionCWB}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\moptionCWB{%
+  \confirm{Column width set to \columnwidth\space (= \the\colwd)}%
+  \popoptions\moptionQ}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\moptionCH}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\moptionCH{%
+  \xmesj{%
+For height in lines, enter just a number; otherwise enter a\
+measurement using standard TeX units. To revert to automatic computing\
+of the column height, give an empty reply (i.e., just press <return>).}%
+  \message{Column height: }%
+  \readline{}\reply
+  \ifx\reply\@empty
+    \let\dependentcolht\TRUE
+    \if\dependentbottommargin \computebc \else \computec \fi
+    \def\reply{A}% report new value through \moptionCWA
+  \fi
+  \if\xoptiontest\reply
+  \else
+    \checkdimen\reply\dimen@
+    \ifdim\dimen@=-\maxdimen
+      \checkinteger\reply\count@
+      \ifnum\count@=-\maxdimen
+      \else
+        \let\dependentcolht\FALSE
+        \colht\baselineskip \multiply\colht\count@
+        \advance\colht -\baselineskip \advance\colht\topskip
+        \computeb
+        \edef\columnheight{\the\count@\space lines}%
+        \def\reply{A}%
+      \fi
+    \else
+      \colht\dimen@ \let\columnheight\reply
+      \let\dependentcolht\FALSE \computeb
+      \def\reply{B}%
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \optionexec\reply
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\moptionCHA}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\moptionCHA{%
+  \confirm{Column height set to \columnheight.\
+* (Bottom margin adjusted to \the\bottommargin.)}%
+  \popoptions\moptionQ}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\moptionCHB}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\moptionCHB{%
+  \confirm{Column height set to \columnheight\space (= \the\colht)\
+* (Bottom margin adjusted to \the\bottommargin.)}%
+  \popoptions\moptionQ}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\moptionCI}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\moptionCI{%
+  \promptmesj{Enter desired intercolumn space [TeX units]: }%
+  \readline{Q}\reply
+  \ifx\optiontest\reply
+  \else
+    \checkdimen\reply\dimen@
+    \ifdim\dimen@=-\maxdimen
+    \else
+      \intercolspace=\dimen@
+      \confirm{%
+Intercolumn space set to \reply\space (= \the\intercolspace).}%
+      \if\linenumbers\ifdim\intercolspace<12\p@
+      \confirm{\
+* Warning: small intercolumn space, might not be big enough\
+* for line numbers to fit ...}%
+      \fi\fi
+      \def\reply{Q}%
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \optionexec\reply
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \subsection{Option D}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\menuD}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\fxmenu\menuD{}{
+D  Change date format
+S  Change separator character
+Z  &\if&\keepleadingzeros\.Omit&\else\.Add&\fi %
+leading zeros in the day and month
+T  Change time format
+}{
+Current date and time format is `&\todaysdate &\nowtime'.
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\moptionD}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\moptionD{\lettermenu D}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\menuDD}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\fxmenu\menuDD{
+Date options:
+}{
+A  &\dateA
+B  &\dateB
+C  &\dateC
+D  &\dateD
+E  &\dateE
+F  &\dateF
+G  &\dateG
+H  &\dateH
+I  &\dateI
+J  &\dateJ
+}{
+Current date format is &\todaysdate.
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\moptionDD}
+%
+%    Valid responses to this menu are \qc{\A}--\qc{\J}, \qc{\Q},
+%    \qc{\X}, or \qc{\?}. Rather than define submenus \cw{moptionDDA},
+%    \cw{moptionDDB}, \ldots, we use \tex/'s \verb'`'\meta{character}
+%    feature to convert the character in \cw{reply} to a number, so
+%    that a simple numeric test can be used to see if the reply is in
+%    range.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\moptionDD{\menuDD \readChar{Q}\reply
+  \count@=\xp@`\reply\relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    A = 65 \ascii/, J = 74 \ascii/
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \ifnum\count@>64 \ifnum\count@<75
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    We use \cw{def} rather than \cw{let} here so that we can record
+%    the current date format in the \fn{.los} file with
+%    \cw{expandafter}\cw{string} (see \cw{logoptionsettings}).
+%    Otherwise we would probably have to use a separate variable just
+%    to keep track of the date format letter.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \xp@\def\xp@\todaysdate\xp@{\csname date\reply\endcsname}%
+    \confirm{New date form: \todaysdate}%
+    \def\reply{Q}%
+  \fi\fi
+  \optionexec\reply
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\moptionDS}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\moptionDS{\promptmesj{!%
+Current separator character between the parts of a date is
+`\datesepchar'.!%
+New separator: }%
+  \readchar{}\reply
+  \if Q\reply
+    \confirm{Date separator char unchanged.}%
+  \else
+    \if ?\reply
+    \else
+      \if X\reply
+        \confirm{Date separator char unchanged.}%
+      \else
+        \let\datesepchar\reply
+        \confirm{New date format: \todaysdate.}%
+        \def\reply{Q}%
+      \fi
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \optionexec\reply
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\moptionDZ}
+%\mjd{Maybe date-time-reset doesn't need to do \themonth,\theday?}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\moptionDZ{%
+  \if\keepleadingzeros
+    \let\keepleadingzeros\FALSE
+    \edef\themonth{\number\month}\edef\theday{\number\day}%
+  \else
+    \let\keepleadingzeros\TRUE
+    \edef\themonth{\twodigits\month}\edef\theday{\twodigits\day}%
+  \fi
+  \confirm{Leading zeros will
+    \if\keepleadingzeros NOT \else \fi
+    be omitted in day and month numbers}%
+  \def\reply{Q}\optionexec\reply
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\menuDT}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\fxmenu\menuDT{
+Time format options:
+}{
+A  &\timeA (HoursMinutes, 24-hour cycle)
+B  &\timeB (Hours:Minutes, 24-hour cycle)
+C  &\timeC (12-hour cycle)
+D  &\timeD
+E  &\timeE
+F  &\timeF
+}{
+Current time format is &\nowtime.
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\moptionDT}
+%    If the user's reply to the time menu is one of the valid letters
+%    (A\ndash F), we define \cw{nowtime} to be \cw{timeX}, where {\tt
+%    X} represents the reply letter.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\moptionDT{\menuDT \readChar{Q}\reply
+  \if A\if B\reply A\else\if C\reply A\else\if D\reply A\else
+       \if E\reply A\else\if F\reply A\else\reply\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+    \xp@\def\xp@\nowtime\xp@{\csname time\reply\endcsname}%
+    \def\reply{Z}%
+  \fi
+  \optionexec\reply
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\moptionDTZ}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\moptionDTZ{\confirm{New time format: \nowtime}%
+  \popoptions\moptionQ}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \subsection{Option E}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\menuE}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\fmenu\menuE{
+This option allows you to save all the current option settings in a
+file for later reuse. If you use the file name `default.los' the saved
+settings will be used as defaults for future runs. Or you can use
+different file names to have multiple saved sets of option settings.
+}{
+S  Save settings
+L  Load saved settings from file
+D  Specify a default directory/folder for .los files
+}{
+The last option allows you to specify a location if you want to
+keep listout.tex and all its .los files in a particular directory or
+folder. This works best if the given location is one searched
+automatically by TeX (e.g., by being included in the `TeX inputs path').
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\moptionE}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\moptionE{\lettermenu{E}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\losname}
+% \begin{macro}{\losdir}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\losname{default}
+\def\losdir{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+
+% \begin{macro}{\lossorrymessage}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\lossorrymessage{\message{%
+? Could not create `\losdir\losname.los';
+maybe there was a system problem.}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\currentdir}
+%    Default for \cw{currentdir} is empty, to avoid creating problems
+%    for less-knowledgeable users.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\currentdir{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\moptionES}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\moptionES{\xmesj{\
+Enter the desired file name. The default name (if you just press the\
+<return> key) is `default'. A file extension `.los' will be added\
+automatically:}%
+  \readline{default}\reply
+  \edef\losname{\reply}%
+  \def\next##1.los##2##3\next{\ifx\relax##2\else
+    \def\losname{##1}\fi}
+  \xp@\next\losname.los\relax\next
+  \confirm{%
+File name: `\losname.los' ---OK? If not, enter n or N to cancel:}%
+  \readChar{Y}\reply
+  \if Y\reply
+    \edef\losfirstline{\xp@\@gobble\string
+\% Option settings for listout.tex, \todaysdate\space\nowtime}%
+    \immediate\openout15=\losdir\losname.los \relax
+    \logoptionsettings{15}%
+    \immediate\closeout15 \relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Check to make sure the file was created.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \openin15=\losdir\losname.los \relax
+    \ifeof15 \lossorrymessage
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    If \fn{xxxxx.los} exists and is nonempty, it's still not certain
+%    that we have not opened some other file named \fn{xxxxx.los}, such
+%    as a default version located somewhere else in the tex-inputs
+%    search path. We check this possibility by looking at the first
+%    line, which has embedded the date and time of the \tex/ run that
+%    produced the file.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \else \testlocation \fi
+    \closein15 \relax
+  \fi
+  \popoptions\moptionQ
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\testlocation}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\testlocation{%
+  \begingroup
+    \catcode`\%=12 \catcode`\\=12 \catcode\endlinechar=9
+    \read15 to\next
+    \ifx\next\losfirstline
+      \confirm{%
+New `\losname.los' file successfully created}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    There is one other possibility left to be checked: if the current
+%    directory is excluded from the tex-inputs search path  (\eg.,
+%    under Unix typically `\qc{\.}' must be explicitly included in the
+%    search path to always have the current directory searched) then
+%    it is possible that the option settings file will be created OK
+%    but will not be accessible to \fn{listout.tex} through \cw{input}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+      \ifx\losdir\@empty
+        \testinputtable
+      \else
+        \message{%
+(in location `\losdir')}%
+      \fi
+    \else
+      \lossorrymessage
+    \fi
+  \endgroup
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\testinputtable}
+%    This function tests if the \fn{.los} file written to the default
+%    directory is inputtable. The method is to make the percent
+%    character temporarily active (there is a
+%    \cw{begingroup}\ldots\cw{endgroup} pair enclosing the
+%    \cw{testinputtable} call) and define it to read the first line of
+%    the \fn{.los} file, compare it to the expected string, and issue
+%    a warning message if it doesn't match.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\testinputtable{%
+  \actively\def\%##1@{%
+    \edef\next{\xp@\@gobble\string\%##1}%
+    \ifx\next\losfirstline
+    \else
+      \message{%
+... but guess what: it seems to be inaccessible for \nx@\input by TeX%
+      }%
+    \fi
+    \endinput}%
+  \endlinechar`\@ \relax
+  \input\losname.los \relax
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\moptionEL}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\moptionEL{\xmesj{\
+Enter the name of the desired option file:}%
+  \readline{}\reply
+  \ifx\@empty\reply
+  \else
+    \def\next##1.los##2##3\next{\ifx\relax##2\else
+      \def\reply{##1}\fi}
+    \xp@\next\reply.los\relax\next
+    \xmesj{\
+Attempting to load \reply.los . . .}%
+    \input\reply.los\space\relax
+  \fi
+  \def\reply{Q}\optionexec\reply
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\moptionED}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\moptionED{\xmesj{\
+Current location name is `\losdir'.\
+Enter a new location name (directory or folder or whatever, depending\
+on your system). For Unix or DOS, make sure you include the final\
+slash. (For DOS, use slashes instead of backslashes.) Just press\
+<return> if you want to leave the current location unchanged:}%
+  \readline{}\reply
+  \ifx\@empty\reply
+  \else
+    \let\losdir\reply
+    \confirm{Location name is now: `\losdir'}%
+  \fi
+  \def\reply{Q}\optionexec\reply
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \subsection{Option F}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\menuF}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\fxmenu\menuF{}{
+F  Change font
+S  Change font size
+L  Change line spacing
+T  Test font availability
+N  Add new font
+}{
+Current settings: &\mainfont &\mainfontsize / &\the&\baselineskip.
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\moptionF}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\moptionF{\lettermenu F}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\genfontmenu}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\fxmenu\genfontmenu{
+&\firstpart
+Font choices:
+}{
+R  Roman
+B  Bold
+I  Italic
+T  Typewriter
+S  Sans serif
+}{
+Current choice is `&\fonttoget'.
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\getfont}
+%    \cw{getfont} is a higher-level function to call \cw{genfontmenu}.
+%    The arguments required by \cw{getfont} are \qarg{1} font style
+%    control sequence, \ie. something like \cw{linenumberfont} whose
+%    definition is `bold' or `italic' or `typewriter'; \qarg{2} text to
+%    add above the basic list of font choices, \qarg{3} font description
+%    such as `Main' or `Line number'.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\getfont#1#2#3{%
+  \let\fonttoget#1\def\firstpart{#2}%
+  \genfontmenu \readChar{Q}\reply
+  \edef\next{\if R\reply roman%
+             \else\if B\reply bold%
+             \else\if I\reply italic%
+             \else\if S\reply sansserif%
+             \else\if T\reply typewriter%
+             \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}%
+  \ifx\next\@empty
+  \else
+    \let#1\next \def\reply{Q}%
+    \confirm{#3 font is now `#1'.}%
+  \fi
+  \optionexec\reply
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\moptionFF}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\moptionFF{\getfont\mainfont{%
+Note: Font style `typewriter' is recommended for printing computer\
+program code verbatim because the character set of most non-typewriter\
+fonts lacks certain characters such as { } | \string~ and \\ .}%
+{Main}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\wholepointsizes}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\fmesj\wholepointsizes{
+Note: Currently only whole point sizes are supported; the fractional
+part in a fractional point size will be ignored. If a font/size
+combination is not available on your system there will be an error
+message later on when we try to load the font.
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\getfontsize}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\getfontsize#1#2{\wholepointsizes
+  \mesj{Current #2 font size is #1.}%
+  \promptmesj{Desired font size? }%
+  \readline{Q}\reply
+  \if\xoptiontest\reply
+  \else
+    \checkinteger\reply\count@
+    \ifnum\count@>\z@
+      \edef#1{\the\count@}%
+      \confirm{New font size for #2: #1}%
+      \def\reply{Q}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    No \cw{else} branch here: If $\cw{count@}=0$, leave \cw{reply}
+%    unchanged. This will lead to a `don't understand' message and a
+%    repeat of the same menu.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \optionexec\reply
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\moptionFS}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\moptionFS{\getfontsize\mainfontsize{main text}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\moptionFL}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\moptionFL{\promptmesj{Desired line spacing [TeX units] ? }%
+  \readline{Q}\reply
+  \if\xoptiontest\reply
+  \else
+    \checkdimen\reply\dimen@
+    \ifdim\dimen@>\z@
+      \normalbaselineskip\dimen@\relax \normalbaselines
+      \confirm{New line spacing: \the\normalbaselineskip}%
+      \def\reply{Q}%
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \optionexec\reply
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\menuFT}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\fxmenu\menuFT{
+Font to test load?
+}{
+M  main font
+T  title font
+L  line number font
+P  page number font
+H  running head font
+F  running foot font
+A  all of the above
+}{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\moptionFT}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\moptionFT{\menuFT
+  \readChar{Q}\reply
+  \if M\reply
+    \testload\mainfont\mainfontsize
+    \def\reply{Q}%
+  \else\if T\reply
+    \testload\titlefont\titlefontsize
+    \def\reply{Q}%
+  \else\if L\reply
+    \testload\linenumberfont\linenumberfontsize
+    \def\reply{Q}%
+  \else\if P\reply
+    \testload\pagenumberfont\pagenumberfontsize
+    \def\reply{Q}%
+  \else\if H\reply
+    \testload\runheadfont\runheadfontsize
+    \def\reply{Q}%
+  \else\if F\reply
+    \testload\runfootfont\runfootfontsize
+    \def\reply{Q}%
+  \else\if A\reply
+    \testload\mainfont\mainfontsize
+    \testload\pagenumberfont\pagenumberfontsize
+    \testload\titlefont\titlefontsize
+    \testload\linenumberfont\linenumberfontsize
+    \testload\runheadfont\runheadfontsize
+    \testload\runfootfont\runfootfontsize
+    \def\reply{Q}%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+  \optionexec\reply
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\testload}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\testload#1#2{\loadfont#1#2\relax
+  \xp@\ifx\csname#1#2\endcsname\nullfont
+    \confirm{Unsuccessful font load...}%
+  \else
+    \confirm{Font successfully loaded.}%
+  \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\menuFN}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\fxmesj\menuFN{
+To use a custom font you must give two pieces of information: the
+name of the font metrics file (.tfm file), not including the .tfm
+extension, and a magnification (using TeX's standard notation: 1000 =
+100\%, 1200 = 120\%, ...).
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\moptionFN}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\moptionFN{\menuFN
+  \promptmesj{OK, first give the font name: }%
+  \readline{Q}\reply
+  \if\xoptiontest\reply
+  \else
+    \let\mainfont\reply
+    \def\reply{Q}%
+    \promptmesj{Font magnification? [default=1000]: }%
+    \readline{1000}\reply
+    \if\xoptiontest\reply
+    \else
+      \checkinteger\reply\count@
+      \ifnum\count@>100 %
+        \let\mainfontsize\reply
+        \def\reply{Q}%
+      \fi
+    \fi
+    \xmesj{\
+Attempting to load new font `\mainfont\ scaled \mainfontsize'; if you\
+get an error message, press RETURN to continue, and try again.\
+    }%
+  \testload\mainfont\mainfontsize
+  \fi
+  \optionexec\reply
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \subsection{Option G}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\menuGa}
+% \begin{macro}{\menuGb}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\fmesj\menuGa{
+:  General information on a couple of subjects:
+:
+:  ---Non-interactive usage: Create a driver file containing
+:
+:   \input listout
+:   %    Change options here, if desired
+:   \listout{first.file}
+:   \listout{second.file}
+:   ...
+:   \listoutfinish
+:   \end
+:
+:  The \listoutfinish command is required to support the possibility
+:  where multiple files are printed running together without intervening
+:  page breaks. To find out how to change options, look at the file
+:  default.los.
+:
+:  Press <return> to continue . . .}
+%
+\fmesj\menuGb{
+:  ---Treatment of control characters and eight-bit characters: The
+:  default behavior is to assume no knowledge about the meaning of
+:  characters in the range 0--31 and 127--255, because depending on the
+:  source, the intended meaning of one of these characters in a given
+:  file can vary widely. And the default main font (cmtt) can't handle
+:  characters above 127 anyway. In order to preserve vertical alignment
+:  when printing with a monospace font (the usual case) control
+:  characters aren't printed as multicharacter sequences (e.g. ^^F), but
+:  as boxed letters. The first control character encountered in a file
+:  will generate a warning/explanatory message on screen. Similarly,
+:  characters above ASCII 126 are printed simply as boxed question
+:  marks. This behavior can be overridden by changing the main font to a
+:  256-character font and choosing the 8-bit option in the V menu.
+:
+:  Press <return> to continue . . .}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\moptionG}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\moptionG{\menuGa\readline{}\reply\menuGb\readline{}\reply \moptionQ}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \subsection{Option H}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\menuH}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\fxmenu\menuH{}{
+T  Turn filename titles&\if&\printtitles off&\else on&\fi
+F  Change font of titles
+S  Change font size
+C  Change capitalization
+}{
+Current settings: %
+&\titlefont &\titlefontsize, capitalization = &\titlecase.
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\moptionH}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\moptionH{\lettermenu H}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\moptionHT}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\moptionHT{%
+  \if\printtitles \let\printtitles\FALSE
+  \else \let\printtitles\TRUE \fi
+  \confirm{%
+The name of each file \if\printtitles WILL \else will NOT \fi
+be printed as a title at the\
+* beginning of the file.
+}%
+  \if\printtitles\else\popoptions\fi
+  \moptionQ
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\moptionHF}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\moptionHF{\getfont\titlefont{}{Title}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\moptionHS}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\moptionHS{\getfontsize\titlefontsize{titles}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\menuHC}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\fxmenu\menuHC{
+Title capitalization choices:
+}{
+N  None
+L  Lowercase
+U  Uppercase
+}{
+Current choice is &\titlecase.
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\moptionHC}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\moptionHC{\menuHC \readChar{Q}\reply
+  \if L\reply
+    \def\titlecase{lowercase}%
+    \confirm{Capitalization is now: lowercase.}%
+    \def\reply{Q}%
+  \else\if U\reply
+    \def\titlecase{uppercase}%
+    \confirm{Capitalization is now: uppercase.}%
+    \def\reply{Q}%
+  \else\if N\reply
+    \def\titlecase{none}%
+    \confirm{Capitalization is now: none.}%
+    \def\reply{Q}%
+  \fi\fi\fi
+  \optionexec\reply}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \subsection{Option I}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\menuIa}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\fxmesj\menuIa{
+Current option settings:
+Orientation: &\if&\landscape landscape&\else portrait&\fi
+Paper size: &\paperwidth x &\paperheight (&\the\pawd x &\the\paht)
+Margins: Top &\the\topmargin, bottom &\the\bottommargin,
+  left &\the\leftmargin, right &\the\rightmargin
+&\number\totalcols columns, column width = &\columnwidth (&\the\colwd),
+Column height: &\columnheight (&\the\colht)
+Intercolumn space: &\the\intercolspace
+Full width of text area: &\the\fullwd
+Main font: &\mainfont &\mainfontsize
+Linespacing: &\the\normalbaselineskip
+Each new file starts%
+&\if\.S&\newfileoption%
+ immediately after the previous file.
+&\else&\if\.C&\newfileoption%
+ at the top of a new column.
+&\else&\if\.P&\newfileoption%
+ on a new page.
+&\else&\if\.R&\newfileoption%
+ on the right-hand-side of a new page.
+&\else ??? unknown.
+&\fi&\fi&\fi&\fi%
+File names are &\if&\printtitles&\else\.not&\fi%
+  printed as titles at the beginning of each file.
+&\if&\printtitles%
+File name font: &\titlefont &\titlefontsize
+File name capitalization: &\titlecase
+&\fi%
+Date and time print in the form &\todaysdate and &\nowtime.
+Line numbers are turned%
+&\if&\linenumbers ON, font &\linenumberfont &\linenumberfontsize,
+  every &\number\linenumberfreq line%
+&\ifnum&\linenumberfreq=1 &\else s&\fi
+&\else OFF&\fi
+Press <return> to continue: }
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\menuIb}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\fxmesj\menuIb{
+Page number font: &\pagenumberfont&\pagenumberfontsize
+Running heads are turned &\if&\runheads ON:
+  &\the\runhead,
+  font &\runheadfont &\runheadfontsize,
+  runhead takes up &\the\runheadht from column height.
+&\else OFF &\fi
+Running feet are turned &\if&\runfeet ON:
+  &\the\runfoot,
+  font &\runfootfont &\runfootfontsize,
+  runfoot takes up &\the\runfootht from column height.
+&\else OFF &\fi
+Tabs are printed &\number\spacespertab characters wide, %
+in style `&\tabstyle'.
+&\if&\noextralinebreaks%
+Line breaks are preserved exactly as in the original file.
+&\else%
+Extra line breaks are allowed at spaces and/or other characters.
+Text is allowed to overrun right margin by &\the\overrun.
+&\fi%
+Control-L is defined to &\if\.N&\controlLaction%
+end the current column.
+&\else print as &\if\.L&\controlLaction%
+a one-line vertical space.
+&\else%
+a boxed L.
+&\fi&\fi%
+System type is set to &\systemtype.
+Directory for .los files: &\losdir
+Directory prefix for file name titles: &\dirprefix
+Press <return> to continue: }
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\moptionI}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\moptionI{\menuIa \readline{}\reply \menuIb
+  \readChar{Q}\reply \optionexec\reply}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \subsection{Option L}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\menuL}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\fxmenu\menuL{}{
+T  Turn line numbers&\if&\linenumbers off&\else on&\fi
+F  Change font of line numbers
+S  Change font size of line numbers
+N  Change numbering frequency
+}{&\if&\linenumbers
+Current settings: &\linenumberfont &\linenumberfontsize, %
+numbering every&\ifnum&\linenumberfreq=1 line%
+&\else &\the&\linenumberfreq lines&\fi.%
+&\fi%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\moptionL}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\moptionL{\lettermenu L}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\moptionLT}
+%    When line numbering is toggled off, pop back up to the main menu.
+%    But when line numbering is turned on, redisplay menu L in case
+%    the user wants next to change the font or numbering frequency.
+%    Also check \cw{leftmargin} (and \cw{intercolspace}, if
+%    $\cw{totalcols}>1$) to see if they seem likely to provide enough
+%    room.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\moptionLT{%
+  \if\linenumbers
+    \let\linenumbers\FALSE
+  \else
+    \let\linenumbers\TRUE
+  \fi
+  \confirm{Line numbers are switched \if\linenumbers on\else off\fi.}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    This \cw{if} statement must be near the bogglitude record for \tex/
+%    conditionals.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \if\if\linenumbers\ifdim\leftmargin<12\p@ T
+       \else\ifnum\totalcols>\@ne
+          \ifdim\intercolspace<12\p@ T\else F\fi
+        \else F\fi\fi\else F\fi T%
+      \confirm{\
+* You might want to check the left margin and/or intercolspace\
+* to make sure there's enough room for the line numbers.}%
+  \else\popoptions\fi
+  \moptionQ
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\moptionLF}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\moptionLF{\getfont\linenumberfont{}{Line number}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\moptionLS}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\moptionLS{\getfontsize\linenumberfontsize{line numbers}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\moptionLN}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\moptionLN{%
+  \xmesj{%
+Current line numbering frequency is every
+\ifnum\linenumberfreq=1 line%
+\else\ \number\linenumberfreq\ lines\fi.\
+New line numbering frequency? (1 = every line, 2 = every 2 lines,\
+and so forth):}%
+  \readline{Q}\reply
+  \if\xoptiontest\reply
+  \else
+    \checkinteger\reply\count@
+    \ifnum\count@>\z@
+      \linenumberfreq=\count@
+      \confirm{New line numbering frequency: \the\linenumberfreq}%
+      \def\reply{Q}%
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \optionexec\reply
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \subsection{Option M}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\menuM}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\fxmenu\menuM{
+Current margin settings: top &\the&\topmargin, left &\the&\leftmargin,
+bottom &\the&\bottommargin, right &\the&\rightmargin.
+}{
+L  Change left margin
+T  Change top margin
+B  Change bottom margin
+R  Change right margin
+}{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\moptionM}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\moptionM{\lettermenu M}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\menuMB}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\fxmesj\menuMB#1{
+Current bottom margin is #1.
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+If you specify a new bottom margin, column height will be recomputed to
+come as close as possible to the desired value (nearest integer multiple
+of line spacing), taking the currently specified paper height and top
+margin into consideration. To revert to automatic computing of bottom
+margin, give an empty reply (i.e., just press the <return> key).
+Otherwise enter a measurement using TeX units:}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\moptionMB}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\moptionMB{\menuMB{\the\bottommargin}%
+  \readline{}\reply
+  \ifx\@empty\reply
+    \let\dependentbottommargin\TRUE
+    \if\dependentcolht
+      \computebc
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Otherwise \cw{bottommargin} should already have the correct value,
+%    no extra computation needed.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \fi
+    \def\reply{Q}%
+  \else
+    \if\xoptiontest\reply
+    \else
+      \checkdimen\reply\dimen@
+      \ifdim\dimen@=-\maxdimen % not a valid dimension
+      \else
+        \bottommargin\dimen@
+        \computec
+        \confirm{New column height: \the\colht\
+* New bottom margin: \the\bottommargin}%
+        \def\reply{Q}%
+      \fi
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \optionexec\reply
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\menuML}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\fxmesj\menuML#1{
+Current left margin is #1 (measured from the left edge of the
+paper to the left edge of the text).
+<return> to keep the current value, or enter a new value:}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\moptionML}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\moptionML{\menuML{\the\leftmargin}%
+  \readline{Q}\reply
+  \if\xoptiontest\reply
+  \else
+    \checkdimen\reply\dimen@
+    \ifdim\dimen@=-\maxdimen
+    \else
+      \leftmargin\dimen@
+      \confirm{New left margin: \the\leftmargin}%
+      \if\linenumbers\ifdim\leftmargin<12\p@
+      \confirm{\
+* Warning: small left margin, might not be big enough for line\
+* numbers to fit ...}%
+      \fi\fi
+      \def\reply{Q}%
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \optionexec\reply
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\menuMR}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\fxmesj\menuMR#1{
+Current right margin is #1 (measured from the right edge of the
+paper to the right edge of the text). To revert to automatic
+computation of the right margin, give an empty reply; or enter a new
+value using TeX units (or enter Q or X or ? to quit/exit/get-help).
+New right margin:}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\moptionMR}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\moptionMR{\menuMR{\the\rightmargin}%
+  \readline{}\reply
+  \ifx\@empty\reply
+    \let\dependentrightmargin\TRUE
+    \rightmargin=\leftmargin
+    \confirm{New right margin: \the\rightmargin}%
+    \def\reply{Q}%
+  \fi
+  \if\xoptiontest\reply
+  \else
+    \checkdimen\reply\dimen@
+    \ifdim\dimen@=-\maxdimen
+    \else
+      \rightmargin\dimen@
+      \confirm{New right margin: \the\rightmargin}%
+      \let\dependentrightmargin\FALSE
+      \def\reply{Q}%
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \optionexec\reply
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\menuMT}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\fxmesj\menuMT#1{
+Current top margin is #1 (measured from the top edge of the
+paper to the top of the running head or the text).
+<return> to keep the current value, or enter a new value:}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\moptionMT}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\moptionMT{\menuMT{\the\topmargin}%
+  \readline{Q}\reply
+  \if\xoptiontest\reply
+  \else
+    \checkdimen\reply\dimen@
+    \ifdim\dimen@=-\maxdimen
+    \else
+      \topmargin\dimen@
+      \confirm{New top margin: \the\topmargin}%
+      \def\reply{Q}%
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \optionexec\reply
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \subsection{Option N}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\menuN}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\fxmesj\menuN#1{
+Number of columns: #1.
+<return> to keep the current value, or enter a new value
+(a number greater than 0):}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\moptionN}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\moptionN{\menuN{\number\totalcols}%
+  \readline{Q}\reply
+  \if\xoptiontest\reply
+  \else
+    \checkinteger\reply\count@
+    \ifnum\count@=-\maxdimen
+    \else
+      \if\ifnum\count@>\z@
+         \ifnum\count@<\sixt@@n T\else F\fi\else F\fi T%
+        \chardef\totalcols=\count@
+        \if\dependentcolwd
+          \if\dependentrightmargin \computerfc \else \computefc \fi
+        \else
+          \computefr
+        \fi
+        \confirm{%
+  Number of columns: \number\totalcols\space
+  (column width: \the\colwd, %
+\ifnum\totalcols>\@ne intercolumn space: \the\intercolspace,\
+* \fi total width: \the\fullwd)}
+        \def\reply{Q}%
+      \else
+        \ifnum\count@>20
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    The \cw{specialhelp} function defines its first argument (in this
+%    case, \cw{reply}) to be \qc{\?} and locally redefines
+%    \cw{menuhelpmesj} to substitute the given text.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+          \specialhelp\reply
+            {Maximum number of columns is 20, sorry...}%
+        \else
+          \specialhelp\reply
+            {Number of columns must be greater than 0}%
+        \fi
+      \fi
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \optionexec\reply
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \subsection{Option O}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\menuO}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\fxmenu\menuO{
+Current orientation: &\if&\landscape\.landscape.&\else\.portrait&\fi
+}{
+P  Switch to portrait orientation
+L  Switch to landscape orientation
+}{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\moptionO}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\moptionO{\menuO \readChar{Q}\reply
+  \if P\reply
+    \if\landscape \let\landscape\FALSE
+      \dimen@\paht \paht\pawd \pawd\dimen@
+    \fi
+    \confirm{Orientation is now: portrait}%
+    \def\reply{Q}%
+  \else
+    \if L\reply
+      \if\landscape \else \let\landscape\TRUE
+        \dimen@\paht \paht\pawd \pawd\dimen@
+      \fi
+      \confirm{Orientation is now: landscape}%
+      \def\reply{Q}%
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \optionexec\reply
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \subsection{Option P}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\menuP}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\fxmenu\menuP{
+Current paper size: &\paperwidth x &\paperheight
+}{
+W  Change paper width
+H  Change paper height
+U  U.S. letter size paper: 8.5in x 11in
+A  A4 paper: 21cm x 29.7cm
+}{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\moptionP}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\moptionP{\lettermenu P}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\moptionPW}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\moptionPW{\promptmesj{New paper width: }%
+  \readline{Q}\reply
+  \if\xoptiontest\reply
+  \else
+    \checkdimen\reply\dimen@
+    \ifdim\dimen@=-\maxdimen
+    \else
+      \ifdim\dimen@>1cm
+        \let\paperwidth\reply
+        \pawd\dimen@
+        \confirm{New paper width: \paperwidth\space(\the\pawd)}%
+        \def\reply{Q}%
+      \else
+        \specialhelp\reply{%
+Sorry, I can't believe you really want a width of \reply!}%
+      \fi
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \optionexec\reply
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\moptionPH}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\moptionPH{\promptmesj{New paper height: }%
+  \readline{Q}\reply
+  \if\xoptiontest\reply
+  \else
+    \checkdimen\reply\dimen@
+    \ifdim\dimen@=-\maxdimen
+    \else
+      \ifdim\dimen@>1cm
+        \let\paperheight\reply
+        \paht\dimen@
+        \confirm{New paper height: \paperheight\space(\the\paht)}%
+        \def\reply{Q}%
+      \else
+        \specialhelp\reply{%
+Sorry, I can't believe you really want a height of \reply!}%
+      \fi
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \optionexec\reply
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\moptionPU}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\moptionPU{%
+  \if\landscape
+    \paht=8.5truein \pawd=11truein
+    \def\paperheight{8.5in}\def\paperwidth{11in}%
+  \else
+    \paht=11truein \pawd=8.5truein
+    \def\paperheight{11in}\def\paperwidth{8.5in}%
+  \fi
+  \confirm{New paper width: \paperwidth\space(\the\pawd)\
+* New paper height: \paperheight\space(\the\paht)%
+\if\landscape\
+(landscape)\fi}%
+  \moptionQ
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\moptionPA}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\moptionPA{%
+  \if\landscape
+    \paht=21cm \pawd=29.7cm
+    \def\paperheight{21cm}\def\paperwidth{29.7cm}%
+  \else
+    \paht=29.7cm \pawd=21cm
+    \def\paperheight{29.7cm}\def\paperwidth{21cm}%
+  \fi
+  \confirm{New paper width: \paperwidth\space(\the\pawd)\
+* New paper height: \paperheight\space(\the\paht)%
+  \if\landscape\
+  (landscape)\fi}%
+  \moptionQ
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \subsection{Option R}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\menuR}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\fxmenu\menuR{
+Running heads are turned &\if&\runheads\.on.
+Running head contents:
+&\the&\runhead
+&\else\.off.
+&\fi%
+Running feet are turned &\if&\runfeet\.on.
+Running foot contents:
+&\the&\runfoot
+&\else\.off.
+&\fi%
+}{
+H  Change running heads
+F  Change running feet
+}{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\moptionR}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\moptionR{\lettermenu R}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\menuRH}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\fmenu\menuRHorF#1{}{
+C  Change running #1 contents
+F  Change running #1 font
+S  Change running #1 font size
+}{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\moptionRH}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\moptionRH{\menuRHorF{head}\readChar{Q}\reply \optionexec\reply}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\menuRHC}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\fxmesj\menuRHC{
+Current running head contents:
+&\the&\runhead
+Enter new running head contents (to turn off running heads,
+just press <return>):}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\moptionRHC}
+%
+%    Since the user response here can be arbitrary text, we need to do
+%    some manual checking for the \qc{\?} \qc{\X} and \qc{\Q}
+%    possibilities with \cw{xoptiontest} instead of calling
+%    \cw{optionexec}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\moptionRHC{\menuRHC
+  \xreadline{}\reply
+  \if\xoptiontest\reply
+  \else
+    \global\runhead\xp@{\reply}%
+    \ifx\reply\@empty
+      \global\let\runheads\FALSE
+    \else
+      \global\let\runheads\TRUE
+      \confirm{New running head:\
+               \the\runhead}%
+    \fi
+    \def\reply{Q}%
+  \fi
+  \optionexec\reply
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\moptionRHF}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\moptionRHF{\getfont\runheadfont{}{Running head}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\moptionRHS}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\moptionRHS{\getfontsize\runheadfontsize{running heads}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\moptionRF}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\moptionRF{\menuRHorF{foot}\readChar{Q}\reply \optionexec\reply}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\menuRFC}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\fxmesj\menuRFC{
+Current running foot contents:
+&\the&\runfoot
+Enter new running foot contents (to turn off running feet,
+just press <return>):}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\moptionRFC}
+%
+%    Since the user response here can be arbitrary text, we need to do
+%    some manual checking for the \qc{\?} \qc{\X} and \qc{\Q}
+%    possibilities instead of calling \cw{optionexec}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\moptionRFC{\menuRFC
+  \xreadline{}\reply
+  \if\xoptiontest\reply
+  \else
+    \global\runfoot\xp@{\reply}%
+    \ifx\reply\@empty
+      \global\let\runfeet\FALSE
+    \else
+      \global\let\runfeet\TRUE
+      \confirm{New running foot:\
+               \the\runfoot}%
+    \fi
+    \def\reply{Q}%
+  \fi
+  \optionexec\reply
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\moptionRFF}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\moptionRFF{\getfont\runfootfont{}{Running foot}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\moptionRFS}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\moptionRFS{\getfontsize\runfootfontsize{running feet}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \subsection{Option S}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\menuS}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\fxmenu\menuS{
+System information. Current system type is &\systemtype;
+directory prefix to be used for all files printed in this run is
+&\ifx&\@empty&\dirprefix\.null.&\else
+&\dirprefix&\fi
+}{
+S  Change system type
+D  Change directory prefix
+}{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\moptionS}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\moptionS{\lettermenu{S}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\menuSS}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\fxmenu\menuSS{
+System type options:
+}{
+D  DOS
+M  Macintosh
+U  Unix
+V  VAX/VMS
+O  Other
+}{
+Currently this information is only used to help in printing directory
+names that may occur in the titles printed at the beginning of each
+file. Current system type is &\systemtype.
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\moptionSS}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\moptionSS{\menuSS
+  \readChar{Q}\reply
+  \if D\reply \def\systemtype{DOS}\def\currentdir{./}\def\reply{Q}%
+  \else\if M\reply
+    \def\systemtype{Macintosh}\def\currentdir{}\def\reply{Q}%
+  \else\if U\reply
+    \def\systemtype{Unix}\def\currentdir{./}\def\reply{Q}%
+  \else\if V\reply
+    \def\systemtype{VAX/VMS}%
+    \edef\currentdir{sys\string $disk:[]}\def\reply{Q}%
+  \else \def\systemtype{other}\def\currentdir{}\def\reply{Q}%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi
+  \optionexec\reply
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\menuSD}
+%    Directory prefix to be added in front of each filename title,
+%    when printing multiple files. \tex/ version 3.x does not provide
+%    a way to get at any part of a filename except \cw{jobname}.
+%    Therefore in order for a directory name to be printed, it has to
+%    be entered by the user somewhere along the line.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\fxmesj\menuSD{
+Current directory/folder prefix for all file names is
+&\ifx&\@empty&\dirprefix\.null.&\else
+  `&\dirprefix'
+&\fi
+Enter the new directory prefix below.
+(Enter Q to quit without changing the prefix.)}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\moptionSD}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\moptionSD{%
+  \menuSD
+  \readline{}\reply
+  \let\next\reply \changecase\uppercase\next
+  \if\xoptiontest\next
+    \let\reply\next
+  \else
+    \let\dirprefix\reply
+    \ifx\dirprefix\@empty
+      \confirm{Directory prefix is now null.}%
+    \else
+      \confirm{New directory name:\
+        \dirprefix\
+      }%
+    \fi
+    \def\reply{Q}%
+  \fi
+  \optionexec\reply
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \subsection{Option T}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\menuT}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\fxmenu\menuT{
+Currently tabs will print as &\tabstyle.
+The horizontal extent of each tab will be %
+&\number&\spacespertab spaces.
+}{
+T  Change tab representation
+N  Change the number of spaces per tab
+}{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\moptionT}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\moptionT{\lettermenu T}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\menuTT}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\fmenu\menuTT#1{
+Tab representation choices:
+}{
+B  Blank space
+.  Dots
+-  Dashed line
+H  Hrulefill
+T  Tiny`TAB's fill
+}{
+These are better understood by trying them out than by having them
+explained in words. Current tab style is `#1'.
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\reportnewtabstyle}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\reportnewtabstyle#1{%
+  \chardef\tabselect=#1 \relax
+  \confirm{Tab style is now `\tabstyle'}%
+  \def\reply{Q}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\moptionTT}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\moptionTT{\menuTT\tabstyle
+  \readChar{Q}\reply
+  \if B\reply
+    \reportnewtabstyle{0}%
+  \else\if .\reply
+    \reportnewtabstyle{1}%
+  \else\if -\reply
+    \reportnewtabstyle{2}%
+  \else\if H\reply
+    \reportnewtabstyle{3}%
+  \else\if T\reply
+    \reportnewtabstyle{4}%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+  \optionexec\reply
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\moptionTN}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\moptionTN{%
+  \promptmesj{Enter the desired number of spaces per tab: }%
+  \readline{Q}\reply
+  \if\xoptiontest\reply
+  \else
+    \checkinteger\reply\count@
+    \ifnum\count@=-\maxdimen
+    \else
+      \ifnum\count@<256
+        \chardef\spacespertab=\count@
+        \confirm{%
+  The number of spaces per tab is now \number\spacespertab.}%
+        \def\reply{Q}%
+      \else
+        \mesj{Sorry, spaces per tab cannot be more than 255.}%
+        \def\reply{}%  repeat the prompt
+      \fi
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \optionexec\reply
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \subsection{Option V}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\menuV}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\fmenu\menuV{}{
+  8  Treatment of 8-bit characters
+  L  Treatment of Control-L characters
+}{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\moptionV}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\moptionV{\lettermenu{V}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\menuVL}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\fxmenu\menuVL{
+Three choices are offered for the treatment of Control-L characters:
+}{
+  B  Print a boxed L (same treatment as other control characters)
+  L  Print one line of space
+  N  End current text column, start a new column
+}{
+Current setting is &\controlLaction.
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\moptionVL}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\moptionVL{\menuVL
+  \readChar{Q}\reply
+  \if B\reply
+    \let\controlLaction\reply
+    \confirm{Control-L characters will print as boxed L's}%
+  \else\if L\reply
+    \let\controlLaction\reply
+    \confirm{Control-L characters will print as a one-line space}%
+  \else\if N\reply
+    \let\controlLaction\reply
+    \confirm{%
+Control-L characters will perform a `formfeed' [new column] action}%
+  \fi\fi\fi
+  \def\reply{Q}\optionexec\reply
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\menuV8}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\expandafter\fxmenu\csname menuV8\endcsname{
+Two choices are offered for the treatment of 8-bit characters, that
+is, characters in the range 128--255:
+}{
+  A  Print according to the current font
+  B  Print a boxed question mark
+}{
+Current setting is &\eightbitaction.
+For option A, you must be careful to also select a font that is capable
+of printing 8-bit characters (see option F in the main menu); otherwise,
+8-bit characters will disappear silently from the printed output with
+nothing more than a warning in the TeX log.
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\moptionV8}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\expandafter\def\csname moptionV8\endcsname{%
+  \csname menuV8\endcsname
+  \readchar{Q}\reply
+  \if A\reply \def\eightbitaction{A}%
+  \else\if B\reply \def\eightbitaction{B}%
+  \fi\fi
+  \def\reply{Q}\optionexec\reply
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%    Here perhaps I should clear out the memory used by the menus
+%    since it is no longer needed. But so far I haven't had any pages
+%    complex enough to exceed 64K main mem even after loading full
+%    \fn{listout.tex} with the menu system. [mjd,25-Sep-1993]
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\moption
+\printfiles
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    And a final \cw{endinput} to make docstrip skip the garbage below,
+%    otherwise docstrip would choke on \ctrl{B} saying it's an invalid
+%    character.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\endinput
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%^^A Undefine FORMFEED (control-L) and DEL (control-?) so they will
+%^^A not cause the macrocode environment to choke.
+%
+%\catcode`\^^L=12 \catcode`\^^?=12
+%%
+\begin{macrocode}
+Test of special characters (if listout.tex is used to print itself).
+%
+The NUL character is missing (Control-@) because apparently Unix Emacs
+can't or won't preserve the character when saving the file. Put it
+back in with your editor if you can. Control-J and Control-M are
+printed at the end of their lines to avoid commenting out any
+following characters (depending on the native file format of the
+user's operating system). Control-Z is printed at the end of the file
+to avoid premature file termination if the operating system is DOS.
+The tab character (control-I) should show up as a dotted line 8
+characters wide under the default settings of \spacespertab and
+\tabstyle. And the formfeed character (control-L) should cause a page
+break.
+%
+Control-@: ,
+Control-A: 
, Control-B; , Control-C: ,
+Control-D: , Control-E: , Control-F: ,
+Control-G: , Control-H: ,
+	Control-I: 	, Control-J:
+, Control-K: , Control-L: , Control-M:
+, Control-N: , Control-O: , Control-P: , Control-Q: ,
+Control-R: , Control-S: , Control-T: , Control-U: ,
+Control-V: , Control-W: , Control-X: , Control-Y: ,
+Control-Z: (printed at end of file, below)
+Control-[: , Control-\: , Control-]: , Control-^: ,
+Control-_: , Control-?: .
+ASCII 128: €, ASCII 131: ƒ, ASCII 137: ‰, ASCII 139: ‹,
+ASCII 149: •, ASCII 151: —, ASCII 157: �, ASCII 163: £,
+ASCII 167: §, ASCII 173: ­, ASCII 179: ³, ASCII 181: µ,
+ASCII 191: ¿, ASCII 193: Á, ASCII 197: Å, ASCII 199: Ç,
+ASCII 211: Ó, ASCII 223: ß, ASCII 227: ã, ASCII 229: å,
+ASCII 233: é, ASCII 239: ï, ASCII 241: ñ, ASCII 251: û,
+ASCII 255: ÿ.
+%
+Control-Z: .
+%    \end{macrocode}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/dialogl/menus.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/dialogl/menus.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..641b3732192
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/dialogl/menus.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,983 @@
+%%% ====================================================================
+%%%  @LaTeX-style-file{
+%%%     filename        = "menus.dtx",
+%%%     version         = "1.99a",
+%%%     date            = "2013/01/24",
+%%%     author          = "Michael Downes",
+%%%     copyright       = "This file is part of the dialogl package, released
+%%%                        under the LPPL; see dialogl.ins for details."
+%%%     keywords        = "TeX, menus",
+%%%     supported       = "no",
+%%%     abstract        = "This file provides functions for writing
+%%%       messages and menus on screen, and reading user responses. It
+%%%       can be used with LaTeX as a documentstyle option, or in
+%%%       other forms of TeX by a standard \input statement.",
+%%%  }
+%%% ====================================================================
+%
+% \iffalse
+%<*driver>
+\input{dia-driv.tex}
+%</driver>
+% \fi
+%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \section{Function descriptions}
+%
+%\begin{usage}
+%\fmenu\foobar{
+% <preliminary text>
+%}{
+% <menu lines>
+%}{
+% <following text>
+%}
+%\end{usage}
+%    Defines \cw{foobar} as a function that puts the preliminary text,
+%    the menu lines (list of choices), and the after text on screen.
+%    Normal usage:
+%
+%^^V \foobar           % print the menu on screen
+%^^V \readline{}\reply % read the answer
+%
+%    (See the description of \cw{readline} in \fn{dialog.doc}.) In the
+%    various text parts all special characters have category 12 except
+%    for braces, as with \cw{mesj}. Note the recommended placement of
+%    the braces: no closing brace falls at the end of a line, except
+%    the very last one. Because of the special catcodes in effect when
+%    reading the final three arguments, a \ctrl{M} or \qc{\%} between
+%    arguments would be read as an active character or category-12
+%    character respectively, instead of being ignored. But actually,
+%    after some rather difficult programming, I managed to make it
+%    possible to write just about anything (except brace characters)
+%    between the arguments and have it be ignored, so the recommended
+%    style is not mandatory. The first and last newline of each
+%    argument are stripped off anyway in order to produce consistent
+%    clean connections with \cw{menuprefix} etc.; see below.
+%
+%    Menu functions created by \cw{fmenu} are allowed optionally to
+%    have arguments, like functions created with \cw{fmesj} (from
+%    \fn{dialog.sty}), so that pieces of text can be inserted at the
+%    time of use. This makes it possible for several similar menus to
+%    share the same menu function if there are only minor variations
+%    between them.
+%
+%\begin{usage}
+%\menuprefix, \menusuffix
+%\inmenuA, \inmenuB
+%\end{usage}
+%    The text \cw{menuprefix} will be added at the beginning of each
+%    menu; \cw{menusuffix} will be added at the end. The text
+%    \cw{inmenuA} and \cw{inmenuB} will be added between the first and
+%    second, respectively second and third parts of the menu; their
+%    default values produce a blank line on screen. (But
+%    \cw{inmenuA} will be omitted if the first part is empty, and
+%    \cw{inmenuB} will be omitted if the last part is empty.) To change
+%    any of these texts, use \cw{storemesj} or \cw{storexmesj}. For
+%    example:
+%
+%^^V\storemesj\menuprefix{********* MENU **********}
+%
+%\begin{usage}
+%\menuprompt
+%\end{usage}
+%    Furthermore, the function \cw{menuprompt} is called at the very
+%    end of the menu, so that for example a standard prompt such as
+%    \verb'Enter a number:' could be applied at the end of all menus,
+%    if desired. To change \cw{menuprompt}, use \cw{fmesj} or
+%    \cw{fxmesj}.
+%
+%\begin{usage}
+%\menuline, \endmenuline
+%\menutopline, \menubotline
+%\end{usage}
+%    Each line in the middle argument of \cw{fmenu} (the list of
+%    choices) is embedded in a statement
+%    \cw{menuline}\verbdots\cw{endmenuline}. The default definition of
+%    \cw{menuline} is to add two spaces at the beginning and a newline
+%    at the end. Lines in the top or bottom part of the menu are
+%    embedded in \cw{menutopline}\verbdots\cw{endmenuline} or
+%    \cw{menubotline}\verbdots\cw{endmenuline} respectively. (Notice
+%    that all three share the same ending delimiter; if different
+%    actions are wanted at the end of a top or bottom line as opposed
+%    to a middle menu line, they must be obtained by defining
+%    \cw{menutopline} or \cw{menubotline} to read the entire line as
+%    an argument and perform the desired processing.)
+%
+%    An enclosing box for a menu can be obtained by
+%    defining \cw{menuline} and its relatives appropriately and using
+%    \cw{fxmenu} (see below).
+%
+%\begin{usage}
+%\fxmenu\foobar{
+% <preliminary text>
+%}{
+% <menu lines>
+%}{
+% <following text>
+%}
+%\end{usage}
+%    Similar to \cw{fmenu} but with full expansion in each part of the
+%    text, as with \cw{xmesj}.
+%
+%    To get an enclosing box for a menu, write \cs{\.} at the end of
+%    each menu line (to protect the preceding spaces from \tex/'s
+%    propensity to remove character 32 at the end of a line,
+%    regardless of its catcode), and then make sure that \cw{menuline}
+%    and \cw{endmenuline} put in the appropriate box-drawing
+%    characters on either side. I.e.:
+%
+%^^V \fxmenu\foobar{
+%^^V First line                                   \.
+%^^V Second line                                  \.
+%^^V }{
+%^^V Third line                                   \.
+%^^V ...
+%^^V }{
+%^^V Last line                                    \.
+%^^V }
+%
+%    With the \verb'/o' option of em\tex/, you can use the box-drawing
+%    characters in the standard PC DOS character set.
+%
+%\begin{usage}
+%\nmenu\Alph\foobar#1{
+% <preliminary text>
+%}{
+% <menu lines>
+%}{
+% <following text>
+%}
+%\end{usage}
+%    \cw{nmenu} and \cw{nxmenu} are like \cw{fmenu}, \cw{fxmenu}
+%    except that they automatically number each line of the middle
+%    part of the menu. (This allows menu choices to be added or deleted
+%    without tedious renumbering.) The first argument indicates the
+%    type of numbers to be used: \cw{alph}, \cw{Alph}, \cw{arabic},
+%    \cw{roman}, \cw{Roman} (following \latex/). {\em These are not yet
+%    implemented.}
+%^^A [15-May-1993,mjd]
+%
+%    The function \cw{menunumber} (taking one argument) is applied to
+%    each automatically generated number. The default value is to add
+%    brackets and a space after:
+%
+%^^V \def\menunumber#1{[#1] }
+%
+%    but by redefining \cw{menunumber} you can add parentheses or extra
+%    spaces or what have you around each number. Internally a line of
+%    an autonumbered menu is stored as
+%
+%^^V \menuline\menunumber{5}Text text ...\endmenuline
+%
+%\begin{usage}
+%\optionexec\answer
+%\end{usage}
+%    This is a companion function for \cw{readChar} and the menu
+%    functions: it checks to see if the answer is equal to any one of
+%    the characters \qc{\?} \qc{\Q} \qc{\q} \qc{\X} \qc{\x}, and if so
+%    executes \cw{moption?} or \cw{moptionQ} or \cw{moptionX}
+%    respectively, otherwise executes
+%
+%^^V \csname moption\curmenu C\endcsname
+%
+%    where \qc{\C} means the character that was read and \cw{curmenu} is
+%    a string identifying the current location in the menu system.
+%    (\cw{optionexec} pushes and pops \cw{curmenu} when going between
+%    menus, to keep it up to date.) If this control sequence is
+%    undefined, \cw{optionexec} gives a generic ``Sorry, I don't
+%    understand'' message and repeats the current menu.
+%
+%    Thus the major work involved in making a menu system is to define
+%    the menu screens using \cw{fmenu}, \cw{fxmenu}, and then define
+%    corresponding functions \cw{moptionXXX} that display one of the
+%    menu screens, read a menu choice, and call \cw{optionexec} to
+%    branch to the next action.
+%
+%\begin{usage}
+%\specialhelp\answer{Substitute message}
+%\end{usage}
+%    As it turns out, it is sometimes desirable to substitute some
+%    other message in place of the generic ``Sorry, I don't
+%    understand'' message given by \cw{optionexec}. For instance,
+%    suppose a given menu choice leads to a secondary prompt where you
+%    ask the user to enter a number of columns for printing some data.
+%    If the user accidentally mistypes \verb'0', it would be better to
+%    respond with something like
+%
+%^^V Number of columns must be greater than 0.
+%
+%    than with the generic message. The function \cw{specialhelp}
+%    allows you to do this. The first argument is the name of the
+%    macro that will be passed to \cw{optionexec}. \cw{specialhelp}
+%    modifies that macro to a flag value that will trigger the
+%    substitute message. (But does it carefully, so that you can still
+%    use the macro naturally in the substitute message text.)
+%
+%\begin{usage}
+%\optionfileexec\answer
+%\end{usage}
+%    Like \cw{optionexec}, but gets the next menu from a file instead
+%    of from main memory, if applicable. This is not yet
+%    implemented.
+%^^A [mjd,24-May-1993]
+%    The technical complications involved in managing the menu files
+%    are many\Dash for example: How do you prevent the usual file name
+%    message of \tex/ from intruding on your carefully designed menu
+%    screens, if \cw{input} is used to read the next menu file?
+%    Alternatively if you try to use \cw{read} to read the next menu
+%    file, how do you deal with catcode changes?
+%
+%\begin{usage}
+%\lettermenu{MN}
+%\end{usage}
+%    This is an abbreviation for
+%
+%^^V \menuMN \readChar{Q}\reply \optionexec\reply
+%
+%    It calls the menu function associated with the menu name \verb"MN",
+%    reads a single uppercase letter into \cw{reply}, and then calls
+%    \cw{optionexec} to branch to the case selected by the reply.
+%
+%\begin{usage}
+%\if\xoptiontest\answer ... \else ... \fi
+%\end{usage}
+%    The function \cw{xoptiontest} is for use with \cw{readline} or
+%    \cw{xreadline}, to trap the special responses \verb'? Q q X x'
+%    before executing some conditional code. It returns a `true' value
+%    suitable for \cw{if} testing, if and only if the replacement text
+%    of \cw{answer} is a single character matching one of those
+%    listed.  This is used when you are prompting for a response that
+%    can be an arbitrary string of characters, but you want to allow
+%    the user still to get help or quit with the same one-character
+%    responses that are recognized in other situations.
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%
+% \section{Implementation}
+%    Standard package identification:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2e>
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+\ProvidesPackage{menus}[1994/11/08 v0.9x]
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Load the dialog package if necessary.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\RequirePackage{dialog}
+%</2e>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    This file requires \fn{grabhedr.sty} and \fn{dialog.sty}. If
+%    \fn{grabhedr.sty} is not already loaded, load it now and call
+%    \cw{fileversiondate}, since it's too late to apply \cw{inputfwh}
+%    to {\em this\/} file. See the documentation of \cw{trap.input} in
+%    \fn{grabhedr.doc}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*209>
+\csname trap.input\endcsname
+\input grabhedr.sty \relax
+\fileversiondate{menus.sty}{0.9x}{1994/11/08}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\inputfwh{dialog.sty}
+%</209>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\section{Definitions}
+%
+%    We start by using the \cw{localcatcodes} function from
+%    \fn{grabhedr.sty} to save current catcodes and set new catcodes
+%    for certain significant characters, as explained at more length
+%    in \fn{dialog.doc}.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\localcatcodes{\@{11}%
+  \~{13}\"{12}\#{6}\^{7}\`{12}\${3}\:{12}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\menuprefix}
+%    \cw{menuprefix} is a string added at the beginning of each menu to
+%    pretty it up a little (or uglify it a little, depending on your
+%    taste). The length of the default string is 70 characters, not
+%    counting the two newline characters. By using \cw{storexmesj} we
+%    get embedded newlines corresponding to the ones seen here. [That
+%    is, except for the extra line break (where the newline character is
+%    commented out), needed to make this fit in the current column
+%    width.]
+%
+%\iftrue
+%^^V \storexmesj\menuprefix{
+%^^V ===================================%
+%^^V ===================================
+%^^V }
+%
+%\else
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\storexmesj\menuprefix{
+======================================================================
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\fi
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\menusuffix}
+%    The default value for \cw{menusuffix} is the same as for
+%    \cw{menuprefix}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\menusuffix=\menuprefix
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\inmenuA}
+% \begin{macro}{\inmenuB}
+%    The default for \cw{inmenuA} and \cw{inmenuB} is a single
+%    newline, which will produce a blank line on screen because they
+%    will occur after an \cw{endmenuline}, which also
+%    contains a newline.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\storemesj\inmenuA{
+}
+\storemesj\inmenuB{
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\menuline}
+%    The default value for \cw{menuline} is two spaces. This means
+%    that each line in the middle section of a menu defined by
+%    \cw{fmenu} or \cw{fxmenu} will be indented two spaces.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\storemesj\menuline{  }
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\menutopline}
+% \begin{macro}{\menubotline}
+%    By default, no spaces are added at the beginning of a line in the
+%    top or bottom section of a menu:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\menutopline{}
+\def\menubotline{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\endmenuline}
+%    \cw{endmenuline} is just a newline.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\storemesj\endmenuline{
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\menunumber}
+%    This definition of \cw{menunumber} adds square brackets and a
+%    following space around each item number.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\menunumber#1{[#1] }
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\menuprompt}
+%    This definition of \cw{menuprompt} is suitable for the purposes
+%    of \fn{listout.tex} but will probably need to be no-op'd or
+%    changed for other applications.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\menuprompt{\promptmesj{Your choice? }}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\menufirstpart}
+% \begin{macro}{\menuchoices}
+% \begin{macro}{\menulastpart}
+%    Each of the three pieces of a menu gets its own token register.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newtoks\menufirstpart
+\newtoks\menuchoices
+\newtoks\menulastpart
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\fmenu}
+%
+%    The `arguments' of \cw{fmenu} are \arg{1} menu name, \arg{2}
+%    optional argument specifiers, \arg{3} preliminary text, \arg{4}
+%    list of menu choices, \arg{5} following text. But at first we read
+%    only the first two because we want to change some catcodes before
+%    reading the others. The auxiliary function \cw{fxmenub} is shared
+%    with \cw{fxmenu}.
+%
+%    Because of the catcode changes done by \cw{mesjsetup}, newlines,
+%    spaces, or percent signs between the three final arguments will
+%    not be ignored. To get around this, we use the peculiar
+%    \verb'#{' feature of \tex/, in intermediate scratch functions
+%    called \cw{@tempa}, to read and discard anything that may occur
+%    between one closing brace and the next opening brace. Token
+%    register assignments are used to read the arguments proper.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\fmenu#1#2#{\mesjsetup
+  \catcode`\#=6 % for parameters
+  \toks@{\fxmenub{\gdef}{\begingroup}{}#1{#2}}%
+  \def\@tempa##1##{%
+    \def\@tempa####1####{%
+      \def\@tempa{\the\toks@}%
+      \afterassignment\@tempa \menulastpart}%
+    \afterassignment\@tempa \menuchoices}%
+  \afterassignment\@tempa \menufirstpart
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%    Before proceeding to define \cw{fxmenub}, we must deal with a
+%    subproblem. What we will have to work with is three pieces of text
+%    in the token registers \cw{menufirstpart}, \cw{menuchoices}, and
+%    \cw{menulastpart}, containing active \ctrl{M} characters to mark
+%    line breaks, including possibly but not necessarily \ctrl{M} at the
+%    beginning and at the end of each piece. What we would like to do,
+%    for each piece, is to remove the first \ctrl{M}, if there is one,
+%    and the last one, if there is one. The function \cw{stripcontrolMs}
+%    does this.
+%
+%    If you are one of those rare \tex/ hackers who might actually
+%    want to understand the workings of \cw{stripcontrolMs}, the best
+%    way is probably to watch it in action with \cw{tracingmacros} =
+%    \cw{tracingcommands} = 2, rather than attempt to follow my labored
+%    commentary below.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\begingroup % localize \lccode change
+\lccode`\~=`\^^M
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    The functions \cw{stripM}, \cw{stripMa}, \cw{stripMb}, \ldots\ are
+%    auxiliary functions for \cw{stripcontrolMs}. They all carry along
+%    an extra last argument, the name of the token register originally
+%    given to \cw{stripcontrolMs}, so that when we finally reach
+%    \cw{stripMd} we can carry out the assignment of the token
+%    register.
+%
+%    When \cw{stripM} is called, it should be called like this:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \expandafter\stripM\expandafter$\the\sometoks
+% $^^M$$\stripM\sometoks
+%\end{verbatim}
+%    That is, \qc{\$} should be added at the beginning and \verb'$^^M$$'
+%    at the end of the text to be processed. And \cw{expandafter}'s
+%    should be added to pre-expand the token register.
+%
+%    These examples illustrate the possible contents of (e.g.\@)
+%    \cw{menufirstpart}, before processing
+%\begin{enumerate}\renewcommand{\theenumi}{\alph{enumi}}
+%\renewcommand{\labelenumi}{(\theenumi)}
+%    \item \label{mmm}
+%      \verb'^^Maaa^^Mbbb^^M'
+%    \item \verb'aaa^^Mbbb'
+%    \item \verb'^^Maaa^^Mbbb'
+%    \item \verb'aaa^^Mbbb^^M'
+%\end{enumerate}
+%    The processing of example (\ref{mmm}) would proceed as follows.
+%    Call \cw{stripM}, adding \qc{\$} at the beginning and \verb'$^^M$$'
+%    at the end.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \stripM $^^Maaa^^Mbbb^^M$^^M$$\stripM
+%\end{verbatim}
+%    This finds a match with the \verb'$^^M' at the beginning. The
+%    remaining text is passed on to \cw{stripMb}. We know that there is
+%    now an extra \verb'$^^M$$' at the end, but we don't know if the
+%    first \qc{\$} is preceded by \ctrl{M}.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \stripMb aaa^^Mbbb^^M$^^M$$\stripMb
+%\end{verbatim}
+%    If it turns out that \arg{2} = \qc{\$}, then there was {\em not\/}
+%    a \ctrl{M} at the end of the original text, and we need to strip
+%    off a last remaining \qc{\$} sign. Otherwise we are finished if we
+%    just discard \arg{2} and \arg{3} (the remaining \ctrl{M} and
+%    \qc{\$} characters of the ones that we added).
+%
+%    We use \qc{\$} as a marker since any \qc{\$} characters that
+%    happen to occur in the menu text will have category 12 and thus
+%    not match the category-3 \qc{\$} used in the definition of
+%    \cw{stripMa} etc. A control sequence could also be used as a
+%    marker if we took care to give it a bizarre name that would never
+%    arise in the menu text (\cw{fxmenub} is used not just by
+%    \cw{fmenu} but also by \cw{fxmenu}, which might have arbitrary
+%    control sequences in its arguments); but that means using up one
+%    more hash table entry and additional string pool.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\stripM}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\lowercase{%
+\long\gdef\stripM#1$~#2#3\stripM#4{%
+  \ifx$#2%
+    \stripMa#1\stripMa#4%
+  \else
+    \stripMb#2#3\stripMb#4%
+  \fi
+}
+}% end lowercase
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\stripMa}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\lowercase{%
+\long\gdef\stripMa $#1\stripMa#2{%
+  \stripMb#1$~$$\stripMb#2}
+}% end lowercase
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\stripMb}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\lowercase{%
+\long\gdef\stripMb#1~$#2#3\stripMb#4{%
+  \ifx$#2%
+    \stripMc#1\stripMc#4%
+  \else
+    \stripMd#1\stripMd#4%
+  \fi
+}
+}% end lowercase
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\stripMc}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\long\gdef\stripMc#1$#2\stripMc#3{%
+  \stripMd#1\stripMd#3}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\stripMd}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\long\gdef\stripMd#1\stripMd#2{#2{#1}}
+\endgroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%    Some tests.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% %\lowercase{\def\test#1{\stripM $#1$~$$\stripM}
+% %\tracingmacros=2 \tracingcommands=2 \tracingonline=1
+% %\test{~aaa~bbb~}
+% %\test{aaa~bbb}
+% %\test{~aaa~bbb}
+% %\test{aaa~bbb~}
+% %\tracingmacros=0 \tracingcommands=0 \tracingonline=0
+% %}% end lowercase
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\stripcontrolMs}
+%    The argument of \cw{stripcontrolMs} is a token register. The text
+%    of the token register will be stripped of a leading and trailing
+%    \ctrl{M} if either or both are present, and the remainder text will
+%    be left in the token register.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\begingroup \lccode`\~=`\^^M
+\lowercase{%
+\gdef\stripcontrolMs#1{\xp@\stripM
+  \xp@$\the#1$~$$\stripM#1}
+}% end lowercase
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\addmenulines}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\lowercase{%
+\gdef\addmenulines#1#2#3{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Add \arg{2} at the beginning and \arg{3} at the end of every line
+%    of token register \arg{1}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \def ~##1~##2{%
+    #1\xp@{\the#1#2##1#3}%
+    \ifx\end##2\xp@\@gobbletwo\fi~##2}%
+  \edef\@tempa{\nx@~\the#1\nx@~}#1{}%
+  \@tempa\end}
+}% end lowercase
+\endgroup % restore lccode of ~
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\fxmenub}
+%
+%    The function \cw{fxmenub} is the one that does most of the hard
+%    work for \cw{fmenu} and \cw{fxmenu}. Argument \arg{4} is the name
+%    of the menu, \arg{5} is the argument specifiers (maybe empty).
+%    Arguments \arg{1}\arg{2}\arg{3} are assignment type, extra setup,
+%    and expansion control; specifically, these arguments are
+%    \cw{gdef} \cw{begingroup} \cw{empty} for \cw{fmenu} or \cw{xdef}
+%    \cw{xmesjsetup} and an extra \cw{noexpand} for \cw{fxmenu}.
+%
+%    That this function actually works should probably be regarded as
+%    a miracle rather than a result of my programming efforts.^^A
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \footnote{Let's see, three miracles is a prerequisite for sainthood
+% in the Catholic church\Dash only two more needed for Don
+% Knuth to be a candidate \dots}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\fxmenub#1#2#3#4#5{%
+  \stripcontrolMs\menufirstpart
+  \stripcontrolMs\menulastpart
+  \stripcontrolMs\menuchoices
+  \addmenulines\menuchoices\menuline\endmenuline
+  \actively\let\^^M\relax % needed for \xdef
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Define \arg{4}. Expansion control is rather tricky because of the
+%    possibility of parameter markers inside \cw{menufirstpart},
+%    \cw{menuchoices} or \cw{menulastpart}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \toks@{\long#1#4#5}% e.g. \xdef\foo##1##2
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    If \cw{menufirstpart} is empty, we don't add the separator
+%    material \cw{inmenuA}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \edef\@tempa{\the\menufirstpart}%
+  \ifx\@tempa\@empty
+    \let\nxa@\@gobble
+  \else
+    \addmenulines\menufirstpart
+      \menutopline\endmenuline
+    \let\nxa@\nx@
+  \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    If \cw{menulastpart} is empty, we don't add the separator
+%    material \cw{inmenuB}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \edef\@tempa{\the\menulastpart}%
+  \ifx\@tempa\@empty
+    \let\nxb@\@gobble
+  \else
+    \addmenulines\menulastpart
+      \menubotline\endmenuline
+    \let\nxb@\nx@
+  \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Set up the definition statement that will create the new menu.
+%    \arg{2} = \cw{begingroup} or \cw{xmesjsetup}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\edef\@tempa{{#3\nx@#3#2%
+    \def#3\nx@#3\mesjtext{%
+      #3\nx@#3\menuprefix
+      \the\menufirstpart #3\nxa@#3\inmenuA
+      \the\menuchoices #3\nxb@#3\inmenuB
+      \the\menulastpart #3\nx@#3\menusuffix}%
+    #3\nx@#3\sendmesj
+    #3\nx@#3\menuprompt}}%
+  \toks2 \xp@{\@tempa}%
+  \edef\@tempa{\the\toks@\the\toks2 }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Temporarily \cw{relax}ify \cw{menuline} etc. in order to prevent
+%    their premature expansion if \cw{xdef} is applied.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \let\menutopline\relax \let\menuline\relax
+  \let\menubotline\relax \let\endmenuline\relax
+  \let\menunumber\relax
+  \@tempa % finally, execute the \gdef or \xdef
+  \endgroup % matches \mesjsetup done by \fxmenu
+}% end \fxmenub
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\fxmenu}
+%
+%    Expanding analog of \cw{fmenu}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\fxmenu#1#2#{\xmesjsetup
+  \toks@{\fxmenub{\xdef}{\xmesjsetup}\nx@#1{#2}}%
+  \def\@tempa##1##{%
+    \def\@tempa####1####{%
+      \def\@tempa{\the\toks@}%
+      \afterassignment\@tempa \menulastpart}%
+    \afterassignment\@tempa \menuchoices}%
+  \afterassignment\@tempa \menufirstpart
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\notyet}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\notyet#1{%
+  \errmessage{Not yet implemented:  \string#1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\nmenu}
+% \begin{macro}{\nxmenu}
+%    These two functions aren't implemented yet.
+%^^A [mjd,24-May-1993]
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\nmenu#1#2#3#4#5{\notyet\nmenu}
+\long\def\nxmenu#1#2#3#4#5{\notyet\nxmenu}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \section{Menu traversal functions}
+%
+%    For reliable travel up and down the menu tree, we need to push
+%    and pop the value of \cw{curmenu} as we go along. Among other
+%    things, \cw{curmenu} is used to repeat the current menu after a
+%    help message.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\optionstack}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newtoks\optionstack
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\curmenu}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\curmenu\@empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\estart}
+%    Start of a stack element.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\estart\relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\eend}
+%    End of a stack element.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\eend\relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\pushoptions}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\pushoptions#1{%
+  \edef\pushtemp{\estart
+    \def\nx@\curmenu{\curmenu}%
+    \eend
+    \the\optionstack}%
+  \global\optionstack\xp@{\pushtemp}%
+  \edef\curmenu{\curmenu#1}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\popoptions}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\popoptions{%
+  \edef\@tempa{\the\optionstack}%
+  \ifx\@empty\@tempa
+    \errmessage{Can't pop empty stack
+      (\string\optionstack)}%
+  \else
+    \def\estart##1\eend##2\@nil{%
+      \global\optionstack{##2}%
+      \let\estart\relax##1}%
+    \the\optionstack\@nil
+  \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\moptionX}
+%
+%    The \qc{\X} option is a total exit from the menu maze, as
+%    compared to \cw{moptionQ}, which returns you to the previous menu
+%    level.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\fmesj\moptionX{Exiting . . .}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\repeatoption}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\repeatoption{%
+  \csname moption\curmenu\endcsname}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\moptionQ}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\moptionQ{\popoptions \repeatoption}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\badoptionmesj}
+%    The sole reason for using \cw{fxmesj} rather than \cw{fmesj} here
+%    is to use \qc{\%} to comment out the initial newline, as the line
+%    break was needed only for convenient printing of this
+%    documentation within a narrow column width.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\fxmesj\badoptionmesj#1{%
+?---I don't understand "#1".}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\optionexec}
+%
+%    The function \cw{optionexec} takes one argument, which it uses
+%    together with \cw{curmenu} to determine the next action. The
+%    argument is expected to be a macro containing a single letter,
+%    the most recent menu choice received from the user.
+%
+%    Common options such as \qc{\?}, \qc{\Q}, or \qc{\X} that may
+%    occur at any level of the menu system are handled specially, to
+%    cut down on the number of control sequence names needed for a
+%    csname implementation of the menus.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\optionexec#1{%
+  \if ?#1\relax \let\@tempa\moptionhelp
+  \else \if Q#1\relax
+    \ifx\curmenu\@empty \let\@tempa\moptionX
+    \else \let\@tempa\moptionQ \fi
+  \else \if X#1\relax \let\@tempa\moptionX
+  \else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Because special characters, including backslash, are deactivated
+%    by \cw{readChar}, we can apply \cw{csname} without fearing problems
+%    from responses such as \cw{relax}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \xp@\let\xp@\@tempa
+      \csname moption\curmenu#1\endcsname
+    \ifx\@tempa\relax
+      \badoptionmesj{#1}\let\@tempa\repeatoption
+    \else
+      \pushoptions{#1}%
+    \fi
+  \fi\fi\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    We save up the next action in \cw{@tempa} and execute it last, to
+%    get tail recursion.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \@tempa
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%    Really big menu systems could get around \tex/ memory limits by
+%    storing individual menus or groups of menus in separate files and
+%    using \cw{optionfileexec} in place of \cw{optionexec} to
+%    retrieve the menu text from disk storage instead of from main
+%    memory. However there are a number of technical complications and
+%    I probably won't get around to working on them in the near future.
+%^^A [mjd,24-May-1993]
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\optionfileexec}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\optionfileexec#1{\notyet\optionfileexec}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\xoptiontest}
+%    The function \cw{xoptiontest} must return true if and only if the
+%    macro \arg{1} consists entirely of one of the one-letter
+%    responses \verb"? Q q X x" that correspond to special menu
+%    actions. The rather cautious implementation with \cw{aftergroup}
+%    avoids rescanning the contents of \verb"#1", just in case it
+%    contains anything that's \cw{outer}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\xoptiontest#1{TT\fi
+  \begingroup \def\0{?}\def\1{Q}%
+  \def\2{q}\def\3{x}\def\4{X}%
+    \aftergroup\if\aftergroup T%
+    \ifx\0#1\aftergroup T%
+    \else\ifx\1#1\aftergroup T%
+    \else\ifx\2#1\aftergroup T%
+    \else\ifx\3#1\aftergroup T%
+    \else\ifx\4#1\aftergroup T%
+    \else \aftergroup F%
+    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+  \endgroup
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\menuhelpmesj}
+%
+%    Default help message, can be redefined if necessary. The extra
+%    newlines commented out with \qc{\%} are here only for convenient
+%    printing within a narrow column width.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\fxmesj\menuhelpmesj{&\menuprefix%
+A response of Q will usually send you back to %
+the previous menu.
+A response of X will get you entirely out of %
+the menu system.
+&\menusuffix%
+Press the <Return> key ( Enter ) to continue:
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\moptionhelp}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\moptionhelp{%
+  \menuhelpmesj \readline{}\reply \repeatoption}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\moptionhelp}
+%    \cw{moptionhelp} is the branch that will be taken if the user
+%    enters a question mark in response to a menu.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\moptionhelp{%
+  \menuhelpmesj \readline{}\reply \repeatoption}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\moption?}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\xp@\def\csname moption?\endcsname{%
+  \moptionhelp}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\specialhelp}
+%    The function \cw{specialhelp} can be used to provide a one-time
+%    alternate help message tailored to a specifc response given by
+%    the user. It defines the first argument (the macro containing the
+%    response) to contain \qc{\?}, then redefines \cw{menuhelpmesj} to
+%    use the message text given in arg \arg{2}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\specialhelp#1#2{%
+  \let\specialhelpreply=#1\def#1{?}\begingroup
+  \def\menuhelpmesj{\let#1\specialhelpreply
+    \promptxmesj{#2\
+Press <return> to continue:}\endgroup}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\specialhelpreply}
+%    Init.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\specialhelpreply{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\lettermenu}
+%    This is a convenient abbreviation for an often-used combination.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\lettermenu#1{%
+  \csname menu#1\endcsname
+  \readChar{Q}\reply \optionexec\reply
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%    Restore any catcodes changed locally, and depart.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\restorecatcodes
+\endinput
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \CheckSum{513}
+% \Finale
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/dialogl/dialog.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/dialogl/dialog.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..8d87e3f579c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/dialogl/dialog.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,360 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `dialog.sty',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% dialogl.dtx  (with options: `2e')
+%% This is a generated file.
+%% 
+%% Copyright 1994 Michael John Downes
+%% Copyright 2013 TeX Users Group.
+%% 
+%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1
+%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+%% The latest version of this license is in
+%%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%% 
+%% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "unmaintained".
+%% 
+%% The list of all files belonging to the distribution is given in the file
+%% `manifest.txt'.
+%% 
+%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%%% ====================================================================
+%%%  @LaTeX-style-file{
+%%%     filename        = "dialogl.dtx",
+%%%     version         = "1.99a",
+%%%     date            = "2013/01/24",
+%%%     author          = "Michael Downes",
+%%%     copyright       = "This file is part of the dialogl package, released
+%%%                        under the LPPL; see dialogl.ins for details."
+%%%     keywords        = "TeX, dialog",
+%%%     supported       = "no",
+%%%     abstract        = "This file provides macros for writing
+%%%       messages and menus on screen, and reading user responses. It
+%%%       can be used with LaTeX as a documentstyle option, or in
+%%%       other forms of TeX by a standard \input statement.",
+%%%  }
+%%% ====================================================================
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+\ProvidesPackage{dialog}[1994/11/08 v0.9y]
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\RequirePackage{grabhedr}
+%% The line break is significant here:
+\localcatcodes{\@{11}\ {10}\
+{5}\~{13}\"{12}\#{6}\^{7}\`{12}}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\begingroup
+\def\do{12 \catcode`}
+\catcode`\~\do\!\do\@\do\#\do\$\do\^\do\&
+\do\*\do\(\do\)\do\-\do\_\do\=\do\[\do\]
+\do\;\do\:\do\'\do\"\do\<\do\>\do\,\do\.
+\do\/\do\?\do\|12\relax
+\escapechar -1
+\edef\\{\string\\}
+\edef\{{\string\{}\edef\}{\string\}}
+\catcode`\ =12\catcode`\%=12
+\xdef\otherchars
+{ !"#$%&'()*+,-./:;<=>?[\\]^_`\{|\}~}
+\endgroup %              ^     ^  ^
+\begingroup
+\endlinechar = -1
+\def\do{12 \catcode`}
+\catcode`\^^@\do\^^A\do\^^B\do\^^C
+\do\^^D\do\^^E\do\^^F\do\^^G\do\^^H\do\^^I
+\do\^^J\do\^^K\do\^^L\do\^^M\do\^^N\do\^^O
+\do\^^P\do\^^Q\do\^^R\do\^^S\do\^^T\do\^^U
+\do\^^V\do\^^W\do\^^X\do\^^Y\do\^^Z\do\^^[
+\do\^^\\do\^^]\do\^^^\do\^^_\do\^^? 12\relax
+\gdef\controlchars{^^@^^A^^B^^C^^D^^E^^F^^G
+  ^^H^^I^^J^^K^^L^^M^^N^^O^^P^^Q^^R^^S^^T
+  ^^U^^V^^W^^X^^Y^^Z^^[^^\^^]^^^^^_^^?}
+\endgroup
+\begingroup
+\def\do{12 \catcode`}
+\catcode`\^^80\do\^^81\do\^^82\do\^^83\do\^^84
+\do\^^85\do\^^86\do\^^87\do\^^88\do\^^89\do\^^8a
+\do\^^8b\do\^^8c\do\^^8d\do\^^8e\do\^^8f
+\do\^^90\do\^^91\do\^^92\do\^^93\do\^^94\do\^^95
+\do\^^96\do\^^97\do\^^98\do\^^99\do\^^9a\do\^^9b
+\do\^^9c\do\^^9d\do\^^9e\do\^^9f
+\do\^^a0\do\^^a1\do\^^a2\do\^^a3\do\^^a4\do\^^a5
+\do\^^a6\do\^^a7\do\^^a8\do\^^a9\do\^^aa\do\^^ab
+\do\^^ac\do\^^ad\do\^^ae\do\^^af
+\do\^^b0\do\^^b1\do\^^b2\do\^^b3\do\^^b4\do\^^b5
+\do\^^b6\do\^^b7\do\^^b8\do\^^b9\do\^^ba\do\^^bb
+\do\^^bc\do\^^bd\do\^^be\do\^^bf
+\do\^^c0\do\^^c1\do\^^c2\do\^^c3\do\^^c4\do\^^c5
+\do\^^c6\do\^^c7\do\^^c8\do\^^c9\do\^^ca\do\^^cb
+\do\^^cc\do\^^cd\do\^^ce\do\^^cf
+\do\^^d0\do\^^d1\do\^^d2\do\^^d3\do\^^d4\do\^^d5
+\do\^^d6\do\^^d7\do\^^d8\do\^^d9\do\^^da\do\^^db
+\do\^^dc\do\^^dd\do\^^de\do\^^df
+\do\^^e0\do\^^e1\do\^^e2\do\^^e3\do\^^e4\do\^^e5
+\do\^^e6\do\^^e7\do\^^e8\do\^^e9\do\^^ea\do\^^eb
+\do\^^ec\do\^^ed\do\^^ee\do\^^ef
+\do\^^f0\do\^^f1\do\^^f2\do\^^f3\do\^^f4\do\^^f5
+\do\^^f6\do\^^f7\do\^^f8\do\^^f9\do\^^fa\do\^^fb
+\do\^^fc\do\^^fd\do\^^fe\do\^^ff 12\relax
+\gdef\highchars{%
+^^80^^81^^82^^83^^84^^85^^86^^87^^88%
+^^89^^8a^^8b^^8c^^8d^^8e^^8f%
+^^90^^91^^92^^93^^94^^95^^96^^97^^98%
+^^99^^9a^^9b^^9c^^9d^^9e^^9f%
+^^a0^^a1^^a2^^a3^^a4^^a5^^a6^^a7^^a8%
+^^a9^^aa^^ab^^ac^^ad^^ae^^af%
+^^b0^^b1^^b2^^b3^^b4^^b5^^b6^^b7^^b8%
+^^b9^^ba^^bb^^bc^^bd^^be^^bf%
+^^c0^^c1^^c2^^c3^^c4^^c5^^c6^^c7^^c8%
+^^c9^^ca^^cb^^cc^^cd^^ce^^cf%
+^^d0^^d1^^d2^^d3^^d4^^d5^^d6^^d7^^d8%
+^^d9^^da^^db^^dc^^dd^^de^^df%
+^^e0^^e1^^e2^^e3^^e4^^e5^^e6^^e7^^e8%
+^^e9^^ea^^eb^^ec^^ed^^ee^^ef%
+^^f0^^f1^^f2^^f3^^f4^^f5^^f6^^f7^^f8%
+^^f9^^fa^^fb^^fc^^fd^^fe^^ff}
+\endgroup
+\def\actively#1#2{\catcode`#2\active
+  \begingroup \lccode`\~=`#2\relax
+  \lowercase{\endgroup#1~}}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\def\mesjsetup{\begingroup \count@=12
+  \def\do##1{\catcode`##1\count@ \do}%
+  \xp@\do\otherchars{a11 \@gobbletwo}%
+  \xp@\do\controlchars{a11 \@gobbletwo}%
+  \xp@\do\highchars{a11 \@gobbletwo}%
+  \actively\edef\^^I{ \space\space\space
+    \space\space\space\space}%
+  \endlinechar=`\^^M\actively\let\^^M=\relax
+  \catcode`\{=1 \catcode`\}=2 }
+\def\sendmesj{\newlinechar`\^^J%
+  \actively\def\^^M{^^J}%
+  \immediate\write\sixt@@n{\mesjtext}\endgroup}
+\def\mesj{\mesjsetup \afterassignment\sendmesj
+  \def\mesjtext}
+\def\sendprompt{%
+  \newlinechar`\!\relax \actively\def\^^M{!}%
+  \message{\mesjtext}\endgroup}
+\def\promptmesj{\mesjsetup
+  \afterassignment\sendprompt \def\mesjtext}
+\def\storemesj#1{\mesjsetup
+  \catcode`\#=6 % to allow arguments if needed
+  \afterassignment\endgroup
+  \long\gdef#1}
+\def\fmesj#1#2#{\mesjsetup
+  \catcode`\#=6 % restore to normal
+  \toks@{\long\gdef#1#2}%
+  \def\@tempa{%
+    \edef\@tempa{%
+      \the\toks@{%
+      \begingroup\def\nx@\mesjtext{\the\toks2 }%
+        \nx@\sendmesj}%
+    }%
+    \@tempa
+    \endgroup % Turn off the \mesjsetup catcodes
+  }%
+  \afterassignment\@tempa
+  \toks2=}
+\def\xmesjsetup{\mesjsetup
+  \iffalse{\fi
+  \catcode`\\=0 \catcode`\%=14
+  \begingroup \lccode`\0=`\\\lccode`\1=`\{%
+  \lccode`\2=`\}\lccode`\3=`\%%
+  \lowercase{\endgroup \def\\{0}\def\{{1}%
+    \def\}{2}\def\%{3}}%
+  \iffalse}\fi
+  \edef\&{\string &}%
+  \actively\let\&=\noexpand
+  \actively\let\^^M=\relax
+  \def\.{}%
+  \def\ { }\edef~{\string ~}%
+  \begingroup \lccode`\~=`\^^M%
+    \lowercase{\endgroup \def\^^M{~}}%
+  \let\^^J\^^M \def\par{\^^M\^^M}%
+}
+\def\xmesj{\xmesjsetup \afterassignment\sendmesj
+  \edef\mesjtext}
+\def\promptxmesj{\xmesjsetup
+  \afterassignment\sendprompt \edef\mesjtext}
+\def\storexmesj#1#2#{\xmesjsetup
+  \catcode`\#=6 % to allow arguments if needed
+  \edef\#{\string##}%
+  \afterassignment\endgroup
+  \long\xdef#1#2}
+\def\fxmesj#1#2#{\xmesjsetup
+  \catcode`\#=6 % restore to normal
+  \edef\#{\string##}%
+  \toks@{\long\xdef#1#2}%
+  \def\@tempa{%
+    \edef\@tempa{%
+      \the\toks@{\begingroup
+      \def\nx@\nx@\nx@\mesjtext{\the\toks\tw@}%
+      \nx@\nx@\nx@\sendmesj}}%
+    \@tempa % execute the constructed xdef
+    \endgroup % restore normal catcodes
+  }%
+  \afterassignment\@tempa
+  \toks\tw@=}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\def\readline#1#2{%
+  \begingroup \count@ 12 %
+  \def\do##1{\catcode`##1\count@ \do}%
+  \xp@\do\otherchars{a11 \@gobbletwo}%
+  \xp@\do\controlchars{a11 \@gobbletwo}%
+  \xp@\do\highchars{a11 \@gobbletwo}%
+  \catcode`\ =10 \catcode`\^^I=10 %
+  \catcode`\^^M=9 % ignore
+  \endlinechar`\^^M
+  \read\m@ne to#2%
+  \edef#2{\def\nx@#2{#2}}%
+  \xp@\endgroup #2%
+  \ifx\@empty#2\def#2{#1}\fi
+}
+\def\xreadline#1#2{%
+  \begingroup
+    \xp@\let\csname bye\endcsname\relax
+    \xp@\let\csname newif\endcsname\relax
+    \xp@\let\csname newcount\endcsname\relax
+    \xp@\let\csname newdimen\endcsname\relax
+    \xp@\let\csname newskip\endcsname\relax
+    \xp@\let\csname newmuskip\endcsname\relax
+    \xp@\let\csname newtoks\endcsname\relax
+    \xp@\let\csname newbox\endcsname\relax
+    \xp@\let\csname newinsert\endcsname\relax
+    \xp@\let\csname +\endcsname\relax
+    \actively\let\^^L\relax
+  \catcode`\^^M=9 % ignore
+  \endlinechar`\^^M% reset to normal
+  \read\m@ne to#2%
+  \toks@\xp@{#2}%
+  \edef\@tempa{\def\nx@#2{\the\toks@}}%
+  \xp@\endgroup \@tempa
+  \ifx\@empty#2\def#2{#1}\fi
+}
+\def\readchar#1#2{%
+  \readline{#1}#2%
+  \edef#2{\xp@\@car#2#1{}\@nil}%
+}
+\def\readChar#1#2{%
+  \readline{#1}#2%
+  \changecase\uppercase#2%
+  \edef#2{\xp@\@car #2#1{}\@nil}%
+}
+\def\changecase#1#2{\@casetoks\xp@{#2}%
+  \edef#2{#1{\def\nx@#2{\the\@casetoks}}}#2}
+\newtoks\@casetoks
+\def\checkinteger#1#2{\let\scansign@\@empty
+  \def\scanresult@{#2}%
+  \xp@\scanint#1x\endscan}
+\def\scanint#1{%
+  \ifodd 0#11 %
+    \def\@tempa{\afterassignment\endscan
+      \scanresult@=\scansign@#1}%
+  \else
+    \if -#1\relax
+      \edef\scansign@{%
+        \ifx\@empty\scansign@ -\fi}%
+      \def\@tempa{\scanint}%
+    \else
+      \if +#1\relax
+        \def\@tempa{\scanint}%
+      \else % not a valid number
+        \def\@tempa{%
+          \scanresult@=-\maxdimen\endscan}%
+  \fi\fi\fi
+  \@tempa
+}
+\def\endscan#1\endscan{}
+\newcount\dimenfirstpart
+\newtoks\dimentoks
+\def\scandimen#1{%
+  \ifodd 0#11
+    \def\@tempa{\def\@tempa{\scandimenb}%
+      \afterassignment\@tempa
+      \dimenfirstpart#1}%
+  \else
+    \if \if,#1.\else#1\fi.%
+      \def\@tempa{\scandimenc}%
+    \else
+      \if -#1% then flipflop the sign
+        \edef\scansign@{%
+          \ifx\@empty\scansign@ -\fi}%
+        \def\@tempa{\scandimen}%
+      \else
+        \if +#1% then ignore it
+          \def\@tempa{\scandimen}%
+        \else % not a valid dimen
+          \def\@tempa{%
+            \scanresult@=-\maxdimen\endscan}%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi
+  \@tempa
+}
+\def\scandimenb#1{%
+  \if \if,#1.\else#1\fi.%
+    \def\@tempa{\scandimenc}%
+  \else
+    \def\@tempa{\scanunitsa#1}%
+  \fi
+  \@tempa
+}
+\def\scandimenc#1{%
+  \ifodd 0#11 \dimentoks\xp@{%
+      \the\dimentoks#1}%
+    \def\@tempa{\scandimenc}%
+  \else
+  \def\@tempa{\scanunitsa#1}%
+  \fi
+  \@tempa
+}
+\def\scanunitsa#1\endscan{%
+  \def\@tempa##1true##2##3\@tempa{##2}%
+  \lowercase{%
+    \xp@\ifx\xp@\end
+    \@tempa#1true\end\@tempa
+  }%
+    \let\dimentrue@\@empty
+    \def\@tempa{\scanunitsb#1\endscan}%
+  \else
+    \def\dimentrue@{true}%
+    \def\@tempa##1true##2\@tempa{%
+      \def\@tempa{##1}%
+      \ifx\@tempa\@empty
+        \def\@tempa{\scanunitsb##2\endscan}%
+      \else
+        \def\@tempa{\scanunitsb xx\endscan}%
+      \fi}%
+    \@tempa#1\@tempa
+  \fi
+  \@tempa
+}
+\def\scanunitsb#1#2{%
+  \def\@tempa##1#1#2##2##3\@nil{##2}%
+  \def\@tempb##1{T\@tempa
+    pcTptTcmTccTemTexTinTmmTddTspT##1F\@nil}%
+  \lowercase{%
+  \if\@tempb{#1#2}%
+  }%
+   \scanresult@=\scansign@
+     \number\dimenfirstpart.\the\dimentoks
+     \dimentrue@#1#2\relax
+  \else
+    \scanresult@=-\maxdimen
+  \fi
+  \endscan
+}
+\def\checkdimen#1#2{%
+  \let\scansign@\@empty \def\scanresult@{#2}%
+  \let\dimentrue@\@empty
+  \dimenfirstpart\z@ \dimentoks{}%
+  \xp@\scandimen#1xx\endscan
+}
+\restorecatcodes
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `dialog.sty'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/dialogl/grabhedr.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/dialogl/grabhedr.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..dfc6ba2540a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/dialogl/grabhedr.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,167 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `grabhedr.sty',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% grabhedr.dtx  (with options: `2e')
+%% This is a generated file.
+%% 
+%% Copyright 1994 Michael John Downes
+%% Copyright 2013 TeX Users Group.
+%% 
+%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1
+%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+%% The latest version of this license is in
+%%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%% 
+%% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "unmaintained".
+%% 
+%% The list of all files belonging to the distribution is given in the file
+%% `manifest.txt'.
+%% 
+%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%%% ====================================================================
+%%%  @LaTeX-style-file{
+%%%     filename        = "grabhedr.dtx",
+%%%     version         = "1.99a",
+%%%     date            = "2013/01/24",
+%%%     author          = "Michael Downes",
+%%%     copyright       = "This file is part of the dialogl package, released
+%%%                        under the LPPL; see dialogl.ins for details."
+%%%     keywords        = "TeX, file header,
+%%%     supported       = "no",
+%%%     abstract        = "This file defines a macro \inputfwh
+%%%       to be used instead of \input, to allow TeX to grab
+%%%       information from standardized file headers in the form
+%%%       proposed by Nelson Beebe during his term as president of the
+%%%       TeX Users Group. Of which all this here is an example.",
+%%%  }
+%%% ====================================================================
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+\ProvidesPackage{grabhedr}[1994/11/08 v0.9j]
+\begingroup
+\catcode96 12 % left quote
+\catcode`\= 12
+\catcode`\{=1 \catcode`\}=2 \catcode`\#=6
+\catcode`\$=3 \catcode`\~=13 \catcode`\^=7
+\catcode`\_=8 \catcode`\^^M=5 \catcode`\"=12
+\catcode`\@=11
+\gdef\@empty{}
+\long\gdef\@gobble#1{}
+\long\gdef\@gobbletwo#1#2{}
+\long\gdef\@gobblethree#1#2#3{}
+\long\gdef\@car#1#2\@nil{#1}
+\ifx\UndEFiNed\@@input % LaTeX not loaded.
+  \edef\0{\meaning\input}\edef\1{\string\input}%
+  \ifx\0\1%
+    \global\let\@@input\input
+  \else
+    \errhelp{%
+Grabhedr.sty needs to know the name of the
+\input primitive in order to define \inputfwh
+properly. Consult a TeXnician for help.}
+    \errmessage{%
+      Non-primitive \noexpand\input detected}%
+  \fi
+\fi
+\global\toksdef\toks@=0
+\long\gdef\afterfi#1\fi{\fi#1}
+\global\let\nx@\noexpand
+\global\let\xp@\expandafter
+\begingroup \lccode`\.=`\%%
+\lowercase{\gdef\@percentchar{.}}%
+\endgroup
+\gdef\fileversiondate#1#2#3{%
+  \xp@\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{#2 (#3)}%
+  \def\filename{#1}\def\fileversion{#2}%
+  \def\filedate{#3}%
+  \message{#1 \csname#1\endcsname}%
+}
+\xdef\@filehdrstart{%
+  \@percentchar\@percentchar\@percentchar\space
+  ==================================%
+  ==================================}
+\gdef\@scanfileheader#1@#2#{\@xscanfileheader}
+\long\gdef\@xscanfileheader#1{%
+  \@yscanfileheader#1{} version = "??",
+  date = "??",\@yscanfileheader}
+\long\gdef\@yscanfileheader
+  #1 filename = "#2",#3 version = "#4",%
+  #5 date = "#6",#7\@yscanfileheader{%
+  \endgroup
+  \csname fileversiondate\endcsname{#2}{#4}{#6}%
+}
+\begingroup
+\lccode`\$=`\^^M
+\lowercase{\gdef\@readfirstheaderline#1$}{%
+  \toks@{#1}%
+  \edef\@tempa{\@percentchar\the\toks@}%
+  \ifx\@tempa\@filehdrstart
+    \endgroup \begingroup
+    \catcode`\%=9 \catcode`\^^M=5 \catcode`\@=11
+    \catcode`\ =10 \catcode`\==12 \catcode`\"=12
+  \xp@\@scanfileheader
+  \else
+    \message{(* Missing file header? *)}%
+    \afterfi\endgroup
+  \fi}
+\endgroup
+\gdef\@xinputfwh{%
+  \ifx\next\@readfirstheaderline
+    \catcode`\%=12 \catcode`\{=12 \catcode`\}=12
+    \catcode`\\=12 \catcode`\^^L=12
+    \catcode`\^=12
+    \catcode`\^^M=3\relax
+  \else \endgroup\fi
+}
+\gdef\@inputfwh{\futurelet\next\@xinputfwh}
+\gdef\inputfwh#1{%
+  \begingroup\catcode`\%=\active
+  \endlinechar`\^^M\relax
+  \lccode`\~=`\%\relax
+  \lowercase{\let~}\@readfirstheaderline
+  \xp@\@inputfwh\@@input #1\relax
+}
+\gdef\localcatcodes#1{%
+  \ifx\@empty\@catcodestack
+    \gdef\@catcodestack{{}}%
+  \fi
+  \def\do##1##2{%
+    \ifnum##2>\z@
+      \catcode\number`##1 \space
+      \number\catcode`##1\relax
+    \expandafter\do\fi}%
+  \xdef\@catcodestack{{\do#1\relax\m@ne}%
+    \@catcodestack}%
+  \def\do##1##2{\catcode`##1 ##2\relax\do}%
+  \do#1\ {\catcode32\let\do}%
+}
+\gdef\@catcodestack{{}}
+\gdef\restorecatcodes{%
+  \begingroup
+  \ifx\@empty\@catcodestack
+    \errmessage{Can't pop catcodes;
+      \nx@\@catcodestack = empty}%
+    \endgroup
+  \else
+    \def\do##1##2\do{%
+      \gdef\@catcodestack{##2}%
+      \endgroup##1}%
+    \xp@\do\@catcodestack\do
+  \fi
+}
+\expandafter\gdef\csname trap.input\endcsname
+  \input#1 \relax{%
+    \expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax
+      \afterfi\inputfwh{#1}\relax
+    \fi}
+\endgroup
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `grabhedr.sty'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/dialogl/listout.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/dialogl/listout.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..d66ac19a794
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/dialogl/listout.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,3123 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `listout.tex',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% grabhedr.dtx 
+%% dialogl.dtx 
+%% menus.dtx 
+%% listout.dtx 
+%% This is a generated file.
+%% 
+%% Copyright 1994 Michael John Downes
+%% Copyright 2013 TeX Users Group.
+%% 
+%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1
+%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+%% The latest version of this license is in
+%%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%% 
+%% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "unmaintained".
+%% 
+%% The list of all files belonging to the distribution is given in the file
+%% `manifest.txt'.
+%% 
+%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%%% ====================================================================
+%%%  @LaTeX-style-file{
+%%%     filename        = "grabhedr.dtx",
+%%%     version         = "1.99a",
+%%%     date            = "2013/01/24",
+%%%     author          = "Michael Downes",
+%%%     copyright       = "This file is part of the dialogl package, released
+%%%                        under the LPPL; see dialogl.ins for details."
+%%%     keywords        = "TeX, file header,
+%%%     supported       = "no",
+%%%     abstract        = "This file defines a macro \inputfwh
+%%%       to be used instead of \input, to allow TeX to grab
+%%%       information from standardized file headers in the form
+%%%       proposed by Nelson Beebe during his term as president of the
+%%%       TeX Users Group. Of which all this here is an example.",
+%%%  }
+%%% ====================================================================
+\begingroup
+\catcode96 12 % left quote
+\catcode`\= 12
+\catcode`\{=1 \catcode`\}=2 \catcode`\#=6
+\catcode`\$=3 \catcode`\~=13 \catcode`\^=7
+\catcode`\_=8 \catcode`\^^M=5 \catcode`\"=12
+\catcode`\@=11
+\gdef\@empty{}
+\long\gdef\@gobble#1{}
+\long\gdef\@gobbletwo#1#2{}
+\long\gdef\@gobblethree#1#2#3{}
+\long\gdef\@car#1#2\@nil{#1}
+\ifx\UndEFiNed\@@input % LaTeX not loaded.
+  \edef\0{\meaning\input}\edef\1{\string\input}%
+  \ifx\0\1%
+    \global\let\@@input\input
+  \else
+    \errhelp{%
+Grabhedr.sty needs to know the name of the
+\input primitive in order to define \inputfwh
+properly. Consult a TeXnician for help.}
+    \errmessage{%
+      Non-primitive \noexpand\input detected}%
+  \fi
+\fi
+\global\toksdef\toks@=0
+\long\gdef\afterfi#1\fi{\fi#1}
+\global\let\nx@\noexpand
+\global\let\xp@\expandafter
+\begingroup \lccode`\.=`\%%
+\lowercase{\gdef\@percentchar{.}}%
+\endgroup
+\gdef\fileversiondate#1#2#3{%
+  \xp@\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{#2 (#3)}%
+  \def\filename{#1}\def\fileversion{#2}%
+  \def\filedate{#3}%
+  \message{#1 \csname#1\endcsname}%
+}
+\xdef\@filehdrstart{%
+  \@percentchar\@percentchar\@percentchar\space
+  ==================================%
+  ==================================}
+\gdef\@scanfileheader#1@#2#{\@xscanfileheader}
+\long\gdef\@xscanfileheader#1{%
+  \@yscanfileheader#1{} version = "??",
+  date = "??",\@yscanfileheader}
+\long\gdef\@yscanfileheader
+  #1 filename = "#2",#3 version = "#4",%
+  #5 date = "#6",#7\@yscanfileheader{%
+  \endgroup
+  \csname fileversiondate\endcsname{#2}{#4}{#6}%
+}
+\begingroup
+\lccode`\$=`\^^M
+\lowercase{\gdef\@readfirstheaderline#1$}{%
+  \toks@{#1}%
+  \edef\@tempa{\@percentchar\the\toks@}%
+  \ifx\@tempa\@filehdrstart
+    \endgroup \begingroup
+    \catcode`\%=9 \catcode`\^^M=5 \catcode`\@=11
+    \catcode`\ =10 \catcode`\==12 \catcode`\"=12
+  \xp@\@scanfileheader
+  \else
+    \message{(* Missing file header? *)}%
+    \afterfi\endgroup
+  \fi}
+\endgroup
+\gdef\@xinputfwh{%
+  \ifx\next\@readfirstheaderline
+    \catcode`\%=12 \catcode`\{=12 \catcode`\}=12
+    \catcode`\\=12 \catcode`\^^L=12
+    \catcode`\^=12
+    \catcode`\^^M=3\relax
+  \else \endgroup\fi
+}
+\gdef\@inputfwh{\futurelet\next\@xinputfwh}
+\gdef\inputfwh#1{%
+  \begingroup\catcode`\%=\active
+  \endlinechar`\^^M\relax
+  \lccode`\~=`\%\relax
+  \lowercase{\let~}\@readfirstheaderline
+  \xp@\@inputfwh\@@input #1\relax
+}
+\gdef\localcatcodes#1{%
+  \ifx\@empty\@catcodestack
+    \gdef\@catcodestack{{}}%
+  \fi
+  \def\do##1##2{%
+    \ifnum##2>\z@
+      \catcode\number`##1 \space
+      \number\catcode`##1\relax
+    \expandafter\do\fi}%
+  \xdef\@catcodestack{{\do#1\relax\m@ne}%
+    \@catcodestack}%
+  \def\do##1##2{\catcode`##1 ##2\relax\do}%
+  \do#1\ {\catcode32\let\do}%
+}
+\gdef\@catcodestack{{}}
+\gdef\restorecatcodes{%
+  \begingroup
+  \ifx\@empty\@catcodestack
+    \errmessage{Can't pop catcodes;
+      \nx@\@catcodestack = empty}%
+    \endgroup
+  \else
+    \def\do##1##2\do{%
+      \gdef\@catcodestack{##2}%
+      \endgroup##1}%
+    \xp@\do\@catcodestack\do
+  \fi
+}
+\expandafter\gdef\csname trap.input\endcsname
+  \input#1 \relax{%
+    \expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax
+      \afterfi\inputfwh{#1}\relax
+    \fi}
+\endgroup
+%%% ====================================================================
+%%%  @LaTeX-style-file{
+%%%     filename        = "dialogl.dtx",
+%%%     version         = "1.99a",
+%%%     date            = "2013/01/24",
+%%%     author          = "Michael Downes",
+%%%     copyright       = "This file is part of the dialogl package, released
+%%%                        under the LPPL; see dialogl.ins for details."
+%%%     keywords        = "TeX, dialog",
+%%%     supported       = "no",
+%%%     abstract        = "This file provides macros for writing
+%%%       messages and menus on screen, and reading user responses. It
+%%%       can be used with LaTeX as a documentstyle option, or in
+%%%       other forms of TeX by a standard \input statement.",
+%%%  }
+%%% ====================================================================
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%% The line break is significant here:
+\localcatcodes{\@{11}\ {10}\
+{5}\~{13}\"{12}\#{6}\^{7}\`{12}}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\begingroup
+\def\do{12 \catcode`}
+\catcode`\~\do\!\do\@\do\#\do\$\do\^\do\&
+\do\*\do\(\do\)\do\-\do\_\do\=\do\[\do\]
+\do\;\do\:\do\'\do\"\do\<\do\>\do\,\do\.
+\do\/\do\?\do\|12\relax
+\escapechar -1
+\edef\\{\string\\}
+\edef\{{\string\{}\edef\}{\string\}}
+\catcode`\ =12\catcode`\%=12
+\xdef\otherchars
+{ !"#$%&'()*+,-./:;<=>?[\\]^_`\{|\}~}
+\endgroup %              ^     ^  ^
+\begingroup
+\endlinechar = -1
+\def\do{12 \catcode`}
+\catcode`\^^@\do\^^A\do\^^B\do\^^C
+\do\^^D\do\^^E\do\^^F\do\^^G\do\^^H\do\^^I
+\do\^^J\do\^^K\do\^^L\do\^^M\do\^^N\do\^^O
+\do\^^P\do\^^Q\do\^^R\do\^^S\do\^^T\do\^^U
+\do\^^V\do\^^W\do\^^X\do\^^Y\do\^^Z\do\^^[
+\do\^^\\do\^^]\do\^^^\do\^^_\do\^^? 12\relax
+\gdef\controlchars{^^@^^A^^B^^C^^D^^E^^F^^G
+  ^^H^^I^^J^^K^^L^^M^^N^^O^^P^^Q^^R^^S^^T
+  ^^U^^V^^W^^X^^Y^^Z^^[^^\^^]^^^^^_^^?}
+\endgroup
+\begingroup
+\def\do{12 \catcode`}
+\catcode`\^^80\do\^^81\do\^^82\do\^^83\do\^^84
+\do\^^85\do\^^86\do\^^87\do\^^88\do\^^89\do\^^8a
+\do\^^8b\do\^^8c\do\^^8d\do\^^8e\do\^^8f
+\do\^^90\do\^^91\do\^^92\do\^^93\do\^^94\do\^^95
+\do\^^96\do\^^97\do\^^98\do\^^99\do\^^9a\do\^^9b
+\do\^^9c\do\^^9d\do\^^9e\do\^^9f
+\do\^^a0\do\^^a1\do\^^a2\do\^^a3\do\^^a4\do\^^a5
+\do\^^a6\do\^^a7\do\^^a8\do\^^a9\do\^^aa\do\^^ab
+\do\^^ac\do\^^ad\do\^^ae\do\^^af
+\do\^^b0\do\^^b1\do\^^b2\do\^^b3\do\^^b4\do\^^b5
+\do\^^b6\do\^^b7\do\^^b8\do\^^b9\do\^^ba\do\^^bb
+\do\^^bc\do\^^bd\do\^^be\do\^^bf
+\do\^^c0\do\^^c1\do\^^c2\do\^^c3\do\^^c4\do\^^c5
+\do\^^c6\do\^^c7\do\^^c8\do\^^c9\do\^^ca\do\^^cb
+\do\^^cc\do\^^cd\do\^^ce\do\^^cf
+\do\^^d0\do\^^d1\do\^^d2\do\^^d3\do\^^d4\do\^^d5
+\do\^^d6\do\^^d7\do\^^d8\do\^^d9\do\^^da\do\^^db
+\do\^^dc\do\^^dd\do\^^de\do\^^df
+\do\^^e0\do\^^e1\do\^^e2\do\^^e3\do\^^e4\do\^^e5
+\do\^^e6\do\^^e7\do\^^e8\do\^^e9\do\^^ea\do\^^eb
+\do\^^ec\do\^^ed\do\^^ee\do\^^ef
+\do\^^f0\do\^^f1\do\^^f2\do\^^f3\do\^^f4\do\^^f5
+\do\^^f6\do\^^f7\do\^^f8\do\^^f9\do\^^fa\do\^^fb
+\do\^^fc\do\^^fd\do\^^fe\do\^^ff 12\relax
+\gdef\highchars{%
+^^80^^81^^82^^83^^84^^85^^86^^87^^88%
+^^89^^8a^^8b^^8c^^8d^^8e^^8f%
+^^90^^91^^92^^93^^94^^95^^96^^97^^98%
+^^99^^9a^^9b^^9c^^9d^^9e^^9f%
+^^a0^^a1^^a2^^a3^^a4^^a5^^a6^^a7^^a8%
+^^a9^^aa^^ab^^ac^^ad^^ae^^af%
+^^b0^^b1^^b2^^b3^^b4^^b5^^b6^^b7^^b8%
+^^b9^^ba^^bb^^bc^^bd^^be^^bf%
+^^c0^^c1^^c2^^c3^^c4^^c5^^c6^^c7^^c8%
+^^c9^^ca^^cb^^cc^^cd^^ce^^cf%
+^^d0^^d1^^d2^^d3^^d4^^d5^^d6^^d7^^d8%
+^^d9^^da^^db^^dc^^dd^^de^^df%
+^^e0^^e1^^e2^^e3^^e4^^e5^^e6^^e7^^e8%
+^^e9^^ea^^eb^^ec^^ed^^ee^^ef%
+^^f0^^f1^^f2^^f3^^f4^^f5^^f6^^f7^^f8%
+^^f9^^fa^^fb^^fc^^fd^^fe^^ff}
+\endgroup
+\def\actively#1#2{\catcode`#2\active
+  \begingroup \lccode`\~=`#2\relax
+  \lowercase{\endgroup#1~}}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\def\mesjsetup{\begingroup \count@=12
+  \def\do##1{\catcode`##1\count@ \do}%
+  \xp@\do\otherchars{a11 \@gobbletwo}%
+  \xp@\do\controlchars{a11 \@gobbletwo}%
+  \xp@\do\highchars{a11 \@gobbletwo}%
+  \actively\edef\^^I{ \space\space\space
+    \space\space\space\space}%
+  \endlinechar=`\^^M\actively\let\^^M=\relax
+  \catcode`\{=1 \catcode`\}=2 }
+\def\sendmesj{\newlinechar`\^^J%
+  \actively\def\^^M{^^J}%
+  \immediate\write\sixt@@n{\mesjtext}\endgroup}
+\def\mesj{\mesjsetup \afterassignment\sendmesj
+  \def\mesjtext}
+\def\sendprompt{%
+  \newlinechar`\!\relax \actively\def\^^M{!}%
+  \message{\mesjtext}\endgroup}
+\def\promptmesj{\mesjsetup
+  \afterassignment\sendprompt \def\mesjtext}
+\def\storemesj#1{\mesjsetup
+  \catcode`\#=6 % to allow arguments if needed
+  \afterassignment\endgroup
+  \long\gdef#1}
+\def\fmesj#1#2#{\mesjsetup
+  \catcode`\#=6 % restore to normal
+  \toks@{\long\gdef#1#2}%
+  \def\@tempa{%
+    \edef\@tempa{%
+      \the\toks@{%
+      \begingroup\def\nx@\mesjtext{\the\toks2 }%
+        \nx@\sendmesj}%
+    }%
+    \@tempa
+    \endgroup % Turn off the \mesjsetup catcodes
+  }%
+  \afterassignment\@tempa
+  \toks2=}
+\def\xmesjsetup{\mesjsetup
+  \iffalse{\fi
+  \catcode`\\=0 \catcode`\%=14
+  \begingroup \lccode`\0=`\\\lccode`\1=`\{%
+  \lccode`\2=`\}\lccode`\3=`\%%
+  \lowercase{\endgroup \def\\{0}\def\{{1}%
+    \def\}{2}\def\%{3}}%
+  \iffalse}\fi
+  \edef\&{\string &}%
+  \actively\let\&=\noexpand
+  \actively\let\^^M=\relax
+  \def\.{}%
+  \def\ { }\edef~{\string ~}%
+  \begingroup \lccode`\~=`\^^M%
+    \lowercase{\endgroup \def\^^M{~}}%
+  \let\^^J\^^M \def\par{\^^M\^^M}%
+}
+\def\xmesj{\xmesjsetup \afterassignment\sendmesj
+  \edef\mesjtext}
+\def\promptxmesj{\xmesjsetup
+  \afterassignment\sendprompt \edef\mesjtext}
+\def\storexmesj#1#2#{\xmesjsetup
+  \catcode`\#=6 % to allow arguments if needed
+  \edef\#{\string##}%
+  \afterassignment\endgroup
+  \long\xdef#1#2}
+\def\fxmesj#1#2#{\xmesjsetup
+  \catcode`\#=6 % restore to normal
+  \edef\#{\string##}%
+  \toks@{\long\xdef#1#2}%
+  \def\@tempa{%
+    \edef\@tempa{%
+      \the\toks@{\begingroup
+      \def\nx@\nx@\nx@\mesjtext{\the\toks\tw@}%
+      \nx@\nx@\nx@\sendmesj}}%
+    \@tempa % execute the constructed xdef
+    \endgroup % restore normal catcodes
+  }%
+  \afterassignment\@tempa
+  \toks\tw@=}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\def\readline#1#2{%
+  \begingroup \count@ 12 %
+  \def\do##1{\catcode`##1\count@ \do}%
+  \xp@\do\otherchars{a11 \@gobbletwo}%
+  \xp@\do\controlchars{a11 \@gobbletwo}%
+  \xp@\do\highchars{a11 \@gobbletwo}%
+  \catcode`\ =10 \catcode`\^^I=10 %
+  \catcode`\^^M=9 % ignore
+  \endlinechar`\^^M
+  \read\m@ne to#2%
+  \edef#2{\def\nx@#2{#2}}%
+  \xp@\endgroup #2%
+  \ifx\@empty#2\def#2{#1}\fi
+}
+\def\xreadline#1#2{%
+  \begingroup
+    \xp@\let\csname bye\endcsname\relax
+    \xp@\let\csname newif\endcsname\relax
+    \xp@\let\csname newcount\endcsname\relax
+    \xp@\let\csname newdimen\endcsname\relax
+    \xp@\let\csname newskip\endcsname\relax
+    \xp@\let\csname newmuskip\endcsname\relax
+    \xp@\let\csname newtoks\endcsname\relax
+    \xp@\let\csname newbox\endcsname\relax
+    \xp@\let\csname newinsert\endcsname\relax
+    \xp@\let\csname +\endcsname\relax
+    \actively\let\^^L\relax
+  \catcode`\^^M=9 % ignore
+  \endlinechar`\^^M% reset to normal
+  \read\m@ne to#2%
+  \toks@\xp@{#2}%
+  \edef\@tempa{\def\nx@#2{\the\toks@}}%
+  \xp@\endgroup \@tempa
+  \ifx\@empty#2\def#2{#1}\fi
+}
+\def\readchar#1#2{%
+  \readline{#1}#2%
+  \edef#2{\xp@\@car#2#1{}\@nil}%
+}
+\def\readChar#1#2{%
+  \readline{#1}#2%
+  \changecase\uppercase#2%
+  \edef#2{\xp@\@car #2#1{}\@nil}%
+}
+\def\changecase#1#2{\@casetoks\xp@{#2}%
+  \edef#2{#1{\def\nx@#2{\the\@casetoks}}}#2}
+\newtoks\@casetoks
+\def\checkinteger#1#2{\let\scansign@\@empty
+  \def\scanresult@{#2}%
+  \xp@\scanint#1x\endscan}
+\def\scanint#1{%
+  \ifodd 0#11 %
+    \def\@tempa{\afterassignment\endscan
+      \scanresult@=\scansign@#1}%
+  \else
+    \if -#1\relax
+      \edef\scansign@{%
+        \ifx\@empty\scansign@ -\fi}%
+      \def\@tempa{\scanint}%
+    \else
+      \if +#1\relax
+        \def\@tempa{\scanint}%
+      \else % not a valid number
+        \def\@tempa{%
+          \scanresult@=-\maxdimen\endscan}%
+  \fi\fi\fi
+  \@tempa
+}
+\def\endscan#1\endscan{}
+\newcount\dimenfirstpart
+\newtoks\dimentoks
+\def\scandimen#1{%
+  \ifodd 0#11
+    \def\@tempa{\def\@tempa{\scandimenb}%
+      \afterassignment\@tempa
+      \dimenfirstpart#1}%
+  \else
+    \if \if,#1.\else#1\fi.%
+      \def\@tempa{\scandimenc}%
+    \else
+      \if -#1% then flipflop the sign
+        \edef\scansign@{%
+          \ifx\@empty\scansign@ -\fi}%
+        \def\@tempa{\scandimen}%
+      \else
+        \if +#1% then ignore it
+          \def\@tempa{\scandimen}%
+        \else % not a valid dimen
+          \def\@tempa{%
+            \scanresult@=-\maxdimen\endscan}%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi
+  \@tempa
+}
+\def\scandimenb#1{%
+  \if \if,#1.\else#1\fi.%
+    \def\@tempa{\scandimenc}%
+  \else
+    \def\@tempa{\scanunitsa#1}%
+  \fi
+  \@tempa
+}
+\def\scandimenc#1{%
+  \ifodd 0#11 \dimentoks\xp@{%
+      \the\dimentoks#1}%
+    \def\@tempa{\scandimenc}%
+  \else
+  \def\@tempa{\scanunitsa#1}%
+  \fi
+  \@tempa
+}
+\def\scanunitsa#1\endscan{%
+  \def\@tempa##1true##2##3\@tempa{##2}%
+  \lowercase{%
+    \xp@\ifx\xp@\end
+    \@tempa#1true\end\@tempa
+  }%
+    \let\dimentrue@\@empty
+    \def\@tempa{\scanunitsb#1\endscan}%
+  \else
+    \def\dimentrue@{true}%
+    \def\@tempa##1true##2\@tempa{%
+      \def\@tempa{##1}%
+      \ifx\@tempa\@empty
+        \def\@tempa{\scanunitsb##2\endscan}%
+      \else
+        \def\@tempa{\scanunitsb xx\endscan}%
+      \fi}%
+    \@tempa#1\@tempa
+  \fi
+  \@tempa
+}
+\def\scanunitsb#1#2{%
+  \def\@tempa##1#1#2##2##3\@nil{##2}%
+  \def\@tempb##1{T\@tempa
+    pcTptTcmTccTemTexTinTmmTddTspT##1F\@nil}%
+  \lowercase{%
+  \if\@tempb{#1#2}%
+  }%
+   \scanresult@=\scansign@
+     \number\dimenfirstpart.\the\dimentoks
+     \dimentrue@#1#2\relax
+  \else
+    \scanresult@=-\maxdimen
+  \fi
+  \endscan
+}
+\def\checkdimen#1#2{%
+  \let\scansign@\@empty \def\scanresult@{#2}%
+  \let\dimentrue@\@empty
+  \dimenfirstpart\z@ \dimentoks{}%
+  \xp@\scandimen#1xx\endscan
+}
+\restorecatcodes
+%%% ====================================================================
+%%%  @LaTeX-style-file{
+%%%     filename        = "menus.dtx",
+%%%     version         = "1.99a",
+%%%     date            = "2013/01/24",
+%%%     author          = "Michael Downes",
+%%%     copyright       = "This file is part of the dialogl package, released
+%%%                        under the LPPL; see dialogl.ins for details."
+%%%     keywords        = "TeX, menus",
+%%%     supported       = "no",
+%%%     abstract        = "This file provides functions for writing
+%%%       messages and menus on screen, and reading user responses. It
+%%%       can be used with LaTeX as a documentstyle option, or in
+%%%       other forms of TeX by a standard \input statement.",
+%%%  }
+%%% ====================================================================
+\localcatcodes{\@{11}%
+  \~{13}\"{12}\#{6}\^{7}\`{12}\${3}\:{12}}
+\storexmesj\menuprefix{
+======================================================================
+}
+\let\menusuffix=\menuprefix
+\storemesj\inmenuA{
+}
+\storemesj\inmenuB{
+}
+\storemesj\menuline{  }
+\def\menutopline{}
+\def\menubotline{}
+\storemesj\endmenuline{
+}%
+\def\menunumber#1{[#1] }
+\def\menuprompt{\promptmesj{Your choice? }}
+\newtoks\menufirstpart
+\newtoks\menuchoices
+\newtoks\menulastpart
+\def\fmenu#1#2#{\mesjsetup
+  \catcode`\#=6 % for parameters
+  \toks@{\fxmenub{\gdef}{\begingroup}{}#1{#2}}%
+  \def\@tempa##1##{%
+    \def\@tempa####1####{%
+      \def\@tempa{\the\toks@}%
+      \afterassignment\@tempa \menulastpart}%
+    \afterassignment\@tempa \menuchoices}%
+  \afterassignment\@tempa \menufirstpart
+}
+\begingroup % localize \lccode change
+\lccode`\~=`\^^M
+\lowercase{%
+\long\gdef\stripM#1$~#2#3\stripM#4{%
+  \ifx$#2%
+    \stripMa#1\stripMa#4%
+  \else
+    \stripMb#2#3\stripMb#4%
+  \fi
+}
+}% end lowercase
+\lowercase{%
+\long\gdef\stripMa $#1\stripMa#2{%
+  \stripMb#1$~$$\stripMb#2}
+}% end lowercase
+\lowercase{%
+\long\gdef\stripMb#1~$#2#3\stripMb#4{%
+  \ifx$#2%
+    \stripMc#1\stripMc#4%
+  \else
+    \stripMd#1\stripMd#4%
+  \fi
+}
+}% end lowercase
+\long\gdef\stripMc#1$#2\stripMc#3{%
+  \stripMd#1\stripMd#3}
+\long\gdef\stripMd#1\stripMd#2{#2{#1}}
+\endgroup
+\begingroup \lccode`\~=`\^^M
+\lowercase{%
+\gdef\stripcontrolMs#1{\xp@\stripM
+  \xp@$\the#1$~$$\stripM#1}
+}% end lowercase
+\lowercase{%
+\gdef\addmenulines#1#2#3{%
+  \def ~##1~##2{%
+    #1\xp@{\the#1#2##1#3}%
+    \ifx\end##2\xp@\@gobbletwo\fi~##2}%
+  \edef\@tempa{\nx@~\the#1\nx@~}#1{}%
+  \@tempa\end}
+}% end lowercase
+\endgroup % restore lccode of ~
+\def\fxmenub#1#2#3#4#5{%
+  \stripcontrolMs\menufirstpart
+  \stripcontrolMs\menulastpart
+  \stripcontrolMs\menuchoices
+  \addmenulines\menuchoices\menuline\endmenuline
+  \actively\let\^^M\relax % needed for \xdef
+  \toks@{\long#1#4#5}% e.g. \xdef\foo##1##2
+  \edef\@tempa{\the\menufirstpart}%
+  \ifx\@tempa\@empty
+    \let\nxa@\@gobble
+  \else
+    \addmenulines\menufirstpart
+      \menutopline\endmenuline
+    \let\nxa@\nx@
+  \fi
+ \edef\@tempa{\the\menulastpart}%
+  \ifx\@tempa\@empty
+    \let\nxb@\@gobble
+  \else
+    \addmenulines\menulastpart
+      \menubotline\endmenuline
+    \let\nxb@\nx@
+  \fi
+\edef\@tempa{{#3\nx@#3#2%
+    \def#3\nx@#3\mesjtext{%
+      #3\nx@#3\menuprefix
+      \the\menufirstpart #3\nxa@#3\inmenuA
+      \the\menuchoices #3\nxb@#3\inmenuB
+      \the\menulastpart #3\nx@#3\menusuffix}%
+    #3\nx@#3\sendmesj
+    #3\nx@#3\menuprompt}}%
+  \toks2 \xp@{\@tempa}%
+  \edef\@tempa{\the\toks@\the\toks2 }%
+  \let\menutopline\relax \let\menuline\relax
+  \let\menubotline\relax \let\endmenuline\relax
+  \let\menunumber\relax
+  \@tempa % finally, execute the \gdef or \xdef
+  \endgroup % matches \mesjsetup done by \fxmenu
+}% end \fxmenub
+\def\fxmenu#1#2#{\xmesjsetup
+  \toks@{\fxmenub{\xdef}{\xmesjsetup}\nx@#1{#2}}%
+  \def\@tempa##1##{%
+    \def\@tempa####1####{%
+      \def\@tempa{\the\toks@}%
+      \afterassignment\@tempa \menulastpart}%
+    \afterassignment\@tempa \menuchoices}%
+  \afterassignment\@tempa \menufirstpart
+}
+\def\notyet#1{%
+  \errmessage{Not yet implemented:  \string#1}}
+\long\def\nmenu#1#2#3#4#5{\notyet\nmenu}
+\long\def\nxmenu#1#2#3#4#5{\notyet\nxmenu}
+\newtoks\optionstack
+\let\curmenu\@empty
+\let\estart\relax
+\let\eend\relax
+\def\pushoptions#1{%
+  \edef\pushtemp{\estart
+    \def\nx@\curmenu{\curmenu}%
+    \eend
+    \the\optionstack}%
+  \global\optionstack\xp@{\pushtemp}%
+  \edef\curmenu{\curmenu#1}%
+}
+\def\popoptions{%
+  \edef\@tempa{\the\optionstack}%
+  \ifx\@empty\@tempa
+    \errmessage{Can't pop empty stack
+      (\string\optionstack)}%
+  \else
+    \def\estart##1\eend##2\@nil{%
+      \global\optionstack{##2}%
+      \let\estart\relax##1}%
+    \the\optionstack\@nil
+  \fi
+}
+\fmesj\moptionX{Exiting . . .}
+\def\repeatoption{%
+  \csname moption\curmenu\endcsname}
+\def\moptionQ{\popoptions \repeatoption}
+\fxmesj\badoptionmesj#1{%
+?---I don't understand "#1".}
+\def\optionexec#1{%
+  \if ?#1\relax \let\@tempa\moptionhelp
+  \else \if Q#1\relax
+    \ifx\curmenu\@empty \let\@tempa\moptionX
+    \else \let\@tempa\moptionQ \fi
+  \else \if X#1\relax \let\@tempa\moptionX
+  \else
+    \xp@\let\xp@\@tempa
+      \csname moption\curmenu#1\endcsname
+    \ifx\@tempa\relax
+      \badoptionmesj{#1}\let\@tempa\repeatoption
+    \else
+      \pushoptions{#1}%
+    \fi
+  \fi\fi\fi
+  \@tempa
+}
+\def\optionfileexec#1{\notyet\optionfileexec}
+\def\xoptiontest#1{TT\fi
+  \begingroup \def\0{?}\def\1{Q}%
+  \def\2{q}\def\3{x}\def\4{X}%
+    \aftergroup\if\aftergroup T%
+    \ifx\0#1\aftergroup T%
+    \else\ifx\1#1\aftergroup T%
+    \else\ifx\2#1\aftergroup T%
+    \else\ifx\3#1\aftergroup T%
+    \else\ifx\4#1\aftergroup T%
+    \else \aftergroup F%
+    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+  \endgroup
+}
+\fxmesj\menuhelpmesj{&\menuprefix%
+A response of Q will usually send you back to %
+the previous menu.
+A response of X will get you entirely out of %
+the menu system.
+&\menusuffix%
+Press the <Return> key ( Enter ) to continue:
+}
+\def\moptionhelp{%
+  \menuhelpmesj \readline{}\reply \repeatoption}
+\def\moptionhelp{%
+  \menuhelpmesj \readline{}\reply \repeatoption}
+\xp@\def\csname moption?\endcsname{%
+  \moptionhelp}
+\def\specialhelp#1#2{%
+  \let\specialhelpreply=#1\def#1{?}\begingroup
+  \def\menuhelpmesj{\let#1\specialhelpreply
+    \promptxmesj{#2\
+Press <return> to continue:}\endgroup}%
+}
+\def\specialhelpreply{}
+\def\lettermenu#1{%
+  \csname menu#1\endcsname
+  \readChar{Q}\reply \optionexec\reply
+}
+\restorecatcodes
+%%% ====================================================================
+%%%  @TeX-file{
+%%%     filename        = "listout.dtx",
+%%%     version         = "1.99a",
+%%%     date            = "2013/01/24",
+%%%     author          = "Michael Downes",
+%%%     copyright       = "This file is part of the dialogl package, released
+%%%                        under the LPPL; see dialogl.ins for details."
+%%%     keywords        = "tex, verbatim",
+%%%     abstract        = "The purpose of this macro file is to print
+%%%       verbatim listings of arbitrary text files, fitting as much
+%%%       text per sheet of paper as possible. The default settings
+%%%       are for US letter size paper 8.5 x 11 inches, two `pages'
+%%%       per sheet, landscape mode, but extensive customization
+%%%       facilities are provided. To conserve even more paper, you
+%%%       should take advantage of any two-sided capabilities your
+%%%       printer may happen to have.",
+%%%  }
+%%% ====================================================================
+\localcatcodes{\@{11}\~{13}\"{12}\:{12}}
+\def\xmeaning#1{\xp@\xmeaningtrim\meaning#1}
+\def\xmeaningtrim#1->{}
+\def\TRUE{TT}
+\def\FALSE{TF}
+\def\@empty{}
+\def\@iden#1{#1}
+\def\datesepchar{ }
+\let\keepleadingzeros\FALSE
+\def\twodigits#1{\ifnum#1<10 0\fi
+  \xp@\@iden\xp@{\number#1}}
+\edef\themonth{\number\month}
+\edef\theday{\number\day}
+\edef\theyear{\number\year}
+\edef\yearmodC{\xp@\@gobbletwo\number\year}
+\def\Jan{January}   \def\Feb{February}
+\def\Mar{March}     \def\Apr{April}
+\def\May{May}       \def\Jun{June}
+\def\Jul{July}      \def\Aug{August}
+\def\Sep{September} \def\Oct{October}
+\def\Nov{November}  \def\Dec{December}
+\def\datesetup{%
+  \edef\themonthname{%
+    \ifcase\month ?% case 0---THIS CAN'T HAPPEN
+    \or\Jan\or\Feb\or\Mar\or\Apr\or\May\or\Jun
+    \or\Jul\or\Aug\or\Sep\or\Oct\or\Nov\or\Dec
+    \else ?\fi}%
+  \def\do##1##2##3##4\od{##1##2##3}%
+  \edef\themon{\xp@\do\themonthname\od}%
+  \let\theMON\themon \changecase\uppercase\theMON
+  \if\keepleadingzeros
+    \edef\themonth{\twodigits\month}%
+    \edef\theday{\twodigits\day}%
+  \else
+    \edef\themonth{\number\month}%
+    \edef\theday{\number\day}%
+  \fi
+}
+\datesetup
+\def\dateA{%
+  \theyear\datesepchar\themonth\datesepchar\theday}
+\def\dateB{%
+  \yearmodC\datesepchar\themonth\datesepchar\theday}
+\def\dateC{%
+  \themonth\datesepchar\theday\datesepchar\yearmodC}
+\def\dateD{%
+  \themonth\datesepchar\theday\datesepchar\theyear}
+\def\dateE{%
+  \theday\datesepchar\themon\datesepchar\yearmodC}
+\def\dateF{%
+  \theday\datesepchar\themon\datesepchar\theyear}
+\def\dateG{%
+  \theday\datesepchar\theMON\datesepchar\yearmodC}
+\def\dateH{%
+  \theday\datesepchar\theMON\datesepchar\theyear}
+\def\dateI{%
+  \themonthname\space\number\day, \theyear}
+\def\dateJ{%
+  \theday\datesepchar\themonthname\datesepchar\theyear}
+\def\todaysdate{\dateJ}
+\count@=\time \divide\count@ 60
+\edef\thehour{\twodigits\count@}
+\multiply\count@ -60 \advance\count@\time
+\edef\theminute{\twodigits\count@}
+\def\ampmpunct{.}
+\count@=\thehour\relax
+\ifnum\count@>11 \def\ampm{p}%
+  \ifnum\count@>12
+    \begingroup \advance\count@ -12
+      \aftergroup\edef\aftergroup\thehourmodtwelve
+      \aftergroup{\xp@
+    \endgroup \number\count@}%
+  \else
+    \edef\thehourmodtwelve{12}%
+  \fi
+\else
+  \def\ampm{a}%
+  \ifnum\count@=0 \count@=12 \fi
+  \edef\thehourmodtwelve{\number\count@}%
+\fi
+\let\AMPM\ampm \changecase\uppercase\AMPM
+\def\midnoon#1{\ifnum\time=0 midnight\else
+  \ifnum\time=720 noon\else#1\fi\fi}
+\def\timesepchar{:}
+\def\timeA{\thehour\theminute}
+\def\timeB{\thehour\timesepchar\theminute}
+\def\timeC{\thehourmodtwelve\timesepchar\theminute
+  \space\midnoon{\ampm m}}
+\def\timeD{\thehourmodtwelve\timesepchar\theminute
+  \space\midnoon{\ampm\ampmpunct m\ampmpunct}}
+\def\timeE{\thehourmodtwelve\timesepchar\theminute
+  \space\midnoon{\AMPM M}}
+\def\timeF{\thehourmodtwelve\timesepchar\theminute
+  \space\midnoon{\AMPM\ampmpunct M\ampmpunct}}
+\def\nowtime{\timeB}
+\chardef\curcol=1
+\chardef\totalcols=2
+\countdef\firstpageno=1
+\countdef\lastpageno=2
+\newbox\prevcolsbox
+\newdimen\paht \newdimen\pawd
+\newdimen\fullwd
+\newdimen\colwd
+\let\dependentcolwd\TRUE
+\newdimen\leftmargin
+\newdimen\rightmargin
+\let\dependentrightmargin\TRUE
+\def\computerfc{\relax \rightmargin=\leftmargin
+  \computefc }
+\def\computefc{\fullwd=\pawd
+  \advance\fullwd-\leftmargin
+  \advance\fullwd-\rightmargin
+  \colwd\fullwd
+  \advance\colwd \intercolspace
+  \divide\colwd \totalcols
+  \advance\colwd -\intercolspace
+  \edef\columnwidth{\the\colwd}%
+}
+\def\computefr{\fullwd\colwd
+  \advance\fullwd \intercolspace
+  \multiply\fullwd \totalcols
+  \advance\fullwd -\intercolspace
+  \rightmargin\pawd
+  \advance\rightmargin-\leftmargin
+  \advance\rightmargin-\fullwd
+}
+\newdimen\colht
+\newdimen\intercolspace \newdimen\overrun
+\newdimen\runheadht \newdimen\runfootht
+\newdimen\bottommargin \newdimen\topmargin
+\def\computebc{\bottommargin=\topmargin \computec}
+\def\computec{%
+  \colht\paht \advance\colht -\topmargin
+  \advance\colht -\bottommargin
+  \advance\colht -\runheadht
+  \advance\colht -\runfootht
+  \roundcolht
+  \bottommargin\paht
+  \advance\bottommargin -\topmargin
+  \advance\bottommargin -\colht
+}
+\def\roundcolht{%
+  \advance\colht .5\baselineskip
+  \divide\colht\baselineskip
+  \edef\columnheight{\number\colht\space lines}%
+  \multiply\colht\baselineskip
+  \advance\colht\topskip
+  \advance\colht -\baselineskip
+}
+\let\dependentcolht\TRUE
+\let\dependentbottommargin\TRUE
+\def\computeb{%
+  \roundcolht
+  \bottommargin\paht
+  \advance\bottommargin -\topmargin
+  \advance\bottommargin -\colht
+}
+\ifx\UndEFiNed\pageno \countdef\pageno=0 \fi
+\def\pagenumber{[\number\pageno]\thinspace{%
+  \csname\pagenumberfont
+    \pagenumberfontsize\endcsname
+  \number\lastpageno}}
+\let\landscape=\TRUE
+\def\pagenumbermessage{%
+  \ifnum\totalcols>\@ne
+    \message{%
+Printing `pages' \the\firstpageno--\the\lastpageno
+\space on \if\landscape landscape \fi sheet
+\the\pageno}%
+  \fi}
+\def\Ncols{\relax
+  \ifnum\curcol=\totalcols
+    \pagenumbermessage
+    \shipout\hbox to\fullwd{%
+      \unhbox\prevcolsbox\curcolbox}%
+    \global\advance\pageno\@ne
+    \global\chardef\curcol \z@
+    \ifnum\totalcols>\@ne
+      \global\advance\lastpageno \@ne
+      \global\firstpageno\lastpageno
+    \fi
+  \else
+    \global\setbox\prevcolsbox\hbox{%
+      \unhbox\prevcolsbox\curcolbox
+      \hskip\intercolspace plus1fil\relax}%
+    \ifnum\totalcols>\@ne
+      \global\advance\lastpageno \@ne
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \edef\next{\global\mathchardef\curcol=
+    \ifcase\curcol
+      1\or 2\or 3\or 4\or 5\or 6\or 7\or 8\or 9\or
+      10\or 11\or 12\or 13\or 14\or 15\or 16\or
+      17\or 18\or 19\or 20%
+    \else "7FFF\fi\relax
+  }%
+  \next
+}
+\newtoks\runhead \newtoks\runfoot
+\def\loheadline#1{\relax
+  \if\ifdim#1=\colwd T\else
+     \ifnum\curcol=\@ne T\else F\fi\fi T%
+    \vbox to\runheadht{\rlap{\hbox to#1{%
+      \csname\runheadfont\runheadfontsize\endcsname
+      \the\runhead}}\vss}%
+    \nointerlineskip
+  \fi
+}
+\def\lofootline#1{\relax
+  \if \ifdim#1=\colwd T\else
+      \ifnum\curcol=1 T\else F\fi\fi T%
+    \nointerlineskip
+    \vbox to\runfootht{\vfil\rlap{\hbox to#1{%
+      \csname\runheadfont\runheadfontsize\endcsname
+      \the\runfoot}}\kern-\prevdepth
+      \vfilneg\vss}%
+  \fi
+}
+\def\setupheadlineandfootline{%
+  \gdef\hfwd{\colwd}%
+  \if\runheads
+    \setbox\z@\hbox{%
+      \csname\runheadfont\runheadfontsize\endcsname
+      \the\runhead}%
+    \ifdim\wd\z@>\colwd \gdef\hfwd{\fullwd}\fi
+  \fi
+  \if\runfeet
+    \setbox\z@\hbox{%
+      \csname\runfootfont\runfootfontsize\endcsname
+      \the\runfoot}%
+    \ifdim\wd\z@>\colwd \gdef\hfwd{\fullwd}\fi
+  \fi
+  \if\runheads
+    \if\runfeet
+      \gdef\curcolbox{\vtop{\loheadline\hfwd
+        \vbox to\vsize{\unvbox255 \vss}%
+        \lofootline\hfwd}}%
+    \else
+      \gdef\curcolbox{%
+        \vtop{\loheadline\hfwd \vtop{\unvbox255 }}}%
+    \fi
+  \else
+    \if\runfeet
+      \gdef\curcolbox{\vtop{\null\nointerlineskip
+        \vbox to\vsize{\unvbox255 \vss}%
+        \lofootline\hfwd}}%
+    \else
+      \gdef\curcolbox{%
+        \vtop{\null\unvbox255 }}%
+    \fi
+  \fi
+}
+\newbox\tableaderbox
+\chardef\spacespertab=8
+\newdimen\tabwidth
+\def\printtaba{%
+  \hfil\egroup
+  \setbox\z@\hbox{\unhbox\z@ \unskip}%
+  \dimen@\wd\z@ \divide\dimen@\tabwidth
+  \multiply\dimen@\tabwidth
+  \advance\dimen@\tabwidth
+  \advance\dimen@ -\wd\z@
+  \setbox\z@\hbox to \hsize\bgroup \unhbox\z@
+    \spacebreak\hbox to\dimen@{%
+      \leaders\copy\tableaderbox\hfil}%
+}
+\def\newfileprinttab{\printtaba
+  \message{%
+Say, this file contains a tab character}%
+  \global\let\printtab\printtaba}
+\let\printtab=\newfileprinttab
+\newdimen\charwidth
+\def\inittabs{%
+  \setbox\z@\hbox{m}\charwidth\wd\z@
+  \tabwidth\spacespertab\charwidth
+  \ifcase\tabselect % case 0: blank tabs option.
+    \setbox\tableaderbox\hbox to\charwidth{}%
+  \or % case 1: dots option.
+    \setbox\tableaderbox\hbox to.2em{%
+        \hskip\z@ plus2\p@ minus3\p@
+        \mathhexbox 201% \cdot character
+        \kern.1em }%
+  \or % case 2: dashed option.
+    \setbox\tableaderbox\hbox to.3em{%
+        \hskip-.1em plus2sp minus2sp%
+        \vrule width.25em height.25em\kern.15em }%
+  \or % case 3: hrule option.
+    \setbox\tableaderbox\hbox{%
+      \vrule width\charwidth height2\p@ depth-1.5\p@}%
+  \else % case 4: tiny TAB option.
+    \setbox\tableaderbox\hbox to.5em{\hss
+        \vbox to6\p@{%
+          \offinterlineskip\csname roman5\endcsname
+          \hbox to7\p@{T\hss}\vss
+            \hbox to7\p@{\hss\kern-.1em A\hss}\vss
+          \hbox to7\p@{\hss B}\kern-2\p@}%
+        \hss}%
+  \fi
+  \let\printtab\newfileprinttab
+ }
+\def\tabstyle{\ifcase\tabselect blank space\or
+  dots\or dashed lines\or horizontal rules\else
+  tiny TABs\fi}
+\newdimen\charboxsidekern
+\charboxsidekern=.3pt
+\newbox\charboxstrut
+\def\characterbox#1{%
+  \hbox to.5em{\hss
+    \dimen@.22\p@ \dimen@ii -.11\p@
+    \vrule width\dimen@ \kern\dimen@ii
+    \vbox{\hrule height\dimen@
+      \kern\charboxsidekern
+      \hbox{\kern\charboxsidekern
+        #1\kern\charboxsidekern
+        \copy\charboxstrut}%
+      \dimen4 \prevdepth
+      \advance\dimen4 \charboxsidekern
+      \advance\dimen@ \dimen4
+      \hrule depth\dimen@ height -\dimen4
+    }%
+    \kern\dimen@ii\vrule width\dimen@\hss}}
+\def\controlchara#1{%
+  \message{Warning:
+Invisible control character, printing boxed letter}%
+  \characterbox{#1}%
+  \gdef\controlchar##1{%
+    \message{@}\characterbox{##1}}%
+}
+\def\controlchar{\controlchara}
+\newtoks\controlcharassignments
+\begingroup
+\def\do#1{\count@=`#1 \next \do}
+\def\next{\lccode`\~=\count@ \advance\count@ 64
+  \ifnum\count@>127 \advance\count@ -128 \fi
+  \lccode`\.=\count@
+  \lowercase{\let~\relax
+    \global\controlcharassignments\xp@{%
+    \the\controlcharassignments
+    \def~{\controlchar{.}}}}%
+}
+\xp@\do\controlchars{a \@gobbletwo}
+\endgroup
+\def\unknownchara{%
+  \xmesj{Warning: Unspecified character
+    (system-dependent interpretation);\
+    printing question mark instead}%
+  \characterbox{?}%
+  \gdef\unknownchar{\message{?}\characterbox{?}}%
+}
+\def\unknownchar{\unknownchara}
+\def\eightbitaction{B}
+\newtoks\highASCIIassignments
+\newtoks\highBSCIIassignments
+\highASCIIassignments{%
+  \def\do{\catcode\count@=12 \advance\count@\@ne
+    \ifnum\count@>\@cclv \expandafter\@gobble\fi\do}%
+  \count@=128 \do}
+\begingroup
+\def\do{%
+  \global\catcode\count@\active
+  \lccode`\~\count@
+  \lowercase{\global\highBSCIIassignments
+    \xp@{\the\highBSCIIassignments
+      \def~{\unknownchar}}}%
+  \ifnum\count@<255\relax
+    \advance\count@ 1\relax
+    \xp@\do % tail recursion
+  \fi}
+\count@=128\relax \do \endgroup
+\def\thisfilename{??}
+\let\printtitles=\TRUE
+\def\@dogobble#1\do{}
+\def\nonttfont#1{%
+  \def\do##1{\mathcode`##1`##1 \do}%
+  \xp@\do\otherchars{.`.\relax \@dogobble}%
+  \mathcode`\<"268 \mathcode`\>"269
+  \mathcode`\\"26E \mathcode`\_"8000
+  \mathcode`\{"266 \mathcode`\|"26A
+  \mathcode`\}"267 \mathcode`\~"218
+  \mathcode`\""8000
+  \actively\def\_{%
+    \leavevmode\kern.06em\vbox{%
+      \hrule width.4em height.06em}}%
+  \actively\def\"{^{\prime\prime}}%
+  \textfont\z@
+    \csname\titlefont\titlefontsize\endcsname
+    \everymath{}\mathsurround\z@
+  $\fam\z@#1$%
+}
+\escapechar=-1
+\edef\DOSdirsepchar{\string\\}
+\escapechar=`\\
+\def\Macintoshdirsepchar{:}
+\def\Unixdirsepchar{/}
+\xp@\def\csname VAX/VMSdirsepchar\endcsname{]}
+\def\chopname#1{%
+  \edef\dirsepchar{%
+    \csname\systemtype dirsepchar\endcsname}%
+  \edef\@tempa{%
+    \def\nx@\do####1\dirsepchar}%
+  \@tempa
+  ##2{%
+    \toks@\xp@{\next@}%
+    \ifx\end##2% then just add ##1 at the end
+      \edef\next@{\the\toks@##1}%
+    \else
+      \edef\next@{\the\toks@##1%
+        \dirsepchar\nx@\allowbreak}%
+      \afterfi\do##2%
+    \fi
+  }%
+  \edef\@tempa{\toks@{}\def\nx@\next@{}%
+    \nx@\do#1\dirsepchar\nx@\end}%
+  \@tempa
+  \let#1\next@
+  \ifx\@empty\dirprefix
+  \else
+    \edef#1{\xmeaning\dirprefix\allowbreak#1}%
+  \fi
+}
+\def\printtitle{%
+  \bigskip
+  \centerline{%
+    \csname\titlefont\titlefontsize\endcsname
+    \chopname\thisfilename
+    \ifdim\fontdimen3\font=\z@
+      \csname\titlecase\endcsname
+        \xp@{\thisfilename}%
+    \else
+      \csname\titlecase\endcsname
+        \xp@{\xp@
+        \nonttfont\xp@{\thisfilename}}%
+    \fi
+  }% end \centerline
+  \if S\newfileoption \smallskip
+  \else\bigskip\fi
+}
+\def\newfileoption{P}
+\def\newfileS{%
+  \dimen@\pagegoal \advance\dimen@-\pagetotal
+  \ifdim\dimen@<3\baselineskip
+  \xp@\eject\fi
+}
+\def\newfileC{\vfil\eject}
+\def\newfileP{%
+  \vfil\eject
+  \loop
+  \ifnum\curcol>\@ne
+    \hbox to\colwd{%
+          \vrule width\z@ depth\vsize\hfil}%
+    \eject
+  \repeat
+}
+\def\newfileR{\vfil\eject
+  \ifnum\curcol=\@ne
+    \hbox to\colwd{%
+      \vrule width\z@ depth\vsize\hfil}%
+  \xp@\eject
+  \fi
+}
+\newcount\linenumberfreq \linenumberfreq=1
+\newcount\linecount
+\newcount\linesubcount
+\def\printlinenumber{\llap{%
+  \global\advance\linecount\@ne
+  \global\advance\linesubcount\@ne
+  \ifnum\linesubcount=\linenumberfreq
+    \lnfnt \the\linecount\space
+    \global\linesubcount\z@
+  \fi
+}}%
+\def\spacebreak{}
+\def\markedbreak{\penalty\z@}
+\let\noextralinebreaks=\TRUE
+\def\newunnumberedline{\hskip\rightskip \egroup
+  \box\z@ \controlLbreak
+  \setbox\z@\hbox to\hsize\bgroup}%
+\def\newnumberedline{%
+  \newunnumberedline\printlinenumber}%
+\def\unnumberedbreakingline{\relax
+  \ifnum\lastpenalty=\@ne \null\fi
+  \hskip\rightskip\egroup
+  \hfuzz \p@
+  \noindent\unhbox\z@ %
+  {\hangindent1em
+  \parfillskip\z@ plus1fil \endgraf}%
+  \hfuzz\maxdimen
+  \controlLbreak
+  \setbox\z@\hbox to\hsize\bgroup \penalty\@ne
+}%
+\def\numberedbreakingline{%
+  \unnumberedbreakingline\printlinenumber}
+\lowercase{\let\@sptoken= } %
+\let\CR\newunnumberedline
+\def\CRSPsetup{%
+  \setupbreakingchars
+  \if\noextralinebreaks
+    \overrun\rightmargin
+    \actively\let\ = \@sptoken\relax
+    \if\linenumbers
+      \let\CR\newnumberedline
+    \else
+      \let\CR\newunnumberedline
+    \fi
+  \else
+    \actively\edef\ {\spacebreak\space}%
+    \if\linenumbers
+      \let\CR\numberedbreakingline
+    \else
+      \let\CR\unnumberedbreakingline
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \actively\let\^^M\CR
+  \rightskip\z@ plus\hsize minus\overrun
+  \parfillskip\z@skip
+}
+\def\listout#1{\endgraf
+  \begingroup
+  \listoutsetup
+  \gdef\thisfilename{#1}%
+  \xdef\thisfilename{\xmeaning\thisfilename}%
+  \if\printtitles \printtitle \fi
+  \listoutmoresetup
+  \CRSPsetup
+  \hfuzz\maxdimen
+  \setbox\z@\hbox to\hsize\bgroup \penalty\@ne
+  \input#1 \hfil\egroup
+  \hfuzz\p@
+  \penalty0 %
+  \csname newfile\newfileoption\endcsname
+  \ifvoid\prevcolsbox
+  \else
+    \savelistoutimage
+  \fi
+  \endgroup }
+%%    Restore the previous output routine. Interestingly,
+%%    \cw{the}\cw{output} returns an extra pair of braces
+%%    (as hinted at in the \tex/book); so the extra step
+%%    with \cw{toks@} here is slightly better than simply
+%%    \cw{global}\cw{output}{\cw{the}\cw{output}}.
+%%\showthe\output
+\def\savelistoutimage{%
+  \xdef\listoutimage{%
+    \let\nx@\landscape%
+      \if\landscape\nx@\TRUE
+      \else\nx@\FALSE\fi
+    \pawd\the\pawd \paht\the\paht
+    \topmargin\the\topmargin
+    \bottommargin\the\bottommargin
+    \leftmargin\the\leftmargin
+    \rightmargin\the\rightmargin
+    \normalbaselineskip\the\normalbaselineskip
+    \normalbaselines
+    \mathchardef\curcol\number\curcol\relax
+    \chardef\totalcols\number\totalcols\relax
+    \colwd\the\colwd \colht\the\colht
+    \fullwd\the\fullwd
+    \intercolspace\the\intercolspace
+    \overrun\the\overrun
+    \def\nx@\todaysdate{\todaysdate}%
+    \def\nx@\nowtime{\nowtime}%
+    \def\nx@\pagenumberfont{\pagenumberfont}%
+    \def\nx@\pagenumberfontsize{%
+      \pagenumberfontsize}
+    \pageno\the\pageno
+    \lastpageno\the\lastpageno
+    \firstpageno\the\firstpageno
+    \def\nx@\hfwd{\hfwd}%
+    \def\nx@\thisfilename{\thisfilename}%
+    \let\nx@\runheads%
+      \if\runheads\nx@\TRUE
+      \else\nx@\FALSE\fi
+    \runhead{\the\runhead}%
+    \def\nx@\runheadfont{\runheadfont}%
+    \def\nx@\runheadfontsize{%
+      \runheadfontsize}%
+    \runheadht\the\runheadht
+    \let\nx@\runfeet%
+      \if\runfeet\nx@\TRUE
+      \else\nx@\FALSE\fi
+    \runfoot{\the\runfoot}%
+    \def\nx@\runfootfont{\runfootfont}%
+    \def\nx@\runfootfontsize{%
+      \runfootfontsize}%
+    \runfootht\the\runfootht
+    \hoffset\the\hoffset \voffset\the\voffset
+    \relax
+  }%
+}
+\fxmesj\reportlayout{
+Using paper size &\the&\pawd x &\the&\paht%
+ (&\paperwidth x &\paperheight),
+&\number&\totalcols columns, intercolumnspace%
+ = &\the&\intercolspace,
+column width = &\the&\colwd, column height%
+ = &\the&\colht,
+top margin = &\the&\topmargin, left margin%
+ = &\the&\leftmargin.
+}
+\def\listoutsetup{%
+  \output{\Ncols}%
+  \loadfonts
+  \csname\mainfont\mainfontsize\endcsname
+  \xp@\let\xp@\lnfnt
+     \csname\linenumberfont
+       \linenumberfontsize\endcsname
+  \normalbaselines
+  \if\dependentcolht
+    \if\dependentbottommargin \computebc
+    \else \computec\fi
+  \else
+    \computeb
+  \fi
+  \vsize\colht
+  \parskip \z@\relax
+  \if\dependentcolwd
+    \if\dependentrightmargin \computerfc
+    \else \computefc \fi
+  \else
+    \computefr
+  \fi
+  \hsize\colwd
+  \parindent\z@
+  \ifdim\overfullrule>\z@ \overfullrule 2\p@\fi
+  \setupheadlineandfootline
+  \datesetup
+  \voffset\m@ne truein \hoffset\voffset
+  \advance\voffset\topmargin \advance\hoffset\leftmargin
+  \setbox\charboxstrut\hbox{%
+    \vrule height.5emwidth\z@}%
+  \inittabs
+  \clubpenalty\@M \widowpenalty\@M
+  \count@12\relax
+  \def\do##1{\catcode`##1\count@ \do}%
+  \xp@\do\otherchars{a11 \@gobbletwo}%
+  \count@\active
+  \xp@\do\controlchars{a11 \@gobbletwo}%
+  \the\controlcharassignments
+  \global\let\controlchar\controlchara
+  \if L\controlLaction
+    \actively\let\^^L\linespaceL
+  \else
+    \if N\controlLaction
+      \actively\let\^^L\ejectL
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \the\csname high\eightbitaction SCIIassignments\endcsname
+  \global\let\unknownchar\unknownchara
+  \actively\def\`{\kern\z@`}%
+  \hfuzz\p@
+}
+\def\linespaceL{\message{Found a ^L character}\CR}
+\def\ejectL{%
+  \message{Found a ^L character}%
+  \gdef\controlLbreak{\eject}\CR\global\let\controlLbreak\relax
+}
+\let\controlLbreak\relax
+\def\controlLaction{N}
+\actively\let\^^L=\ejectL
+\def\listoutmoresetup{%
+  \global\linecount\z@ \global\linesubcount\z@
+  \ifnum\totalcols>\@ne
+    \global\firstpageno\@ne
+    \global\lastpageno\@ne
+  \fi
+  \relax
+  \frenchspacing
+  \global\let\printtab\newfileprinttab
+  \actively\def\^^I{\printtab}%
+  \langnohyphens
+}
+\def\DVImesj{}
+\fxmesj\landscapereminder{%
+********************************************%
+***********************
+*     REMINDER: print in LANDSCAPE mode     %
+                      *
+********************************************%
+***********************}
+\def\listoutfinish{%
+  \ifvoid\prevcolsbox
+  \else
+    \wlog{Clearing out previous file}%
+    \begingroup
+    \listoutimage \output{\Ncols}%
+    \def\newfileoption{P}%
+    \hbox to\colwd{}%
+    \csname newfile\newfileoption\endcsname
+    \DVImesj
+    \if\landscape
+      \landscapereminder
+    \fi
+    \endgroup
+  \fi
+}
+\def\xfont#1={%
+  \xp@\font\csname#1\endcsname=}
+\def\ftypewriter{cmtt}
+\def\fbold{cmbx}
+\def\froman{cmr}
+\def\fitalic{cmti}
+\def\fsansserif{cmss}
+\def\loadfont#1#2{%
+  \relax\ifnum#2>100 \loadscaledfont{#1}{#2}%
+  \else
+    \global\xfont#1#2=\csname f#1\endcsname
+    \ifnum#2=14 10 scaled\magstep2
+    \else\ifnum#2=12 10 scaled\magstep1
+    \else\ifnum#2=11 10 scaled\magstephalf
+    \else#2\fi\fi\fi
+    \relax
+  \fi
+}
+\def\loadscaledfont#1#2{\global\xfont#1#2=#1 scaled #2\relax}
+\loadfont{typewriter}{8} % for main text
+\loadfont{bold}{10} % for titles
+\loadfont{roman}{5} % for line numbers
+\loadfont{roman}{6} % for running heads
+\def\mainfont{typewriter}
+\def\mainfontsize{8}
+\csname\mainfont\mainfontsize\endcsname
+\def\titlefont{bold}
+\def\titlefontsize{10}
+\def\linenumberfont{typewriter}
+\def\linenumberfontsize{8}
+\def\pagenumberfont{bold}
+\def\pagenumberfontsize{7}
+\def\runheadfont{roman}
+\def\runheadfontsize{7}
+\def\runfootfont{roman}
+\def\runfootfontsize{7}
+\def\loadfonts{\relax
+  \xp@\ifx\csname\mainfont\mainfontsize\endcsname\relax
+    \loadfont\mainfont\mainfontsize
+  \fi
+  \xp@\ifx\csname\pagenumberfont
+        \pagenumberfontsize\endcsname\relax
+    \loadfont\pagenumberfont\pagenumberfontsize
+  \fi
+  \if\printtitles
+    \xp@\ifx\csname\titlefont
+          \titlefontsize\endcsname\relax
+      \loadfont\titlefont\titlefontsize
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \if\linenumbers
+    \xp@\ifx\csname\linenumberfont
+          \linenumberfontsize\endcsname\relax
+      \loadfont\linenumberfont\linenumberfontsize
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \if\runheads
+    \xp@\ifx\csname\runheadfont
+          \runheadfontsize\endcsname\relax
+      \loadfont\runheadfont\runheadfontsize
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \if\runfeet
+    \xp@\ifx\csname\runfootfont
+          \runfootfontsize\endcsname\relax
+      \loadfont\runfootfont\runfootfontsize
+    \fi
+  \fi
+}
+\tracingstats=1
+\ifx\undefined\language
+  \def\langnohyphens{\hyphenchar\font\m@ne}
+\else
+  \xp@\ifx\csname newlanguage\endcsname\relax
+    \def\langnohyphens{\language\@cclv}
+  \else
+    \csname newlanguage\endcsname
+      \nohyphenslanguage
+    \def\langnohyphens{%
+      \language\nohyphenslanguage}%
+  \fi
+\fi
+\def\setupbreakingchars{%
+  \ifx\breakingchars\@empty
+    \ifx\spacebreak\@empty
+      \let\noextralinebreaks\TRUE
+    \else
+      \let\noextralinebreaks\FALSE
+    \fi
+  \else
+    \let\noextralinebreaks\FALSE
+    \def\do##1{\ifx\end##1\else
+      \xp@\actively\xp@
+      \def\csname##1\endcsname{##1\markedbreak}%
+      \xp@\do\fi}%
+    \xp@\do\breakingchars\end
+    \let\spacebreak\markedbreak
+  \fi
+  \exhyphenpenalty\@M
+}
+\def\iwlos#1{\immediate\write#1}
+\storexmesj\losfirstline{%
+\% &\losname.los &\todaysdate &\nowtime
+\% Option settings for listout.tex.}%
+\def\addmonth#1{%
+  \toks4 \xp@{#1}%
+  \edef\next{\the\toks2
+    \string\def\string#1{\the\toks4 }}%
+  \toks2 \xp@{\next}%
+}
+\begingroup
+\endlinechar13 \catcode\endlinechar13
+\gdef\logoptionsettings#1{\begingroup%
+  \newlinechar13\relax\actively\let\^^M\relax%
+  \toks2 {}%
+  \addmonth\Jan \addmonth\Feb \addmonth\Mar%
+  \toks2 \xp@{\the\toks2\relax
+  }%
+  \addmonth\Apr \addmonth\May \addmonth\Jun%
+  \toks2 \xp@{\the\toks2\relax
+  }%
+  \addmonth\Jul \addmonth\Aug \addmonth\Sep%
+  \toks2 \xp@{\the\toks2\relax
+  }%
+  \addmonth\Oct \addmonth\Nov \addmonth\Dec%
+  \iwlos{#1}{%
+    \losfirstline
+    \the\toks2\relax
+  }%
+  \iwlos{#1}{%
+    \string\let\string\landscape=%
+      \if\landscape\string\TRUE
+      \else\string\FALSE\fi
+    \string\pawd=\the\pawd
+    \string\def\string\paperwidth{\paperwidth}
+    \string\paht=\the\paht
+    \string\def\string\paperheight{\paperheight}
+    \string\topmargin=\the\topmargin
+    \string\bottommargin=\the\bottommargin
+    \string\leftmargin=\the\leftmargin
+    \string\rightmargin=\the\rightmargin
+    \string\normalbaselineskip=%
+      \the\normalbaselineskip\string\relax
+    \string\def\string\mainfontsize{\mainfontsize}
+    \string\def\string\mainfont{\mainfont}
+    \string\chardef\string\totalcols=%
+      \number\totalcols\string\relax
+    \string\colwd=\the\colwd
+    \string\def\string\columnwidth{\columnwidth}
+    \string\let\string\dependentcolwd=%
+      \if\dependentcolwd\string\TRUE
+      \else\string\FALSE\fi
+    \string\let\string\dependentrightmargin=%
+      \if\dependentrightmargin\string\TRUE
+      \else\string\FALSE\fi
+    \string\colht=\the\colht
+    \string\def\string\columnheight{\columnheight}
+    \string\let\string\dependentcolht=%
+      \if\dependentcolht\string\TRUE
+      \else\string\FALSE\fi
+    \string\let\string\dependentbottommargin=%
+      \if\dependentbottommargin\string\TRUE
+      \else\string\FALSE\fi
+    \string\intercolspace=\the\intercolspace
+    \string\overrun=\the\overrun
+    \string\fullwd=\the\fullwd
+  }%
+  \iwlos{#1}{%
+    \string\def\string\newfileoption{%
+      \newfileoption}
+    \string\let\string\printtitles=%
+      \if\printtitles\string\TRUE
+      \else\string\FALSE\fi
+    \string\def\string\titlefont{\titlefont}
+    \string\def\string\titlefontsize{%
+      \titlefontsize}
+    \string\def\string\titlecase{\titlecase}
+    \string\def\string\datesepchar{\datesepchar}
+    \string\def\string\todaysdate{%
+      \xp@\string\todaysdate}
+    \string\def\string\nowtime{%
+      \xp@\string\nowtime}
+    \string\def\string\timesepchar{\timesepchar}
+    \string\def\string\ampmpunct{\ampmpunct}
+    \string\let\string\keepleadingzeros=%
+      \if\keepleadingzeros\string\TRUE
+      \else\string\FALSE\fi
+    \string\def\string\linenumberfontsize{%
+      \linenumberfontsize}
+    \string\def\string\linenumberfont{%
+      \linenumberfont}
+    \string\let\string\linenumbers=%
+      \if\linenumbers\string\TRUE
+      \else\string\FALSE\fi
+    \string\linenumberfreq=%
+      \number\linenumberfreq\string\relax
+    \string\def\string\pagenumberfont{%
+      \pagenumberfont}
+    \string\def\string\pagenumberfontsize{%
+      \pagenumberfontsize}
+    \string\let\string\runheads=%
+      \if\runheads\string\TRUE
+      \else\string\FALSE\fi
+    \string\runhead={\the\runhead}
+    \string\def\string\runheadfont{\runheadfont}
+    \string\def\string\runheadfontsize{%
+      \runheadfontsize}
+    \string\runheadht=\the\runheadht
+    \string\let\string\runfeet=%
+      \if\runfeet\string\TRUE\else\string\FALSE\fi
+    \string\runfoot={\the\runfoot}
+    \string\def\string\runfootfont{\runfootfont}
+    \string\def\string\runfootfontsize{%
+      \runfootfontsize}
+    \string\runfootht=\the\runfootht
+    \string\def\string\spacebreak{\spacebreak}
+    \string\def\string\breakingchars{%
+      \breakingchars}
+    \string\let\string\noextralinebreaks=%
+      \if\noextralinebreaks\string\TRUE
+      \else\string\FALSE\fi
+    \string\def\string\controlLaction{\controlLaction}
+    \string\def\string\eightbitaction{\eightbitaction}
+    \string\def\string\systemtype{\systemtype}
+    \string\def\string\losdir{\losdir}
+    \string\storemesj\string\dirprefix{\dirprefix}
+    \string\chardef\string\spacespertab=%
+      \number\spacespertab\string\relax
+    \string\chardef\string\tabselect=%
+      \number\tabselect\string\relax
+}\endgroup}%
+\endgroup% percent to avoid catcode 12 endlinechar
+\def\Jan{January}\def\Feb{February}\def\Mar{March}\relax
+\def\Apr{April}\def\May{May}\def\Jun{June}\relax
+\def\Jul{July}\def\Aug{August}\def\Sep{September}\relax
+\def\Oct{October}\def\Nov{November}\def\Dec{December}\relax
+\let\landscape=\TRUE
+\pawd=794.96999pt
+\def\paperwidth{11in}
+\paht=614.295pt
+\def\paperheight{8.5in}
+\topmargin=18.06749pt
+\bottommargin=19.22751pt
+\leftmargin=21.68121pt
+\rightmargin=21.68121pt
+\normalbaselineskip=10.0pt\relax
+\def\mainfontsize{10}
+\def\mainfont{typewriter}
+\chardef\totalcols=2\relax
+\colwd=369.38373pt
+\def\columnwidth{369.38373pt}
+\let\dependentcolwd=\TRUE
+\let\dependentrightmargin=\TRUE
+\colht=577.0pt
+\def\columnheight{64 lines}
+\let\dependentcolht=\TRUE
+\let\dependentbottommargin=\TRUE
+\intercolspace=12.0pt
+\overrun=21.68121pt
+\fullwd=751.60756pt
+\def\newfileoption{P}
+\let\printtitles=\TRUE
+\def\titlefont{bold}
+\def\titlefontsize{10}
+\def\titlecase{none}
+\def\datesepchar{/}
+\def\todaysdate{\dateA}
+\def\nowtime{\timeB}
+\def\timesepchar{:}
+\def\ampmpunct{.}
+\let\keepleadingzeros=\TRUE
+\def\linenumberfontsize{5}
+\def\linenumberfont{roman}
+\let\linenumbers=\FALSE
+\linenumberfreq=1\relax
+\def\pagenumberfont{bold}
+\def\pagenumberfontsize{7}
+\let\runheads=\TRUE
+\runhead={\todaysdate \space \nowtime \space \hfil
+  \thisfilename \space \hfil \pagenumber }
+\def\runheadfont{roman}
+\def\runheadfontsize{7}
+\runheadht=24.0pt
+\let\runfeet=\FALSE
+\runfoot={}
+\def\runfootfont{roman}
+\def\runfootfontsize{6}
+\runfootht=24.0pt
+\def\spacebreak{\penalty \z@ }
+\def\breakingchars{}
+\let\noextralinebreaks=\FALSE
+\def\controlLaction{N}
+\def\systemtype{DOS}
+\def\losdir{}
+\storemesj\dirprefix{}
+\chardef\spacespertab=8\relax
+\chardef\tabselect=1\relax
+\def\losname{default}
+\edef\losfile{\losdir\losname.los }
+\openin15=\losfile \relax
+\ifeof15 \closein15 \expandafter\@gobbletwo
+\else
+\immediate\write16{Reading option settings from `\losname.los' . . .}
+\closein15 \fi
+\input\losfile % try entering "nul" if file not found
+\datesetup
+\normalbaselines
+\ifx\undefined\interactive
+  \def\next{listout}%
+  \edef\next{\xmeaning\next}%
+  \edef\jobname{\jobname}%
+  \ifx\next\jobname
+    \let\interactive\TRUE
+  \else
+    \let\interactive\FALSE
+  \fi
+\else
+  \let\interactive\TRUE
+\fi
+\if\interactive
+\else \restorecatcodes \endinput \fi
+\def\printfiles{%\reportlayout
+  \mesj{OK, let's print some files.}%
+  \begingroup
+  \listoutsetup \let\listoutsetup\relax
+  \fileloop
+  \endgroup
+  \listoutfinish
+  \csname \string @\string @end\endcsname
+  \end
+}%
+\newcount\numberoffiles
+\def\fileloop{%
+  \promptmesj{!File name? (<return> to stop): }%
+  \readline{}\reply
+  \ifx\reply\@empty
+  \else
+    \global\advance\numberoffiles 1 \relax
+  \afterfi
+    \xp@\listout\xp@{\reply}%
+    \fileloop
+  \fi
+}
+\fxmesj\DVImesj{%
+*******************************************************************
+*     DVI file name is \jobname.dvi                                *
+*******************************************************************}
+\mesj{
+:---------------------------------------------------------------------
+:  This is listout.tex: a tool for printing out `verbatim' listings of
+:  text files with reasonably robust, and customizable, handling of
+:  overlong lines, tab characters and other special characters, number
+:  of columns, font size/line spacing, et cetera.
+:---------------------------------------------------------------------
+:  For additional information (e.g., about noninteractive use), or to
+:  change option settings, enter
+:    m   or   M
+:  to enter the listout.tex menu system. Otherwise just press the
+:  <return> key to continue:
+:}
+\message{:?: }
+\readChar{X}\reply
+\if M\reply \else\xp@\printfiles\fi
+\message{Starting up the listout.tex menu system . . .}
+\storexmesj\menuprefix{
+======================================================================
+}
+\storexmesj\menusuffix{
+         Q  Quit         X  Exit        ?  Help
+======================================================================
+}
+\storexmesj\inmenuA{
+}
+\storexmesj\inmenuB{
+}
+\fxmesj\menuhelpmesj{%
+======================================================================
+--- <return> means the carriage return, or `Enter', key.
+--- When selecting items from a menu with letter labels, you can enter
+your choice in lowercase or uppercase.
+--- A prompt that asks for `TeX units' requires in response a
+measurement using the units recognized by TeX, for example
+
+      cm  mm  in  pt  pc  dd  cc
+
+--- A response of Q will usually send you back to the previous menu.
+--- A response of X will get you entirely out of the menu system.
+======================================================================
+To continue, press the <return> key . . .}
+\def\confirm#1{\xmesj{\
+* #1}}
+\fmenu\mainmenu{
+                    MAIN  MENU
+}{
+A  Action for new files            L  Line numbers
+B  Breaking lines                  M  Margins
+C  Column width/height             N  Number of columns
+D  Date/time form                  O  Orientation
+E  Expectoration                   P  Paper size
+F  Font, line spacing              R  Running heads/feet
+G  General information             S  System info
+H  Heading/title for each file     T  Tab treatment
+I  Info about current settings     V  Various other things
+}{}
+\def\moption{\mainmenu \readChar{Q}\reply
+  \let\prevmenu\@empty \let\curmenu\@empty \optionexec\reply}
+\fmenu\menuA#1{
+The various actions possible at the beginning of a new file are:
+}{
+S  Space (one line of blank space, but not a new column,
+     at the beginning of each new file)
+C  New column
+P  New page
+R  New page and right-hand column
+}{
+These options are mutually exclusive. The currently selected option
+is #1. See also option H in the main menu.
+}
+\def\moptionA{\menuA{\newfileoption}%
+  \readChar{Q}\reply \optionexec\reply}
+\def\moptionAS{\def\newfileoption{S}%
+  \confirm{%
+  Each file will start immediately after the preceding file, with\
+* some intervening blank space.}%
+  \popoptions\moptionQ}
+\def\moptionAC{\def\newfileoption{C}%
+  \confirm{%
+  Each file will start at the top of the next column.}%
+  \popoptions\moptionQ}
+\def\moptionAP{\def\newfileoption{P}%
+  \confirm{%
+  Each file will start on a new page.}%
+  \popoptions\moptionQ}
+\def\moptionAR{\def\newfileoption{R}%
+  \confirm{%
+  Each file will start on a new page, in the right-hand column.}
+  \popoptions\moptionQ}
+\def\menuBtest{%
+  \ifx\spacebreak\@empty
+    \ifx\breakingchars\@empty
+Long lines will not be broken.%
+    \else
+Extra line breaks will be allowed after the characters\
+\
+\ \ \ \ \ \breakingchars\
+      \ifdim\overrun=\z@
+      \else\
+(with overrun of \the\overrun\space allowed).%
+      \fi
+    \fi
+  \else
+    \ifx\breakingchars\@empty
+Extra line breaks will be allowed at spaces.%
+    \else
+Extra line breaks will be allowed at spaces and\
+after the characters\
+\
+\ \ \ \ \ \breakingchars\
+    \fi
+    \ifdim\overrun=\z@
+    \else\
+(with overrun of \the\overrun\space allowed).%
+    \fi
+  \fi
+}
+\fxmenu\menuB{
+Files being printed sometimes contain unusually long lines.
+You can choose the action that will be taken for overlong lines:
+}{
+N  No line breaking allowed
+S  Allow breaks at spaces only
+C  Allow line breaks at other characters
+O  Change the overrun amount
+}{
+Current setting: &\menuBtest
+}
+\def\moptionB{\lettermenu{B}}
+\def\moptionBS{%
+  \let\spacebreak\markedbreak \let\breakingchars\@empty
+  \overrun\rightmargin \let\noextralinebreaks\FALSE
+  \confirm{\menuBtest}\popoptions\moptionQ
+}
+\def\moptionBN{%
+  \let\spacebreak\@empty \let\breakingchars\@empty
+  \overrun=\rightmargin
+  \confirm{\menuBtest}\popoptions\moptionQ
+}
+\def\moptionBO{%
+  \promptmesj{Desired overrun value [TeX units] ? }%
+  \readline{Q}\reply
+  \if\xoptiontest\reply
+  \else
+    \checkdimen\reply\dimen@
+    \ifdim\dimen@=-\maxdimen
+    \else
+      \overrun\reply\relax
+      \confirm{New overrun value = \the\overrun.}%
+      \def\reply{Q}%
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \optionexec\reply
+}
+\def\moptionBC{%
+  \xmesj{%
+Enter a list of characters. Line breaks will be allowed after any\
+character in the list.\
+Note: if this list is nonempty breaks will be allowed at spaces,\
+even if you didn't include a space in the list.}%
+  \readline{}\breakingchars
+  \ifx\@empty\breakingchars
+  \else \let\spacebreak\markedbreak\fi
+  \let\noextralinebreaks\FALSE
+  \overrun=\rightmargin
+  \confirm{\menuBtest}%
+  \popoptions\moptionQ
+}
+\fxmenu\menuC{
+Column width is normally computed automatically, from the specified
+paper width, number of columns, margins, and intercolumn space.
+However, if you provide an explicit value for column width it will
+be used and the right margin will be adjusted as necessary.
+Similarly, column height is computed automatically from the
+paper height and the top and bottom margins, unless you provide an
+explicit value.
+}{
+W  Change column width
+H  Change column height
+I  Change intercolumn space
+}{
+Current column width: &\columnwidth.
+Current column height: &\columnheight.
+Current intercolumn space: &\the&\intercolspace.
+}
+\def\moptionC{\lettermenu C}
+\def\moptionCW{%
+  \xmesj{%
+For width in characters, enter just a number; otherwise enter a\
+measurement using standard TeX units. To revert to automatic computing\
+of the column width, give an empty reply (i.e., just press <return>).}%
+  \message{Column width: }%
+  \readline{}\reply
+  \ifx\reply\@empty
+    \let\dependentcolwd\TRUE
+    \if\dependentrightmargin \computerfc \else \computefc \fi
+    \def\reply{A}% report new value through \moptionCWA
+  \fi
+  \if\xoptiontest\reply
+  \else
+    \checkdimen\reply\dimen@
+    \ifdim\dimen@=-\maxdimen
+      \checkinteger\reply\count@
+      \ifnum\count@=-\maxdimen
+      \else
+        \colwd.5em \multiply\colwd\count@\relax
+        \edef\columnwidth{\the\count@\space characters}%
+        \let\dependentcolwd\FALSE
+        \def\reply{A}%
+      \fi
+    \else
+      \colwd\dimen@ \let\columnwidth\reply \let\dependentcolwd\FALSE
+      \def\reply{B}%
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \optionexec\reply
+}
+\def\moptionCWA{%
+  \confirm{Column width set to \columnwidth.}%
+  \popoptions\moptionQ}
+\def\moptionCWB{%
+  \confirm{Column width set to \columnwidth\space (= \the\colwd)}%
+  \popoptions\moptionQ}
+\def\moptionCH{%
+  \xmesj{%
+For height in lines, enter just a number; otherwise enter a\
+measurement using standard TeX units. To revert to automatic computing\
+of the column height, give an empty reply (i.e., just press <return>).}%
+  \message{Column height: }%
+  \readline{}\reply
+  \ifx\reply\@empty
+    \let\dependentcolht\TRUE
+    \if\dependentbottommargin \computebc \else \computec \fi
+    \def\reply{A}% report new value through \moptionCWA
+  \fi
+  \if\xoptiontest\reply
+  \else
+    \checkdimen\reply\dimen@
+    \ifdim\dimen@=-\maxdimen
+      \checkinteger\reply\count@
+      \ifnum\count@=-\maxdimen
+      \else
+        \let\dependentcolht\FALSE
+        \colht\baselineskip \multiply\colht\count@
+        \advance\colht -\baselineskip \advance\colht\topskip
+        \computeb
+        \edef\columnheight{\the\count@\space lines}%
+        \def\reply{A}%
+      \fi
+    \else
+      \colht\dimen@ \let\columnheight\reply
+      \let\dependentcolht\FALSE \computeb
+      \def\reply{B}%
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \optionexec\reply
+}
+\def\moptionCHA{%
+  \confirm{Column height set to \columnheight.\
+* (Bottom margin adjusted to \the\bottommargin.)}%
+  \popoptions\moptionQ}
+\def\moptionCHB{%
+  \confirm{Column height set to \columnheight\space (= \the\colht)\
+* (Bottom margin adjusted to \the\bottommargin.)}%
+  \popoptions\moptionQ}
+\def\moptionCI{%
+  \promptmesj{Enter desired intercolumn space [TeX units]: }%
+  \readline{Q}\reply
+  \ifx\optiontest\reply
+  \else
+    \checkdimen\reply\dimen@
+    \ifdim\dimen@=-\maxdimen
+    \else
+      \intercolspace=\dimen@
+      \confirm{%
+Intercolumn space set to \reply\space (= \the\intercolspace).}%
+      \if\linenumbers\ifdim\intercolspace<12\p@
+      \confirm{\
+* Warning: small intercolumn space, might not be big enough\
+* for line numbers to fit ...}%
+      \fi\fi
+      \def\reply{Q}%
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \optionexec\reply
+}
+\fxmenu\menuD{}{
+D  Change date format
+S  Change separator character
+Z  &\if&\keepleadingzeros\.Omit&\else\.Add&\fi %
+leading zeros in the day and month
+T  Change time format
+}{
+Current date and time format is `&\todaysdate &\nowtime'.
+}
+\def\moptionD{\lettermenu D}
+\fxmenu\menuDD{
+Date options:
+}{
+A  &\dateA
+B  &\dateB
+C  &\dateC
+D  &\dateD
+E  &\dateE
+F  &\dateF
+G  &\dateG
+H  &\dateH
+I  &\dateI
+J  &\dateJ
+}{
+Current date format is &\todaysdate.
+}
+\def\moptionDD{\menuDD \readChar{Q}\reply
+  \count@=\xp@`\reply\relax
+  \ifnum\count@>64 \ifnum\count@<75
+    \xp@\def\xp@\todaysdate\xp@{\csname date\reply\endcsname}%
+    \confirm{New date form: \todaysdate}%
+    \def\reply{Q}%
+  \fi\fi
+  \optionexec\reply
+}
+\def\moptionDS{\promptmesj{!%
+Current separator character between the parts of a date is
+`\datesepchar'.!%
+New separator: }%
+  \readchar{}\reply
+  \if Q\reply
+    \confirm{Date separator char unchanged.}%
+  \else
+    \if ?\reply
+    \else
+      \if X\reply
+        \confirm{Date separator char unchanged.}%
+      \else
+        \let\datesepchar\reply
+        \confirm{New date format: \todaysdate.}%
+        \def\reply{Q}%
+      \fi
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \optionexec\reply
+}
+\def\moptionDZ{%
+  \if\keepleadingzeros
+    \let\keepleadingzeros\FALSE
+    \edef\themonth{\number\month}\edef\theday{\number\day}%
+  \else
+    \let\keepleadingzeros\TRUE
+    \edef\themonth{\twodigits\month}\edef\theday{\twodigits\day}%
+  \fi
+  \confirm{Leading zeros will
+    \if\keepleadingzeros NOT \else \fi
+    be omitted in day and month numbers}%
+  \def\reply{Q}\optionexec\reply
+}
+\fxmenu\menuDT{
+Time format options:
+}{
+A  &\timeA (HoursMinutes, 24-hour cycle)
+B  &\timeB (Hours:Minutes, 24-hour cycle)
+C  &\timeC (12-hour cycle)
+D  &\timeD
+E  &\timeE
+F  &\timeF
+}{
+Current time format is &\nowtime.
+}
+\def\moptionDT{\menuDT \readChar{Q}\reply
+  \if A\if B\reply A\else\if C\reply A\else\if D\reply A\else
+       \if E\reply A\else\if F\reply A\else\reply\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+    \xp@\def\xp@\nowtime\xp@{\csname time\reply\endcsname}%
+    \def\reply{Z}%
+  \fi
+  \optionexec\reply
+}
+\def\moptionDTZ{\confirm{New time format: \nowtime}%
+  \popoptions\moptionQ}
+\fmenu\menuE{
+This option allows you to save all the current option settings in a
+file for later reuse. If you use the file name `default.los' the saved
+settings will be used as defaults for future runs. Or you can use
+different file names to have multiple saved sets of option settings.
+}{
+S  Save settings
+L  Load saved settings from file
+D  Specify a default directory/folder for .los files
+}{
+The last option allows you to specify a location if you want to
+keep listout.tex and all its .los files in a particular directory or
+folder. This works best if the given location is one searched
+automatically by TeX (e.g., by being included in the `TeX inputs path').
+}
+\def\moptionE{\lettermenu{E}}
+\def\losname{default}
+\def\losdir{}
+
+\def\lossorrymessage{\message{%
+? Could not create `\losdir\losname.los';
+maybe there was a system problem.}}
+\def\currentdir{}
+\def\moptionES{\xmesj{\
+Enter the desired file name. The default name (if you just press the\
+<return> key) is `default'. A file extension `.los' will be added\
+automatically:}%
+  \readline{default}\reply
+  \edef\losname{\reply}%
+  \def\next##1.los##2##3\next{\ifx\relax##2\else
+    \def\losname{##1}\fi}
+  \xp@\next\losname.los\relax\next
+  \confirm{%
+File name: `\losname.los' ---OK? If not, enter n or N to cancel:}%
+  \readChar{Y}\reply
+  \if Y\reply
+    \edef\losfirstline{\xp@\@gobble\string
+\% Option settings for listout.tex, \todaysdate\space\nowtime}%
+    \immediate\openout15=\losdir\losname.los \relax
+    \logoptionsettings{15}%
+    \immediate\closeout15 \relax
+    \openin15=\losdir\losname.los \relax
+    \ifeof15 \lossorrymessage
+    \else \testlocation \fi
+    \closein15 \relax
+  \fi
+  \popoptions\moptionQ
+}
+\def\testlocation{%
+  \begingroup
+    \catcode`\%=12 \catcode`\\=12 \catcode\endlinechar=9
+    \read15 to\next
+    \ifx\next\losfirstline
+      \confirm{%
+New `\losname.los' file successfully created}%
+      \ifx\losdir\@empty
+        \testinputtable
+      \else
+        \message{%
+(in location `\losdir')}%
+      \fi
+    \else
+      \lossorrymessage
+    \fi
+  \endgroup
+}
+\def\testinputtable{%
+  \actively\def\%##1@{%
+    \edef\next{\xp@\@gobble\string\%##1}%
+    \ifx\next\losfirstline
+    \else
+      \message{%
+... but guess what: it seems to be inaccessible for \nx@\input by TeX%
+      }%
+    \fi
+    \endinput}%
+  \endlinechar`\@ \relax
+  \input\losname.los \relax
+}
+\def\moptionEL{\xmesj{\
+Enter the name of the desired option file:}%
+  \readline{}\reply
+  \ifx\@empty\reply
+  \else
+    \def\next##1.los##2##3\next{\ifx\relax##2\else
+      \def\reply{##1}\fi}
+    \xp@\next\reply.los\relax\next
+    \xmesj{\
+Attempting to load \reply.los . . .}%
+    \input\reply.los\space\relax
+  \fi
+  \def\reply{Q}\optionexec\reply
+}
+\def\moptionED{\xmesj{\
+Current location name is `\losdir'.\
+Enter a new location name (directory or folder or whatever, depending\
+on your system). For Unix or DOS, make sure you include the final\
+slash. (For DOS, use slashes instead of backslashes.) Just press\
+<return> if you want to leave the current location unchanged:}%
+  \readline{}\reply
+  \ifx\@empty\reply
+  \else
+    \let\losdir\reply
+    \confirm{Location name is now: `\losdir'}%
+  \fi
+  \def\reply{Q}\optionexec\reply
+}
+\fxmenu\menuF{}{
+F  Change font
+S  Change font size
+L  Change line spacing
+T  Test font availability
+N  Add new font
+}{
+Current settings: &\mainfont &\mainfontsize / &\the&\baselineskip.
+}
+\def\moptionF{\lettermenu F}
+\fxmenu\genfontmenu{
+&\firstpart
+Font choices:
+}{
+R  Roman
+B  Bold
+I  Italic
+T  Typewriter
+S  Sans serif
+}{
+Current choice is `&\fonttoget'.
+}
+\def\getfont#1#2#3{%
+  \let\fonttoget#1\def\firstpart{#2}%
+  \genfontmenu \readChar{Q}\reply
+  \edef\next{\if R\reply roman%
+             \else\if B\reply bold%
+             \else\if I\reply italic%
+             \else\if S\reply sansserif%
+             \else\if T\reply typewriter%
+             \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}%
+  \ifx\next\@empty
+  \else
+    \let#1\next \def\reply{Q}%
+    \confirm{#3 font is now `#1'.}%
+  \fi
+  \optionexec\reply
+}
+\def\moptionFF{\getfont\mainfont{%
+Note: Font style `typewriter' is recommended for printing computer\
+program code verbatim because the character set of most non-typewriter\
+fonts lacks certain characters such as { } | \string~ and \\ .}%
+{Main}}
+\fmesj\wholepointsizes{
+Note: Currently only whole point sizes are supported; the fractional
+part in a fractional point size will be ignored. If a font/size
+combination is not available on your system there will be an error
+message later on when we try to load the font.
+}%
+\def\getfontsize#1#2{\wholepointsizes
+  \mesj{Current #2 font size is #1.}%
+  \promptmesj{Desired font size? }%
+  \readline{Q}\reply
+  \if\xoptiontest\reply
+  \else
+    \checkinteger\reply\count@
+    \ifnum\count@>\z@
+      \edef#1{\the\count@}%
+      \confirm{New font size for #2: #1}%
+      \def\reply{Q}%
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \optionexec\reply
+}
+\def\moptionFS{\getfontsize\mainfontsize{main text}}
+\def\moptionFL{\promptmesj{Desired line spacing [TeX units] ? }%
+  \readline{Q}\reply
+  \if\xoptiontest\reply
+  \else
+    \checkdimen\reply\dimen@
+    \ifdim\dimen@>\z@
+      \normalbaselineskip\dimen@\relax \normalbaselines
+      \confirm{New line spacing: \the\normalbaselineskip}%
+      \def\reply{Q}%
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \optionexec\reply
+}
+\fxmenu\menuFT{
+Font to test load?
+}{
+M  main font
+T  title font
+L  line number font
+P  page number font
+H  running head font
+F  running foot font
+A  all of the above
+}{}
+\def\moptionFT{\menuFT
+  \readChar{Q}\reply
+  \if M\reply
+    \testload\mainfont\mainfontsize
+    \def\reply{Q}%
+  \else\if T\reply
+    \testload\titlefont\titlefontsize
+    \def\reply{Q}%
+  \else\if L\reply
+    \testload\linenumberfont\linenumberfontsize
+    \def\reply{Q}%
+  \else\if P\reply
+    \testload\pagenumberfont\pagenumberfontsize
+    \def\reply{Q}%
+  \else\if H\reply
+    \testload\runheadfont\runheadfontsize
+    \def\reply{Q}%
+  \else\if F\reply
+    \testload\runfootfont\runfootfontsize
+    \def\reply{Q}%
+  \else\if A\reply
+    \testload\mainfont\mainfontsize
+    \testload\pagenumberfont\pagenumberfontsize
+    \testload\titlefont\titlefontsize
+    \testload\linenumberfont\linenumberfontsize
+    \testload\runheadfont\runheadfontsize
+    \testload\runfootfont\runfootfontsize
+    \def\reply{Q}%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+  \optionexec\reply
+}
+\def\testload#1#2{\loadfont#1#2\relax
+  \xp@\ifx\csname#1#2\endcsname\nullfont
+    \confirm{Unsuccessful font load...}%
+  \else
+    \confirm{Font successfully loaded.}%
+  \fi
+}
+\fxmesj\menuFN{
+To use a custom font you must give two pieces of information: the
+name of the font metrics file (.tfm file), not including the .tfm
+extension, and a magnification (using TeX's standard notation: 1000 =
+100\%, 1200 = 120\%, ...).
+}
+\def\moptionFN{\menuFN
+  \promptmesj{OK, first give the font name: }%
+  \readline{Q}\reply
+  \if\xoptiontest\reply
+  \else
+    \let\mainfont\reply
+    \def\reply{Q}%
+    \promptmesj{Font magnification? [default=1000]: }%
+    \readline{1000}\reply
+    \if\xoptiontest\reply
+    \else
+      \checkinteger\reply\count@
+      \ifnum\count@>100 %
+        \let\mainfontsize\reply
+        \def\reply{Q}%
+      \fi
+    \fi
+    \xmesj{\
+Attempting to load new font `\mainfont\ scaled \mainfontsize'; if you\
+get an error message, press RETURN to continue, and try again.\
+    }%
+  \testload\mainfont\mainfontsize
+  \fi
+  \optionexec\reply
+}
+\fmesj\menuGa{
+:  General information on a couple of subjects:
+:
+:  ---Non-interactive usage: Create a driver file containing
+:
+:   \input listout
+:   %    Change options here, if desired
+:   \listout{first.file}
+:   \listout{second.file}
+:   ...
+:   \listoutfinish
+:   \end
+:
+:  The \listoutfinish command is required to support the possibility
+:  where multiple files are printed running together without intervening
+:  page breaks. To find out how to change options, look at the file
+:  default.los.
+:
+:  Press <return> to continue . . .}
+\fmesj\menuGb{
+:  ---Treatment of control characters and eight-bit characters: The
+:  default behavior is to assume no knowledge about the meaning of
+:  characters in the range 0--31 and 127--255, because depending on the
+:  source, the intended meaning of one of these characters in a given
+:  file can vary widely. And the default main font (cmtt) can't handle
+:  characters above 127 anyway. In order to preserve vertical alignment
+:  when printing with a monospace font (the usual case) control
+:  characters aren't printed as multicharacter sequences (e.g. ^^F), but
+:  as boxed letters. The first control character encountered in a file
+:  will generate a warning/explanatory message on screen. Similarly,
+:  characters above ASCII 126 are printed simply as boxed question
+:  marks. This behavior can be overridden by changing the main font to a
+:  256-character font and choosing the 8-bit option in the V menu.
+:
+:  Press <return> to continue . . .}
+
+\def\moptionG{\menuGa\readline{}\reply\menuGb\readline{}\reply \moptionQ}
+\fxmenu\menuH{}{
+T  Turn filename titles&\if&\printtitles off&\else on&\fi
+F  Change font of titles
+S  Change font size
+C  Change capitalization
+}{
+Current settings: %
+&\titlefont &\titlefontsize, capitalization = &\titlecase.
+}
+\def\moptionH{\lettermenu H}
+\def\moptionHT{%
+  \if\printtitles \let\printtitles\FALSE
+  \else \let\printtitles\TRUE \fi
+  \confirm{%
+The name of each file \if\printtitles WILL \else will NOT \fi
+be printed as a title at the\
+* beginning of the file.
+}%
+  \if\printtitles\else\popoptions\fi
+  \moptionQ
+}%
+\def\moptionHF{\getfont\titlefont{}{Title}}
+\def\moptionHS{\getfontsize\titlefontsize{titles}}
+\fxmenu\menuHC{
+Title capitalization choices:
+}{
+N  None
+L  Lowercase
+U  Uppercase
+}{
+Current choice is &\titlecase.
+}
+\def\moptionHC{\menuHC \readChar{Q}\reply
+  \if L\reply
+    \def\titlecase{lowercase}%
+    \confirm{Capitalization is now: lowercase.}%
+    \def\reply{Q}%
+  \else\if U\reply
+    \def\titlecase{uppercase}%
+    \confirm{Capitalization is now: uppercase.}%
+    \def\reply{Q}%
+  \else\if N\reply
+    \def\titlecase{none}%
+    \confirm{Capitalization is now: none.}%
+    \def\reply{Q}%
+  \fi\fi\fi
+  \optionexec\reply}
+\fxmesj\menuIa{
+Current option settings:
+Orientation: &\if&\landscape landscape&\else portrait&\fi
+Paper size: &\paperwidth x &\paperheight (&\the\pawd x &\the\paht)
+Margins: Top &\the\topmargin, bottom &\the\bottommargin,
+  left &\the\leftmargin, right &\the\rightmargin
+&\number\totalcols columns, column width = &\columnwidth (&\the\colwd),
+Column height: &\columnheight (&\the\colht)
+Intercolumn space: &\the\intercolspace
+Full width of text area: &\the\fullwd
+Main font: &\mainfont &\mainfontsize
+Linespacing: &\the\normalbaselineskip
+Each new file starts%
+&\if\.S&\newfileoption%
+ immediately after the previous file.
+&\else&\if\.C&\newfileoption%
+ at the top of a new column.
+&\else&\if\.P&\newfileoption%
+ on a new page.
+&\else&\if\.R&\newfileoption%
+ on the right-hand-side of a new page.
+&\else ??? unknown.
+&\fi&\fi&\fi&\fi%
+File names are &\if&\printtitles&\else\.not&\fi%
+  printed as titles at the beginning of each file.
+&\if&\printtitles%
+File name font: &\titlefont &\titlefontsize
+File name capitalization: &\titlecase
+&\fi%
+Date and time print in the form &\todaysdate and &\nowtime.
+Line numbers are turned%
+&\if&\linenumbers ON, font &\linenumberfont &\linenumberfontsize,
+  every &\number\linenumberfreq line%
+&\ifnum&\linenumberfreq=1 &\else s&\fi
+&\else OFF&\fi
+Press <return> to continue: }
+\fxmesj\menuIb{
+Page number font: &\pagenumberfont&\pagenumberfontsize
+Running heads are turned &\if&\runheads ON:
+  &\the\runhead,
+  font &\runheadfont &\runheadfontsize,
+  runhead takes up &\the\runheadht from column height.
+&\else OFF &\fi
+Running feet are turned &\if&\runfeet ON:
+  &\the\runfoot,
+  font &\runfootfont &\runfootfontsize,
+  runfoot takes up &\the\runfootht from column height.
+&\else OFF &\fi
+Tabs are printed &\number\spacespertab characters wide, %
+in style `&\tabstyle'.
+&\if&\noextralinebreaks%
+Line breaks are preserved exactly as in the original file.
+&\else%
+Extra line breaks are allowed at spaces and/or other characters.
+Text is allowed to overrun right margin by &\the\overrun.
+&\fi%
+Control-L is defined to &\if\.N&\controlLaction%
+end the current column.
+&\else print as &\if\.L&\controlLaction%
+a one-line vertical space.
+&\else%
+a boxed L.
+&\fi&\fi%
+System type is set to &\systemtype.
+Directory for .los files: &\losdir
+Directory prefix for file name titles: &\dirprefix
+Press <return> to continue: }
+\def\moptionI{\menuIa \readline{}\reply \menuIb
+  \readChar{Q}\reply \optionexec\reply}
+\fxmenu\menuL{}{
+T  Turn line numbers&\if&\linenumbers off&\else on&\fi
+F  Change font of line numbers
+S  Change font size of line numbers
+N  Change numbering frequency
+}{&\if&\linenumbers
+Current settings: &\linenumberfont &\linenumberfontsize, %
+numbering every&\ifnum&\linenumberfreq=1 line%
+&\else &\the&\linenumberfreq lines&\fi.%
+&\fi%
+}
+\def\moptionL{\lettermenu L}
+\def\moptionLT{%
+  \if\linenumbers
+    \let\linenumbers\FALSE
+  \else
+    \let\linenumbers\TRUE
+  \fi
+  \confirm{Line numbers are switched \if\linenumbers on\else off\fi.}%
+  \if\if\linenumbers\ifdim\leftmargin<12\p@ T
+       \else\ifnum\totalcols>\@ne
+          \ifdim\intercolspace<12\p@ T\else F\fi
+        \else F\fi\fi\else F\fi T%
+      \confirm{\
+* You might want to check the left margin and/or intercolspace\
+* to make sure there's enough room for the line numbers.}%
+  \else\popoptions\fi
+  \moptionQ
+}
+\def\moptionLF{\getfont\linenumberfont{}{Line number}}
+\def\moptionLS{\getfontsize\linenumberfontsize{line numbers}}
+\def\moptionLN{%
+  \xmesj{%
+Current line numbering frequency is every
+\ifnum\linenumberfreq=1 line%
+\else\ \number\linenumberfreq\ lines\fi.\
+New line numbering frequency? (1 = every line, 2 = every 2 lines,\
+and so forth):}%
+  \readline{Q}\reply
+  \if\xoptiontest\reply
+  \else
+    \checkinteger\reply\count@
+    \ifnum\count@>\z@
+      \linenumberfreq=\count@
+      \confirm{New line numbering frequency: \the\linenumberfreq}%
+      \def\reply{Q}%
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \optionexec\reply
+}
+\fxmenu\menuM{
+Current margin settings: top &\the&\topmargin, left &\the&\leftmargin,
+bottom &\the&\bottommargin, right &\the&\rightmargin.
+}{
+L  Change left margin
+T  Change top margin
+B  Change bottom margin
+R  Change right margin
+}{}
+\def\moptionM{\lettermenu M}
+\fxmesj\menuMB#1{
+Current bottom margin is #1.
+If you specify a new bottom margin, column height will be recomputed to
+come as close as possible to the desired value (nearest integer multiple
+of line spacing), taking the currently specified paper height and top
+margin into consideration. To revert to automatic computing of bottom
+margin, give an empty reply (i.e., just press the <return> key).
+Otherwise enter a measurement using TeX units:}
+\def\moptionMB{\menuMB{\the\bottommargin}%
+  \readline{}\reply
+  \ifx\@empty\reply
+    \let\dependentbottommargin\TRUE
+    \if\dependentcolht
+      \computebc
+    \fi
+    \def\reply{Q}%
+  \else
+    \if\xoptiontest\reply
+    \else
+      \checkdimen\reply\dimen@
+      \ifdim\dimen@=-\maxdimen % not a valid dimension
+      \else
+        \bottommargin\dimen@
+        \computec
+        \confirm{New column height: \the\colht\
+* New bottom margin: \the\bottommargin}%
+        \def\reply{Q}%
+      \fi
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \optionexec\reply
+}
+\fxmesj\menuML#1{
+Current left margin is #1 (measured from the left edge of the
+paper to the left edge of the text).
+<return> to keep the current value, or enter a new value:}
+\def\moptionML{\menuML{\the\leftmargin}%
+  \readline{Q}\reply
+  \if\xoptiontest\reply
+  \else
+    \checkdimen\reply\dimen@
+    \ifdim\dimen@=-\maxdimen
+    \else
+      \leftmargin\dimen@
+      \confirm{New left margin: \the\leftmargin}%
+      \if\linenumbers\ifdim\leftmargin<12\p@
+      \confirm{\
+* Warning: small left margin, might not be big enough for line\
+* numbers to fit ...}%
+      \fi\fi
+      \def\reply{Q}%
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \optionexec\reply
+}
+\fxmesj\menuMR#1{
+Current right margin is #1 (measured from the right edge of the
+paper to the right edge of the text). To revert to automatic
+computation of the right margin, give an empty reply; or enter a new
+value using TeX units (or enter Q or X or ? to quit/exit/get-help).
+New right margin:}
+\def\moptionMR{\menuMR{\the\rightmargin}%
+  \readline{}\reply
+  \ifx\@empty\reply
+    \let\dependentrightmargin\TRUE
+    \rightmargin=\leftmargin
+    \confirm{New right margin: \the\rightmargin}%
+    \def\reply{Q}%
+  \fi
+  \if\xoptiontest\reply
+  \else
+    \checkdimen\reply\dimen@
+    \ifdim\dimen@=-\maxdimen
+    \else
+      \rightmargin\dimen@
+      \confirm{New right margin: \the\rightmargin}%
+      \let\dependentrightmargin\FALSE
+      \def\reply{Q}%
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \optionexec\reply
+}
+\fxmesj\menuMT#1{
+Current top margin is #1 (measured from the top edge of the
+paper to the top of the running head or the text).
+<return> to keep the current value, or enter a new value:}
+\def\moptionMT{\menuMT{\the\topmargin}%
+  \readline{Q}\reply
+  \if\xoptiontest\reply
+  \else
+    \checkdimen\reply\dimen@
+    \ifdim\dimen@=-\maxdimen
+    \else
+      \topmargin\dimen@
+      \confirm{New top margin: \the\topmargin}%
+      \def\reply{Q}%
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \optionexec\reply
+}
+\fxmesj\menuN#1{
+Number of columns: #1.
+<return> to keep the current value, or enter a new value
+(a number greater than 0):}
+\def\moptionN{\menuN{\number\totalcols}%
+  \readline{Q}\reply
+  \if\xoptiontest\reply
+  \else
+    \checkinteger\reply\count@
+    \ifnum\count@=-\maxdimen
+    \else
+      \if\ifnum\count@>\z@
+         \ifnum\count@<\sixt@@n T\else F\fi\else F\fi T%
+        \chardef\totalcols=\count@
+        \if\dependentcolwd
+          \if\dependentrightmargin \computerfc \else \computefc \fi
+        \else
+          \computefr
+        \fi
+        \confirm{%
+  Number of columns: \number\totalcols\space
+  (column width: \the\colwd, %
+\ifnum\totalcols>\@ne intercolumn space: \the\intercolspace,\
+* \fi total width: \the\fullwd)}
+        \def\reply{Q}%
+      \else
+        \ifnum\count@>20
+          \specialhelp\reply
+            {Maximum number of columns is 20, sorry...}%
+        \else
+          \specialhelp\reply
+            {Number of columns must be greater than 0}%
+        \fi
+      \fi
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \optionexec\reply
+}
+\fxmenu\menuO{
+Current orientation: &\if&\landscape\.landscape.&\else\.portrait&\fi
+}{
+P  Switch to portrait orientation
+L  Switch to landscape orientation
+}{}
+\def\moptionO{\menuO \readChar{Q}\reply
+  \if P\reply
+    \if\landscape \let\landscape\FALSE
+      \dimen@\paht \paht\pawd \pawd\dimen@
+    \fi
+    \confirm{Orientation is now: portrait}%
+    \def\reply{Q}%
+  \else
+    \if L\reply
+      \if\landscape \else \let\landscape\TRUE
+        \dimen@\paht \paht\pawd \pawd\dimen@
+      \fi
+      \confirm{Orientation is now: landscape}%
+      \def\reply{Q}%
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \optionexec\reply
+}
+\fxmenu\menuP{
+Current paper size: &\paperwidth x &\paperheight
+}{
+W  Change paper width
+H  Change paper height
+U  U.S. letter size paper: 8.5in x 11in
+A  A4 paper: 21cm x 29.7cm
+}{}
+\def\moptionP{\lettermenu P}
+\def\moptionPW{\promptmesj{New paper width: }%
+  \readline{Q}\reply
+  \if\xoptiontest\reply
+  \else
+    \checkdimen\reply\dimen@
+    \ifdim\dimen@=-\maxdimen
+    \else
+      \ifdim\dimen@>1cm
+        \let\paperwidth\reply
+        \pawd\dimen@
+        \confirm{New paper width: \paperwidth\space(\the\pawd)}%
+        \def\reply{Q}%
+      \else
+        \specialhelp\reply{%
+Sorry, I can't believe you really want a width of \reply!}%
+      \fi
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \optionexec\reply
+}
+\def\moptionPH{\promptmesj{New paper height: }%
+  \readline{Q}\reply
+  \if\xoptiontest\reply
+  \else
+    \checkdimen\reply\dimen@
+    \ifdim\dimen@=-\maxdimen
+    \else
+      \ifdim\dimen@>1cm
+        \let\paperheight\reply
+        \paht\dimen@
+        \confirm{New paper height: \paperheight\space(\the\paht)}%
+        \def\reply{Q}%
+      \else
+        \specialhelp\reply{%
+Sorry, I can't believe you really want a height of \reply!}%
+      \fi
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \optionexec\reply
+}
+\def\moptionPU{%
+  \if\landscape
+    \paht=8.5truein \pawd=11truein
+    \def\paperheight{8.5in}\def\paperwidth{11in}%
+  \else
+    \paht=11truein \pawd=8.5truein
+    \def\paperheight{11in}\def\paperwidth{8.5in}%
+  \fi
+  \confirm{New paper width: \paperwidth\space(\the\pawd)\
+* New paper height: \paperheight\space(\the\paht)%
+\if\landscape\
+(landscape)\fi}%
+  \moptionQ
+}
+\def\moptionPA{%
+  \if\landscape
+    \paht=21cm \pawd=29.7cm
+    \def\paperheight{21cm}\def\paperwidth{29.7cm}%
+  \else
+    \paht=29.7cm \pawd=21cm
+    \def\paperheight{29.7cm}\def\paperwidth{21cm}%
+  \fi
+  \confirm{New paper width: \paperwidth\space(\the\pawd)\
+* New paper height: \paperheight\space(\the\paht)%
+  \if\landscape\
+  (landscape)\fi}%
+  \moptionQ
+}
+\fxmenu\menuR{
+Running heads are turned &\if&\runheads\.on.
+Running head contents:
+&\the&\runhead
+&\else\.off.
+&\fi%
+Running feet are turned &\if&\runfeet\.on.
+Running foot contents:
+&\the&\runfoot
+&\else\.off.
+&\fi%
+}{
+H  Change running heads
+F  Change running feet
+}{}
+\def\moptionR{\lettermenu R}
+\fmenu\menuRHorF#1{}{
+C  Change running #1 contents
+F  Change running #1 font
+S  Change running #1 font size
+}{}
+\def\moptionRH{\menuRHorF{head}\readChar{Q}\reply \optionexec\reply}
+\fxmesj\menuRHC{
+Current running head contents:
+&\the&\runhead
+Enter new running head contents (to turn off running heads,
+just press <return>):}
+\def\moptionRHC{\menuRHC
+  \xreadline{}\reply
+  \if\xoptiontest\reply
+  \else
+    \global\runhead\xp@{\reply}%
+    \ifx\reply\@empty
+      \global\let\runheads\FALSE
+    \else
+      \global\let\runheads\TRUE
+      \confirm{New running head:\
+               \the\runhead}%
+    \fi
+    \def\reply{Q}%
+  \fi
+  \optionexec\reply
+}
+\def\moptionRHF{\getfont\runheadfont{}{Running head}}
+\def\moptionRHS{\getfontsize\runheadfontsize{running heads}}
+\def\moptionRF{\menuRHorF{foot}\readChar{Q}\reply \optionexec\reply}
+\fxmesj\menuRFC{
+Current running foot contents:
+&\the&\runfoot
+Enter new running foot contents (to turn off running feet,
+just press <return>):}
+\def\moptionRFC{\menuRFC
+  \xreadline{}\reply
+  \if\xoptiontest\reply
+  \else
+    \global\runfoot\xp@{\reply}%
+    \ifx\reply\@empty
+      \global\let\runfeet\FALSE
+    \else
+      \global\let\runfeet\TRUE
+      \confirm{New running foot:\
+               \the\runfoot}%
+    \fi
+    \def\reply{Q}%
+  \fi
+  \optionexec\reply
+}
+\def\moptionRFF{\getfont\runfootfont{}{Running foot}}
+\def\moptionRFS{\getfontsize\runfootfontsize{running feet}}
+\fxmenu\menuS{
+System information. Current system type is &\systemtype;
+directory prefix to be used for all files printed in this run is
+&\ifx&\@empty&\dirprefix\.null.&\else
+&\dirprefix&\fi
+}{
+S  Change system type
+D  Change directory prefix
+}{}
+\def\moptionS{\lettermenu{S}}
+\fxmenu\menuSS{
+System type options:
+}{
+D  DOS
+M  Macintosh
+U  Unix
+V  VAX/VMS
+O  Other
+}{
+Currently this information is only used to help in printing directory
+names that may occur in the titles printed at the beginning of each
+file. Current system type is &\systemtype.
+}
+\def\moptionSS{\menuSS
+  \readChar{Q}\reply
+  \if D\reply \def\systemtype{DOS}\def\currentdir{./}\def\reply{Q}%
+  \else\if M\reply
+    \def\systemtype{Macintosh}\def\currentdir{}\def\reply{Q}%
+  \else\if U\reply
+    \def\systemtype{Unix}\def\currentdir{./}\def\reply{Q}%
+  \else\if V\reply
+    \def\systemtype{VAX/VMS}%
+    \edef\currentdir{sys\string $disk:[]}\def\reply{Q}%
+  \else \def\systemtype{other}\def\currentdir{}\def\reply{Q}%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi
+  \optionexec\reply
+}
+\fxmesj\menuSD{
+Current directory/folder prefix for all file names is
+&\ifx&\@empty&\dirprefix\.null.&\else
+  `&\dirprefix'
+&\fi
+Enter the new directory prefix below.
+(Enter Q to quit without changing the prefix.)}
+\def\moptionSD{%
+  \menuSD
+  \readline{}\reply
+  \let\next\reply \changecase\uppercase\next
+  \if\xoptiontest\next
+    \let\reply\next
+  \else
+    \let\dirprefix\reply
+    \ifx\dirprefix\@empty
+      \confirm{Directory prefix is now null.}%
+    \else
+      \confirm{New directory name:\
+        \dirprefix\
+      }%
+    \fi
+    \def\reply{Q}%
+  \fi
+  \optionexec\reply
+}
+\fxmenu\menuT{
+Currently tabs will print as &\tabstyle.
+The horizontal extent of each tab will be %
+&\number&\spacespertab spaces.
+}{
+T  Change tab representation
+N  Change the number of spaces per tab
+}{}
+\def\moptionT{\lettermenu T}
+\fmenu\menuTT#1{
+Tab representation choices:
+}{
+B  Blank space
+.  Dots
+-  Dashed line
+H  Hrulefill
+T  Tiny`TAB's fill
+}{
+These are better understood by trying them out than by having them
+explained in words. Current tab style is `#1'.
+}
+\def\reportnewtabstyle#1{%
+  \chardef\tabselect=#1 \relax
+  \confirm{Tab style is now `\tabstyle'}%
+  \def\reply{Q}%
+}
+\def\moptionTT{\menuTT\tabstyle
+  \readChar{Q}\reply
+  \if B\reply
+    \reportnewtabstyle{0}%
+  \else\if .\reply
+    \reportnewtabstyle{1}%
+  \else\if -\reply
+    \reportnewtabstyle{2}%
+  \else\if H\reply
+    \reportnewtabstyle{3}%
+  \else\if T\reply
+    \reportnewtabstyle{4}%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+  \optionexec\reply
+}
+\def\moptionTN{%
+  \promptmesj{Enter the desired number of spaces per tab: }%
+  \readline{Q}\reply
+  \if\xoptiontest\reply
+  \else
+    \checkinteger\reply\count@
+    \ifnum\count@=-\maxdimen
+    \else
+      \ifnum\count@<256
+        \chardef\spacespertab=\count@
+        \confirm{%
+  The number of spaces per tab is now \number\spacespertab.}%
+        \def\reply{Q}%
+      \else
+        \mesj{Sorry, spaces per tab cannot be more than 255.}%
+        \def\reply{}%  repeat the prompt
+      \fi
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \optionexec\reply
+}
+\fmenu\menuV{}{
+  8  Treatment of 8-bit characters
+  L  Treatment of Control-L characters
+}{}
+\def\moptionV{\lettermenu{V}}
+\fxmenu\menuVL{
+Three choices are offered for the treatment of Control-L characters:
+}{
+  B  Print a boxed L (same treatment as other control characters)
+  L  Print one line of space
+  N  End current text column, start a new column
+}{
+Current setting is &\controlLaction.
+}
+\def\moptionVL{\menuVL
+  \readChar{Q}\reply
+  \if B\reply
+    \let\controlLaction\reply
+    \confirm{Control-L characters will print as boxed L's}%
+  \else\if L\reply
+    \let\controlLaction\reply
+    \confirm{Control-L characters will print as a one-line space}%
+  \else\if N\reply
+    \let\controlLaction\reply
+    \confirm{%
+Control-L characters will perform a `formfeed' [new column] action}%
+  \fi\fi\fi
+  \def\reply{Q}\optionexec\reply
+}
+\expandafter\fxmenu\csname menuV8\endcsname{
+Two choices are offered for the treatment of 8-bit characters, that
+is, characters in the range 128--255:
+}{
+  A  Print according to the current font
+  B  Print a boxed question mark
+}{
+Current setting is &\eightbitaction.
+For option A, you must be careful to also select a font that is capable
+of printing 8-bit characters (see option F in the main menu); otherwise,
+8-bit characters will disappear silently from the printed output with
+nothing more than a warning in the TeX log.
+}
+\expandafter\def\csname moptionV8\endcsname{%
+  \csname menuV8\endcsname
+  \readchar{Q}\reply
+  \if A\reply \def\eightbitaction{A}%
+  \else\if B\reply \def\eightbitaction{B}%
+  \fi\fi
+  \def\reply{Q}\optionexec\reply
+}
+\moption
+\printfiles
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `listout.tex'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/dialogl/menus.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/dialogl/menus.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..393d786e1e0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/dialogl/menus.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,261 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `menus.sty',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% menus.dtx  (with options: `2e')
+%% This is a generated file.
+%% 
+%% Copyright 1994 Michael John Downes
+%% Copyright 2013 TeX Users Group.
+%% 
+%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1
+%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+%% The latest version of this license is in
+%%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%% 
+%% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "unmaintained".
+%% 
+%% The list of all files belonging to the distribution is given in the file
+%% `manifest.txt'.
+%% 
+%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%%% ====================================================================
+%%%  @LaTeX-style-file{
+%%%     filename        = "menus.dtx",
+%%%     version         = "1.99a",
+%%%     date            = "2013/01/24",
+%%%     author          = "Michael Downes",
+%%%     copyright       = "This file is part of the dialogl package, released
+%%%                        under the LPPL; see dialogl.ins for details."
+%%%     keywords        = "TeX, menus",
+%%%     supported       = "no",
+%%%     abstract        = "This file provides functions for writing
+%%%       messages and menus on screen, and reading user responses. It
+%%%       can be used with LaTeX as a documentstyle option, or in
+%%%       other forms of TeX by a standard \input statement.",
+%%%  }
+%%% ====================================================================
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+\ProvidesPackage{menus}[1994/11/08 v0.9x]
+\RequirePackage{dialog}
+\localcatcodes{\@{11}%
+  \~{13}\"{12}\#{6}\^{7}\`{12}\${3}\:{12}}
+\storexmesj\menuprefix{
+======================================================================
+}
+\let\menusuffix=\menuprefix
+\storemesj\inmenuA{
+}
+\storemesj\inmenuB{
+}
+\storemesj\menuline{  }
+\def\menutopline{}
+\def\menubotline{}
+\storemesj\endmenuline{
+}%
+\def\menunumber#1{[#1] }
+\def\menuprompt{\promptmesj{Your choice? }}
+\newtoks\menufirstpart
+\newtoks\menuchoices
+\newtoks\menulastpart
+\def\fmenu#1#2#{\mesjsetup
+  \catcode`\#=6 % for parameters
+  \toks@{\fxmenub{\gdef}{\begingroup}{}#1{#2}}%
+  \def\@tempa##1##{%
+    \def\@tempa####1####{%
+      \def\@tempa{\the\toks@}%
+      \afterassignment\@tempa \menulastpart}%
+    \afterassignment\@tempa \menuchoices}%
+  \afterassignment\@tempa \menufirstpart
+}
+\begingroup % localize \lccode change
+\lccode`\~=`\^^M
+\lowercase{%
+\long\gdef\stripM#1$~#2#3\stripM#4{%
+  \ifx$#2%
+    \stripMa#1\stripMa#4%
+  \else
+    \stripMb#2#3\stripMb#4%
+  \fi
+}
+}% end lowercase
+\lowercase{%
+\long\gdef\stripMa $#1\stripMa#2{%
+  \stripMb#1$~$$\stripMb#2}
+}% end lowercase
+\lowercase{%
+\long\gdef\stripMb#1~$#2#3\stripMb#4{%
+  \ifx$#2%
+    \stripMc#1\stripMc#4%
+  \else
+    \stripMd#1\stripMd#4%
+  \fi
+}
+}% end lowercase
+\long\gdef\stripMc#1$#2\stripMc#3{%
+  \stripMd#1\stripMd#3}
+\long\gdef\stripMd#1\stripMd#2{#2{#1}}
+\endgroup
+\begingroup \lccode`\~=`\^^M
+\lowercase{%
+\gdef\stripcontrolMs#1{\xp@\stripM
+  \xp@$\the#1$~$$\stripM#1}
+}% end lowercase
+\lowercase{%
+\gdef\addmenulines#1#2#3{%
+  \def ~##1~##2{%
+    #1\xp@{\the#1#2##1#3}%
+    \ifx\end##2\xp@\@gobbletwo\fi~##2}%
+  \edef\@tempa{\nx@~\the#1\nx@~}#1{}%
+  \@tempa\end}
+}% end lowercase
+\endgroup % restore lccode of ~
+\def\fxmenub#1#2#3#4#5{%
+  \stripcontrolMs\menufirstpart
+  \stripcontrolMs\menulastpart
+  \stripcontrolMs\menuchoices
+  \addmenulines\menuchoices\menuline\endmenuline
+  \actively\let\^^M\relax % needed for \xdef
+  \toks@{\long#1#4#5}% e.g. \xdef\foo##1##2
+  \edef\@tempa{\the\menufirstpart}%
+  \ifx\@tempa\@empty
+    \let\nxa@\@gobble
+  \else
+    \addmenulines\menufirstpart
+      \menutopline\endmenuline
+    \let\nxa@\nx@
+  \fi
+ \edef\@tempa{\the\menulastpart}%
+  \ifx\@tempa\@empty
+    \let\nxb@\@gobble
+  \else
+    \addmenulines\menulastpart
+      \menubotline\endmenuline
+    \let\nxb@\nx@
+  \fi
+\edef\@tempa{{#3\nx@#3#2%
+    \def#3\nx@#3\mesjtext{%
+      #3\nx@#3\menuprefix
+      \the\menufirstpart #3\nxa@#3\inmenuA
+      \the\menuchoices #3\nxb@#3\inmenuB
+      \the\menulastpart #3\nx@#3\menusuffix}%
+    #3\nx@#3\sendmesj
+    #3\nx@#3\menuprompt}}%
+  \toks2 \xp@{\@tempa}%
+  \edef\@tempa{\the\toks@\the\toks2 }%
+  \let\menutopline\relax \let\menuline\relax
+  \let\menubotline\relax \let\endmenuline\relax
+  \let\menunumber\relax
+  \@tempa % finally, execute the \gdef or \xdef
+  \endgroup % matches \mesjsetup done by \fxmenu
+}% end \fxmenub
+\def\fxmenu#1#2#{\xmesjsetup
+  \toks@{\fxmenub{\xdef}{\xmesjsetup}\nx@#1{#2}}%
+  \def\@tempa##1##{%
+    \def\@tempa####1####{%
+      \def\@tempa{\the\toks@}%
+      \afterassignment\@tempa \menulastpart}%
+    \afterassignment\@tempa \menuchoices}%
+  \afterassignment\@tempa \menufirstpart
+}
+\def\notyet#1{%
+  \errmessage{Not yet implemented:  \string#1}}
+\long\def\nmenu#1#2#3#4#5{\notyet\nmenu}
+\long\def\nxmenu#1#2#3#4#5{\notyet\nxmenu}
+\newtoks\optionstack
+\let\curmenu\@empty
+\let\estart\relax
+\let\eend\relax
+\def\pushoptions#1{%
+  \edef\pushtemp{\estart
+    \def\nx@\curmenu{\curmenu}%
+    \eend
+    \the\optionstack}%
+  \global\optionstack\xp@{\pushtemp}%
+  \edef\curmenu{\curmenu#1}%
+}
+\def\popoptions{%
+  \edef\@tempa{\the\optionstack}%
+  \ifx\@empty\@tempa
+    \errmessage{Can't pop empty stack
+      (\string\optionstack)}%
+  \else
+    \def\estart##1\eend##2\@nil{%
+      \global\optionstack{##2}%
+      \let\estart\relax##1}%
+    \the\optionstack\@nil
+  \fi
+}
+\fmesj\moptionX{Exiting . . .}
+\def\repeatoption{%
+  \csname moption\curmenu\endcsname}
+\def\moptionQ{\popoptions \repeatoption}
+\fxmesj\badoptionmesj#1{%
+?---I don't understand "#1".}
+\def\optionexec#1{%
+  \if ?#1\relax \let\@tempa\moptionhelp
+  \else \if Q#1\relax
+    \ifx\curmenu\@empty \let\@tempa\moptionX
+    \else \let\@tempa\moptionQ \fi
+  \else \if X#1\relax \let\@tempa\moptionX
+  \else
+    \xp@\let\xp@\@tempa
+      \csname moption\curmenu#1\endcsname
+    \ifx\@tempa\relax
+      \badoptionmesj{#1}\let\@tempa\repeatoption
+    \else
+      \pushoptions{#1}%
+    \fi
+  \fi\fi\fi
+  \@tempa
+}
+\def\optionfileexec#1{\notyet\optionfileexec}
+\def\xoptiontest#1{TT\fi
+  \begingroup \def\0{?}\def\1{Q}%
+  \def\2{q}\def\3{x}\def\4{X}%
+    \aftergroup\if\aftergroup T%
+    \ifx\0#1\aftergroup T%
+    \else\ifx\1#1\aftergroup T%
+    \else\ifx\2#1\aftergroup T%
+    \else\ifx\3#1\aftergroup T%
+    \else\ifx\4#1\aftergroup T%
+    \else \aftergroup F%
+    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+  \endgroup
+}
+\fxmesj\menuhelpmesj{&\menuprefix%
+A response of Q will usually send you back to %
+the previous menu.
+A response of X will get you entirely out of %
+the menu system.
+&\menusuffix%
+Press the <Return> key ( Enter ) to continue:
+}
+\def\moptionhelp{%
+  \menuhelpmesj \readline{}\reply \repeatoption}
+\def\moptionhelp{%
+  \menuhelpmesj \readline{}\reply \repeatoption}
+\xp@\def\csname moption?\endcsname{%
+  \moptionhelp}
+\def\specialhelp#1#2{%
+  \let\specialhelpreply=#1\def#1{?}\begingroup
+  \def\menuhelpmesj{\let#1\specialhelpreply
+    \promptxmesj{#2\
+Press <return> to continue:}\endgroup}%
+}
+\def\specialhelpreply{}
+\def\lettermenu#1{%
+  \csname menu#1\endcsname
+  \readChar{Q}\reply \optionexec\reply
+}
+\restorecatcodes
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `menus.sty'.
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/bin/tlpkg-ctan-check b/Master/tlpkg/bin/tlpkg-ctan-check
index 702e4685538..56a23e87163 100755
--- a/Master/tlpkg/bin/tlpkg-ctan-check
+++ b/Master/tlpkg/bin/tlpkg-ctan-check
@@ -133,7 +133,7 @@ my @TLP_working = qw(
     dateiliste datenumber datetime
     dblfloatfix dcpic de-macro decimal decorule dehyph-exptl dejavu
     delim delimtxt dhua
-    diagbox diagmac2 diagnose dice dichokey dictsym digiconfigs din1505
+    diagbox diagmac2 dialogl diagnose dice dichokey dictsym digiconfigs din1505
     dinat dinbrief dingbat directory dirtree dirtytalk disser dk-bib dlfltxb
     dnaseq doc-pictex docmfp docmute documentation doi doipubmed
     dosepsbin dot2texi dotarrow dotseqn dottex
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/libexec/ctan2tds b/Master/tlpkg/libexec/ctan2tds
index 937d7cfbdd8..604361eecce 100755
--- a/Master/tlpkg/libexec/ctan2tds
+++ b/Master/tlpkg/libexec/ctan2tds
@@ -299,7 +299,6 @@ chomp ($Build = `cd $Master/../Build/source && pwd`);
  'diagmac',	"die 'skipping, for latex 2.09 and we have diagmac2'",
  'diagnose',	"&MAKEflatten",
  'diagxy',	"die 'skipping, use barr'",
- 'dialogl',	"die 'skipping, noinfo license, author deceased'",
  'dictsym',	"&MAKEunzipandflatten",
  'disser',	"&MAKEdisser",
  'dktools',	"die 'skipping, needs compilation, etc.'",
@@ -1285,7 +1284,7 @@ $standardtex='\.(.bx|cfg|sty|clo|ldf|cls|def|fd|cmap|4ht)$';
  'cweb-latex',	'cwebbase.tex|' . $standardtex,
  'cyrillic',	'\.tex|\.sty|\.fd$|\.def',
  'dehyph-exptl','de.*-x-.*\.tex|\.pat',
- 'dialogl',	'\.sty|listouti\.tex',
+ 'dialogl',	'[^c]\.sty|listout\.tex', # not dialogl-doc.sty
  'din1505',     'NULL', # no tex files, only natbib.cfg, would be system-wide
  'dirtree',	'\.tex|' . $standardtex,
  'disser',	'\.rtx|' . $standardtex,
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlpsrc/collection-latexextra.tlpsrc b/Master/tlpkg/tlpsrc/collection-latexextra.tlpsrc
index 5b53194a174..a66de3d5bc8 100644
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlpsrc/collection-latexextra.tlpsrc
+++ b/Master/tlpkg/tlpsrc/collection-latexextra.tlpsrc
@@ -179,6 +179,7 @@ depend delim
 depend delimtxt
 depend diagbox
 depend diagnose
+depend dialogl
 depend dichokey
 depend dinbrief
 depend directory
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlpsrc/dialogl.tlpsrc b/Master/tlpkg/tlpsrc/dialogl.tlpsrc
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..e69de29bb2d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/tlpkg/tlpsrc/dialogl.tlpsrc